Skip to main content

Full text of "Sharp AR-M350, 450 Service Manual"

See other formats


SERVICE MANUAL 



CODE : OOZARM350/A1E 




LASER PRINTER 



MODEL 



AR-M350 
AR-M450 



OPTIONS AR-EF1 / AR-M1 1 / AR-RK1 



[1 
[2 
[3 
[4 
[5 
[6 
[7 
[8 
[9 
[10 

[11 
[12 



CONTENTS 

PRODUCT OUTLINE 1-1 

CONFIGURATION 2-1 

SPECIFICATIONS 3-1 

CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-1 

EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-1 

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-1 

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-1 

MACHINE OPERATION 8-1 

ADJUSTMENTS 9-1 

SIMULATIONS 10-1 

TROUBLE CODES 11-1 

ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-1 



Parts marked with " /j\ " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. 

Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set. 



SHARP CORPORATION 



This document has been published to be used for 

after sales service only. 

The contents are subject to change without notice. 



CAUTION 



This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this 

machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified 

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 

This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eye's retina, there is the danger of 

spot damage to the retina. 

The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 

1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 

2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 

3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical 
system. 

4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. 

Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot. 

Cautions on laser 



Wave length 


-,„,- +10 nm 
785 nm „ _ 

-15nm 


At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit 
is adjusted to 0.4 MILLIWATT PLUS 8 % and is maintained 
constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC) . 


Pulse times 


North America: 

35 cpm model: (4.1 |as ± 4.1 ns)/7 mm 
45 cpm model: (5.7 us ± 5.7 ns)/7 mm 

Europe: 

35 cpm model: (3.8 us + 3.8 ns)/7 mm 
45 cpm model: (4.4 \is ± 4.4 ns)/7 mm 




Caution 

This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure 
safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access 
to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified 
personnel. 


Output power 


0.2mW-0.4mW 



For North America: 



For Europe: 



SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 

This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1 040.1 and 1 040.1 1 of the 
CDRH standards.This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For 
your safety, observe the precautions below. 

q Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers. 

q The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any 
safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots. 



Caution 

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in 
hazardous radiation exposure. 




*A-£ggi+Tri^'f' >:?-n •;/:?**« S*IC Ufcif^lCli 
Is— tf— 3tlc £ h Sftftl » =fc 5 IC LT < tiS U. 



CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 



LASER KLASSE 1 



LUQKAN 1 LASERLAITE 
KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT 



CAUTION 

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION 
WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS 
DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE 
TO BEAM. 

VORSICHT 

UNSICHTBARE 
LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN 
ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET UND 
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG 
UBERBRUCKT. NICHT DEM 
STRAHLAUSSETZEN. 

ADVARSEL 

USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING 
VED ABNING, NAR 
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER 
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGA 
UDSAETTELSE FOR 
STRALNING. 

VAROITUS! 

LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN 
MUULLAKUINTASSA 
KAYTTOOHJEESSA 
MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA 
ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN 
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 
YLITTAVALLE 
NAKYMATTOMALLE 
LASERSATEILYLLE. 

VARNING 

OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA 
ANNAT SATT AN I DENNA 
BRUKSANVISNING 
SPECIFICERATS, KAN 
ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR 
OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING, 
SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN 
FOR LASERKLASS 1. 



CONTENTS 



[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1-1 

[2] CONFIGURATION 

1 . System Configurations 2-1 

2. Standard 2-1 

3. List of combination of peripheral devices 2-2 

[3] SPECIFICATIONS 

1 . Basic Specification 3-1 

2. Specific Function 3-2 

3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF) 3-5 

4. Rack for Scanner 3-6 

[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS 

1 . Supply system table 4-1 

2. Production number identification 4-5 

3. Environmental conditions 4-5 

[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 

1 . Appearance 5-1 

2. Operation Panel 5-2 

3. Touch Panel 5-3 

4. Cross sectional view 5-6 

5. Switch, Sensor 5-6 

6. PWB 5-7 

7. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid 5-7 

[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 

1 . Installing procedure flowchart 6-1 

2. Note for installation place 6-2 

3. Unpacking procedure 6-2 

4. Machine installing procedure 6-2 

5. AR-EF1 / AR-RK1 6-6 

6. Automatic developer adjustment 6-8 

7. Adjustment of distortion 6-8 

8. AR-M11 6-9 



[7] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 

1 . Self print of set values 7-1 

2. Maintenance System Table 7-1 

3. Disassembly and assembly 7-4 

[8] MACHINE OPERATION 

1 . Acceptable originals 8-1 

2. Standard original setting orientation 8-1 

3. Automatic copy image rotation 

- rotation copying 8-1 

4. Adjustment values 8-1 

5. Key operator program 8-3 

[9] ADJUSTMENTS 

1 . Process section 9-1 

2. Engine section 9-2 

3. Scanner section 9-3 

[10] SIMULATIONS 

1. Entering the simulation mode 10-1 

2. Switching the simulation mode 10-1 

3. Canceling the simulation mode 10-1 

4. Simulation list 10-1 

5. Details of simulations 10-9 

[11] TROUBLE CODES 

1 . Trouble codes list 11-1 

2. Details of trouble codes 11-2 

3. Network communication error 11-10 

4. Fatal / Non-Fatal Error Table 11-11 

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION 

1. Block Diagram 12-1 

2. Circuit Diagram 12-2 



[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 



For the items which are not specified in this Service Manual, 
refer to the AR-P350/P450 Service Manual. 



A. Scanner unit with duplex SPF (AR-EF1) 

This unit is an option scanner unit for the laser printer AR-P350/P450/ 

M350/M450. 

By installing this unit to the above laser printer (installation of the 

AR-RK1 is also required), the printer can work as a digital multi-function 

device with the following functions: 

1) Copy function 

2) Network scanner function 

(The AR-NS2, network scanner kit, is required.) 

3) Fax function (The AR-FX5, fax extending kit, is required.) 

B. Multi-function controller (AR-M11) 

This unit is a multi-function controller for the laser printer AR-P350/P450. 

When installing the AR-EF1 to the above laser printer, the printer 
controller must be replaced with this multi-function controller. 

C. Scanner rack (AR-RK1) 

This rack is required when installing the scanner unit (AR-EF1) with 
duplex DSPF to the laser printer AR-P350/P450/M350/M450. 
To install this rack, the machine must be equipped with the large capacity 
paper feed desk (AR-D13) or the 3 stage paper feed desk (AR-D14). 

D. AR-M350/M450 

This machine is a version of the AR-P350/P450, and is equipped with 
the multi-function controller as standard equipments. 
To install this model, the large capacity paper feed desk (AR-D1 3) or the 
3 stage paper feed desk (AR-D14) is required. 



AR-M350 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1-1 



[2] CONFIGURATION 
1. System Configurations 



Exit tray 

(AR-TE3 or AR-DU4 Standard) 



B/W scanner module/DSPF(AR-EF1 ) 



Finisher 
(AR-FN6) 



Saddle stitch 

finisher 

(AR-FN7) 




Stand/3 x 500 sheet 

paper drawer 

(AR-D14) 



Simultaneous installation 
not allowed 



Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet 

paper drawer 

(AR-D13) 



2. Standard 



Category 


Model 
Name 


Other options required for the installation/mounting. 
(Options must be ordered separately.) 


Remarks 


Printer model (35ppm) 


AR-P350 


•Multi Purpose Drawer (AR-MU1), or Stand/MPD&2000 Sheet Paper Drawer (AR-D1 3), or Three 

paper drawer stand (AR-D14) 
•Power Supply Unit (AR-DC1) is required for Stand/MPD&2000 Sheet Paper Drawer (AR-D13) and 

Three paper drawer stand (AR-D14) 




Printer model (45ppm) 


AR-P450 


MFP model (35ppm) 


AR-M350 


•B/W Scanner module/DSPF (AR-EF1) (Standard) 

•Scanner Rack(AR-RKI) (Standard) 

•Stand/MPD&2000 sheet paper drawer (AR-D13) or Three paper drawer stand (AR-D14) 

•Power supply unit (AR-DC1 ) 




MFP model (45ppm) 


AR-M450 



AR-M350 CONFIGURATION 2-1 



3. List of combination of peripheral devices 



As shown in the table below, some other peripheral devices ( B ) may be needed for installation of a peripheral device ( A ) and some peripheral devices 
cannot be installed together. 

B 







Related for scanner feature 




LL 
LL 
W 

Q 
jE 

13 
"O 
O 

E 

ED 

C 

c 

CO 

o 
tfl 

<: 

s 


o 

2 

S 
c 
c 

CO 

o 
CO 


CD 

s 

CO 

-a 

CD 
CO 
O 
Q_ 

Z5 

a. 

"5 
5 


cd 

"D 

cd 
a. 

CC 

Q_ 

"5 
CD 

JZ 

<s> 
CD 
O 

m 

X 

CO 
"B 

£Z 
CO 

CO 


CD 
CD 
JZ 
CO 
O 
O 
O 
CM 

°8 
Q 

a. 
5 

T3 
C 
CO 

W 


>. 

5 

CO 
CO 
CO 

a. 
>. 

_Q 
O 

3 
13 
O 
E 

X 

CD 

Q. 

3 

a 


a> 

3 
T3 
O 

E 

X 

CD 

Q. 

3 

a 


CD 
SZ 
CO 

'c 

JZ 
o 

to 
CD 
T3 
T3 
CO 

CO 


CD 
CO 

ll 


CD 

o 
3 

to 
cz 
la 

CO 

5 


CO 

X 

LU 


c 
o 
'co 
C 

B 

X 

CD 

CO 

X 

CD 

CD 
Q. 
Q. 
Z> 


'c 

Z3 

O 
C 
13 
D. 


-p 
cB 
o 

_Q 

_a3 

~o 

c 
o 
u 

c 
o 

o 
c 

D 

3 
5 


"E 

o 

> 

w 
c 


c 
o 

CO 

c 

CO 
CL 
X 
CD 

CO 

CO 

LL 


1*: 

cz 
o 
"w 

as 
Q. 
X 

CD 

CD 

a 
a5 
O 

w 
-x: 
O 


c 
o 

CO 

c 

CO 
Q_ 
X 
CD 

jd 
E 

CO 

o 

CO 
LL 


5 

CO 

o 

E 

CD 

E 

X 

CO 
LL 


3 

>s 

a. 

Q_ 
CO 
CD 

s 

o 

Q. 


CD 
> 

CO 

-a 

CO 
I 






B/W scanner module/DSPF *3 


AR-EF1 


- 


O 


X 


o* 1 


















o 












o 






Scanner rack *3 


AR-RK1 


d 1 


- 


X 


o* 1 


















o 












o 








Related for paper feed unit 
















































Multi purpose drawer 


AR-MU1 


X 


X 


- 


X 


X 


X 




X 


X 








X 


X 






X 


X 


X 


X 






Stand/3 x 500 sheet 
paper drawer 


AR-D14 






X 


— 


X 


X 




























o 






Stand/MPD & 2000 sheet 
paper drawer 


AR-D13 






X 


X 


— 






























o 






Duplex module/bypass tray 


AR-DU4 






o* 1 


- 




X 










X 


X 












6 






Duplex module 


AR-DU3 






o* 1 




- 


























6 








Output units 
















































Saddle stitch finisher 


AR-FN7 






X 


o* 1 


X 


O 


— 


X 




X 


X 
















o 






Finisher 


AR-FN6 






o* 1 






X 


- 


X 




X 


X 














o 




A 


Mail-bin stacker 


AR-MS1 






., 








X 


- 




X 























Exit tray *4 


AR-TE3 












1 


X 


X 


X 


- 




X 




















Upper exit tray extension 


AR-TE4 


















X 


X 




- 






















Punch unit 


AR-PN1 






X 


o* 1 


X 


O 


o 


X 




X 




- 














o 








Related for extension of 
functions and others 
















































PS3 expansion kit 


AR-PK1 
































- 














Network scanner 
expansion kit 


AR-NS2 


*1 




o 


X 


*1 

o 


















O 


o 




" 












Facsimile expansion kit 


AR-FX5 


d 1 


o 


X 


o* 1 


















o 








- 










Fax memory (8 MB) 


AR-MM9 


d 1 





X 


o* 1 


















o 








o 


— 


o 






Power supply unit 


AR-DC1 








































— 






Hard disk drive 


AR-HD3 










































- 




Multi-function controller 
board 


AR-M11 


d 1 





X 


*1 

o 


















— 


















Print server card 


AR-NC5J 






























- 















O = Must be installed together. 

O* 1 = Any of the units must be installed together. 

0* 2 = Must be installed for installation of the stand/3 x 500 sheet paper drawer or 

the stand/MPD & 2000 sheet paper drawer. 
X = Cannot be installed together. 
*3 = Standard 
*4 = AR-DU4 Standard 



AR-M350 CONFIGURATION 2-2 



[3] SPECIFICATIONS 
1. Basic Specification 

A. Base Engine (AR-M350/M450) 
(1)Form 



(in mm) 



AR-M350/AR-M450 



Console type 



(2) Engine speed 



Paper size 


AR-M350 


AR-M450 


A4, 8.5" x 11" 


35ppm 


45ppm 


A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R 


35ppm 


45ppm 


B5 


35ppm 


45ppm 


B4/8.5"x 14 


20ppm 


22ppm 


A3/11"x 17" 


17ppm 


20ppm 



(3) Engine composition 



Photoconductor type 


OPC (diameter of photoconductor : 030mm) 


Record method 


Electrophotograph (laser) 


Development method 


Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush 
development 


Charge method 


Charged saw-tooth method 


Transfer method 


Transfer roller 


Cleaning method 


Counter blade 


Fusing method 


Heat roller 


Used toner disposal 


Toner recycling system 



(4) Engine resolution 


Resolution 


Write :600dpi 


Smoothing 


Write :1200dpi equivalent 


Gradation 


Write :2 levels 



(5) Printable area 

The print area of this product is shown below. 

t! 



D- 
A- 



| | Paper size 

|~ ~i Printable area 

If a printer driver for Windows or Macintosh is used for printing, the 
printable area will be smaller. The actual printable area depends on the 
printer driver to be used. 



Paper size 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


A3 


297 


420 


4 


289 


4 


B4 


257 


364 


4 


242 


4 


A4 


210 


297 


4 


202 


4 


B5 


182 


257 


4 


168 


4 


A5 


148 


210 


4 


140 


4 


Japanese postcard 


100 


148 


4 


92 


4 


Ledger 


279 


432 


4 


271 


4 


Legal 


216 


356 


4 


208 


4 


Foolscap 


216 


330 


4 


208 


4 


Letter 


216 


279 


4 


208 


4 


Executive 


184 


267 


4 


183 


4 


Invoice 


140 


216 


4 


132 


4 


Com-IO(envelope) 


105 


241 


4 


97 


4 


C5(envelope) 


162 


229 


4 


154 


4 


Monarch(envelope) 


98 


191 


4 


90 


4 


DL(envelope) 


110 


220 


4 


102 


4 


ISO B5(envelope) 


176 


250 


4 


168 


4 



(6) Warm-up 



Warm-up time 
Pre-heat requirement 



Jam recovery time 



less than 80 seconds 
Required 



Target: about 30 seconds 

(Under standard condition of 60 seconds left 

after side cover opening, polygon motor halt) 



(7) Power source 






Voltage 


1 00V system 


200V system 


100-1 27V 


220-240V 


Frequency 


50/60Hz 


50/60 Hz 


Power cord 







(8) Power consumption 





AR-M350 


AR-M450 


Max. Power consump. 


1350W 


1350W 


Average waiting mode 


1200W 


1200W 



(9) Energy Star benchmark 








AR-M350 


AR-M450 


Low power mode 


40W 


75W 


Transition time to Low power mode 


60min 


60min 



(10) Noise 








AR-M350 


AR-M450 


At working 


less than 6.7B 


less than 6.7B 


At waiting mode 


less than 4.8B 


less than 4.8B 



Showing noise benchmark in each model as a whole system. 
(11) Dimensions 


External dimensions 
(WxDxH) 


428x552x469 (Only main unit) (mm) 
16.9"x21.7"x18.5" 


Occupied space 

dimensions 

(WxD) 


963x685 (mm) *1 
25.7"x22.3" 


Weight 


Approx.39kg (Only main unit) 
Approx.99kg *1 



*1: with B/W scanner module/DSPF, Scanner rack, Large capacity 
paper feed desk, Power supply unit and Upper exit tray extension 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-1 



B. Document Feeding Equipment 



(1) One-drawer tray 


included in the base engine) 




Paper feed method 


One-drawer tray 


Sizes to be fed 


A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" 


Paper capacity 


500 sheets (at 80g/m 2 ) 


Media available for 
paper feeding 


Plain paper 60 - 105g/m 2 , 16 - 28lbs 


Paper type 


Plain, recycled, pre-printed, pre-punched, 
color, letter head 


Paper size switching 


To be switched by user 

(paper size to be entered from the operation 

panel). 


Dehumidification 
heater 


Not provided 


Balance detection 


Provided (paper empty and 3 steps) 


Default size setting 


100V system 


200V 
system 


8.5" x 11" 


A4 


Mounting/demounting 
of the tray 


Provided 



C. Output Equipment 



(1) Face-down Exit Tray (included in the base engine) 


Output position/ 


Face-down output at the upper side of main 


method 


unit 


Output paper capacity 


400 sheets (80g/m 2 sheet) 


Output paper size 


A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R 




11 " x 1 7", 8.5" x 1 4", 8.5" x 1 3", 8.5" x 1 1 ", 




8.5" x 11 "R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 




Executive, postal card, Monarch (98 x 191) 




Com-10 (105x241), DL (110x220), 




C5 (162 x 229), ISO B5 (176 x 250) 


Spec of media for 


Tracing paper : 52 ~ 59g/m 2 / 1 4 ~ 1 5lbs 


paper output 


Plain paper : 60 ~ 128g/m 2 / 16 ~ 34lbs 




Index paper : 1 76g/m 2 / 47lbs 




Cover paper : 205g/m 2 / 54 ~ 55lbs 




Transparency firm 


Remaining paper 


Not provided 


detection 




Exit tray full detection 


Provided 



2. Specific Function 

A. Printer Function 
(1) Platform 



IBM PC/AT (Include compatible machine) 

Macintosh (680x0), Power Macintosh, iMac, G3Macintosh 



* For Macintosh OS, the AR-PK1 is required. 
(2) Support OS 



For Macintosh OS, the AR-PK1 is required. 
(3) PDL emulation 



Custom PS 


Windows 95/98/Me 


Windows NT 4.0 
Windows 2000 


Mac OS 7.6 to Mac OS 9 


Custom 

PCL5e/6(XL) 

SPDL 


Windows 95/98/Me 


Windows NT 4.0 
Windows 2000 


PPD 


Windows 95/98/Me 


Windows NT 4.0 
Windows 2000 


Mac OS 8.5.1 - Mac OS 9 



(4) Print Function 
a. General 







When an optional PS3 expansion kit is 
installed 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 
(Macintosh) 


Copies 


1 -999 


1 -999 


1 -999 


1 -999 


Orientation 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Duplex print 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Saddle stitch 


Yes 


Yes 


No 


N/A 


Binding edge 


Left/top/ 
right 


Left/top/ 
right 


Long/short 


Long/short 


N-up 


2/4/6/8 


2/4/6/8 


2/4*3*4 


2/4/6/9/16 


N-up direction 


Fixed 


Fixed 


Fixed 


Selectable 


N-up border line 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes(always) 


Yes 



b. Paper input 







When an 
installed 


optional PS3 expansion kit is 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 

(Macintosh) 


Paper size 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Custom paper size 


1 size 


1 size 


3 sizes*3*5 


N/A 


Source selection 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Different first page 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Yes 


Transparency inserts 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Yes 



c. Paper output 







When an 
installed 


optional PS3 expansion kit is 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 

(Macintosh) 


Output tray selection 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Mail bin 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Staple 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Offset 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Punch 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 



d. Graphic 







When an optional PS3 expansion kit 
is installed 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 

(Macintosh) 


Resolution 


600/300 
dpi 


600 dpi 


600 dpi 


600 dpi 


Halftone 


N/A 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Graphic mode 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 


N/A 


Smoothing 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Toner save 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Photo enhancement 


Yes*8 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 


Negative image 


N/A 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Mirror image 


N/A 


Horizontal/ 
vertical 


Horizontal 


Yes 


Zoom 


N/A 


N/A 


Yes 


Yes 


Fit to page 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 



PCL6 compatible, PCL5e compatible, 

PostScript Level 2 compatible, PostScript 3 compatible 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-2 



e. Font 







When an optional PS3 expansion kit is 
installed 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 
(Macintosh) 


Resident font 


45 fonts 


1 36 fonts 


136 

fonts*6 


35 fonts 


Download font 


Bitmap 

TrueType, 

Graphic 


Bitmap 

Typel 

TrueType 


Bitmap 

Typel 

TrueType 


N/A 



f. Others 







When an optional PS3 expansion kit is 
installed 


Function 


PCL5e/ 
PCL6 


PS 


PPD 
(Windows) 


PPD 

(Macintosh) 


Watermark*7 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Yes 


Overlay 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 


Job retentions 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Yes 


Account control 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Yes 


Custom settings 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 


Automatic 
configuration*2 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


Yes 


Job end 
notification 


Yes 


Yes 


N/A 


N/A 



* 1 In the models without a hard disk drive, an optional hard disk drive 

must be installed . 

* 2 Functions when peripheral devices are installed. 

* 3 Not supported in the Windows NT 4.0 environment. 

* 4 2/4/6/9/16 is supported in the Windows 2000 environment. 

* 5 Only one size is supported in the Windows 2000 environment. 

* 6 Only 35 fonts are supported in the Windows NT 4.0 environment. 

* 7 This function is limited for PPD. 
*8 PCL6only 

(5) Compatibility 



PCL 5e Target for PCL5e is to be compatible with HP LaserJet 

compatibility 4000. 

Small margin difference, rendering difference by 
different font family, default and transfer function 
difference are not to be included in the compatibility. 
All the PJL commands are not necessarily included in 

the compatibility. 



PCL6 Target for PCL6 is to be compatible with HP LaserJet 

compatibility 4000. 

Small margin difference, rendering difference by 
different font family, default and transfer function 
difference are not to be included in the compatibility. 
All the PJL commands are not necessarily included in 

the compatibility. 

PostScript Roman PostScript is targeted to be compatible with 
Compatibility Adobe PostScript as performed in HP LaserJet 4000. 
Small margin difference, rendering difference by 
different font family, default and transfer function 
difference are not to be included in the compatibility. 



B. Expanded RAM 

Installation of an expanded RAM will avoid the following status. 

1 ) Time out error reduction 

2) Spool time reduction 

3) Avoidance of VM error / memory full 

Use a commercially available RAM of the following specifications. 
If a RAM which does not meet the specifications is installed, it may cause 
a trouble such as that it is not recognized or its capacity is not correctly 
recognized. 



<Spesification> 




DIMM TYPE 


168pin 3.3V Unbuffered SDRAM DIMM Non-ECC 


DIMM capacity 


64MByte, 128MByte, 256MByte 


CAS LATENCY 


CL=2 


SDRAM CLOCK 


For PC100, PC133 


SPD 


Supporting 


Parity 


Not support 


ECC 


Not support 



<Operation-assured Memory> (As of March / 2001) 



Manufacture 


Capacity 


Model name 


RAM CHIP name 


Note 


Kingston 
Technology 


128MB 


KVR133X64C3/ 
128 


HYB39S64800BT 
-7.5 




128MB 


KVR133X64C3 
-128 


D456821G-A75 
-9JF 




256MB 


KVR133X64C3 
-256 


HY57V28820AT-H 




Viking 
Compornents 


64MB 


VIK8641CL2 


UPD456841G5 
-A80-9JF 




64MB 


VIK8641CL2 


D456841G5-A80 
-9JF 




128MB 


VIK6642CL2 


TC59SM708FT-80 




128MB 


VIK6642CL2 


D4564841G5-A80 
-9JF 




256MB 


VIK2642CL2 


TC59SM708FT-80 




Memory Card 
Technology 


64MB 


DM864VS65804X 
-7G 


GM72V66841XT75 




128MB 


DM1665VS65804 
X-7G 


HY57V64820HG 





C. Scanner function 
(1) Scanner function 



Scanner mode 



Scan to E-mail (Internet FAX) 
Scan to Server (Client PC) 



(2) Support System 



Embedded server 



Protocol 



SMTP server 
FTP server 



TCP/IP 



(3) Support Image 



Format 


TIFF, PDF, TIFF-F 


Compression method 


Uncompressed, G3(1 -dimension) *1 , G4 *2 
*1 G3 (1 -dimension) = MH (Modified Huffman) 
*2 G4 = MMR (Modified MR) 



(4) Transmission Mode 



DSPF/OC 
transmission switching 



O 

(Switching during the reading is not feasible) 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-3 



(5) Image Process 



Half tone reproduction 


Equivalent to 256 levels 


Exposure adjustment 


Light / Auto / Dark 


Quality selection 


Half-tone ON/OFF 


Resolution* 


Normal ( 200x200dpi ) 
Fine ( 300x300dpi ) 
Super fine ( 400x400dpi ) 
Ultra fine ( 600x600dpi ) 






Varies with the file type/transmission 


method 



(6) Original Memory 



Standard 



Commonly use ERDH area of memory. 



Memory expansion Special : As per ERDH memory 



(7) Specified Destination 



Specified destination Specifying by one-touch or group 



One-touch* 



Max. 500 destinations 

(in conjunction with the one-touch dial of FAX) 
Max. 100 destinations can be registered 
for FTP and Desktop. 



Group* 



To be registered in one-touch 



Program 



O 



(8) Specified Multiple Destinations 



Specified destination 


Specifying by one-touch or group 


No. of registration 


Max. 300 items 

(in conjunction with those of FAX) 


Sequential 
broadcasting 


0( 

E-mail only. It is not available for FTP/Desktop.) 


Simultaneous FAX 
transmission 


O (Specifying multiple destinations of FAX, E-mail or 
FTP and broadcasting by a single scan) 



O : Available 
(9) Functions 



Transmitting 
functions 


Rotating transmission 


O (to be matched with FAX 
specification) 


Long length original 
transmission 


X 


Verification stamp function 


Option 


Report/list 
functions 


Transmit/receive record 


O 


Transmit/receive result 





Address/phone directory 
list 





Group list 





ID/sender list 





Program list 






D. Copy function 
(1) Copy Speed 





AR-M350 


AR-M450 


Actual 


Reduction 


Enlargement 


Actual 


Reduction 


Enlargement 


A4, 
8.5"x11" 


35 


35 


35 


45 


45 


45 


A4R, 
8.5"x11"R 


25 


25 


25 


30 


30 


30 


A5R, 

5.5"x8.5"R, 

Invoice-R 


35 


35 


35 


45 


45 


45 


B5 


35 


35 


35 


45 


45 


45 


B5R, 
Exective-R 


25 


25 


25 


30 


30 


30 


B4, 
8.5"x14" 


20 


20 


20 


22 


22 


22 


A3, 
1 1 "x1 7" 


17 


17 


17 


20 


20 


20 


Extra, 
Envelope 


17 


17 


17 


20 


20 


20 


Japan P/C 


In case of printing on post card, engine speed can vary with system 
configuration, because next paper is fed after machine completely output 
previous page. 



Figures in reduction/enlargement are represented by those at the 

ratio to show slowest speed 
(2) First Copy Time 

Conditions: A4 or 8.5"x11"P from front tray of PPC, without HDD and 
with polygon motor running. 



AR-M350 



AR-M450 



Document glass *1 
DSPF 



Less than 5.3 seconds Less than 4.6 seconds 
Less than 6.0 seconds Less than 5.3 seconds 



*1 During OC/high-speed mode 
(3) Job Speed 





AR-M350 


AR-M450 


S — S "1 


33 cpm (94%) 


42 cpm (93%) 


S^D *2 


32cpm(91%) 


40 cpm (88%) 


D — D *3 


32 cpm (91%) 


40 cpm (88%) 



*1 S^S : A4/8.5"x11"P 
*2 S^D : A4/8.5"x 11"P 
*3 D^D : A4/8.5"x 11"P 



original 5 sheets copy 5sets 

original 10 sheets copy 5sets 

original 5 sheets (10 pages) copy 5sets 



Note: First copy time has been factored into calculation resulting in 
reduced CPM. 

(4) Continuous Copy 



Max. multiple number 



999 pages 



(5) Copy Ratio 



Copy ratio AB series : 

25%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 400% 

Inch series : 

25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 400% 



Zoom 25 - 400% 

25 - 200% (Copy from DSPF) 



Independent Not provided 
scaling 



(6) Exposure/Copy Quality Process 



Exposure mode 


Binary: Text(auto/manual), Text/photo, Photo 
256 levels: Not provided 


Manual steps 


9 steps 


Smoothing 


Standard 


Toner save mode 


Standard 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-4 



(7) Copy Function 




Function 


APS 





AMS 





Paper type select 




By type setting 


Auto tray switching 





Rotation copy 





Electronic sort 





Rotation sort 


X 


Reserved copy 





Prior tray setting 


X 


Recall/register of program 


o 


Proof copy 


X 


Preheat function 




To be set up by key 

operator 


Auto power shut-off function 




To be set up by the key 

operator program 


Account control 




100 accounts 


Communication support (RIC) 





Card counter support 


Only 

provided the connector 


Coin vendor support 


Only 

provided the connector 


Special 
function 


Margin shift 


O 


Edge erase / Center erase 





Dual page copying 





Covers 


X 


Transparency insert 


X 


Centering 


X 


Multi shot (N in 1) 


0(2 in 1 /4 in 1) 


Pamphlet copy 





2-sided copy orientation change 





Large capacity original mode 


(Max. 140 pages) 


B/W reverse 


X 


Shading 


X 


Mirror image 


X 


Repeat 


X 


Date stamp 


X 


Stamp 


X 


Page stamp 


X 


Zaurus print 


X 



3. B/W Scanner Module (DSPF) 

(1)Form 



O : Standard Function 
X : Not provided 



Scanner (Document glass) / DSPF standard 

Operation panel integral type 

(common hardware for all the destinations) 



(2) Destination judgment 



When connected with a base engine, the type (Japan domestic 100V, 
overseas 100V or overseas 200V systems) is detected and the settings 
will accordingly be changed. 



(3) Resolution / Gradation 



Reading 

resolution 

(dpi) 


Copy mode 


Magnification 


25-99 


100 


101-200 


201-400 


OC 


600x600 


600x600 


600x600 


600x600 


OC 

(High speed): 


600x600 


600x300 


600x600 


600x600 


DSPF/ 
SPF(standard) 


600x300 


600x300 


600x600 


- 


DSPF/SPF 
(high quality) 


600x600 


600x600 


600x600 


- 


Input and 
transmitting 
resolution 
(dpi) 


FAX transmit mode 


Selection mode 


Standard 


Fine 


Super fine 


Ultra fine 


Input 
resolution: OC 


600x391.2 


600x391.2 


600x391.2 


600x3912 


Input 

resolution: 

DSPF 


600x300 


600x300 


600x300 


600x300 


Transmitting 
resolution 


2032x97.8 


2032x1956 


203.2x391 


406.4x391 


Scanner mode 


Selection mode 


Standard 


Fine 


Super fine 


Ultra fine 


Input 
resolution: OC 


600x391.2 


600x391.2 


600x391.2 


600x600 


Input 

resolution: 

DSPF 


600x300 


600x300 


600x300 


600x300 


Transmitting 
resolution 


200x200 


300x300 


400x400 


600x600 


Reading 
level 


256 tones 


Exposure 
lamp 


Electrodeless xenon lamp 


Output level 


Binary 



(4) Document Glass 



Reading 
area 


297x431 .8(mm) 
11.7"x17" 


Original 
alignment 


Left edge / Rear corner alignment 


Original size 
detection 


Provided 
(Standard size only) 


Sizes to be 
detected 


Automatic (one detection unit to be used with software 
modification by destination) 


lnch-1 

(Default at overseas 

100V base engine) 


11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 
8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" 


lnch-2 


11"x17", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11", 
8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" 


AB-1 (Default at Japan 
domestic 100V/ 
overseas 200V base 
engines) 


A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 
A5A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5 


AB-2 


A3, A4R, A5, 216x330 mm 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-5 



(6) Power Source 



OR guide 
display 


Rear left side 
(Print display) 


Original reference position "=>" 


Left side OR guide 
(Print display) 


(From the Interior side) 

[5-1/2]«[A5E]'[B5E]-[A4E/A5]> 

[8.5"]-[B4/B5]-[11"]-[A3/A4] 


Interior side OR guide 
(Print display) 


(From the left side) 
[5-1/2]-[A5]-[B5]-[A4/A5E]- 
[8-1/2]'[B5E]'[11"]'[A4E]>[13"]' 
[14"].[B4]-[A3].[17"] 


Interior side OR guide 


Book marks are at A4 and 






8-1/2 positions. 


The position available to attach the staple position guide 
label when the optional finisher (desktop console type) is 
equipped. 



(5) DSPF/SPF 



Type 


DSPF 


One-scan-dual-side scanning 
method DSPF with OC integrated 


Scan speed 


Standard mode 


45opm 


High quality mode 


22.5 opm 


Original 


Center alignment 


alignment 




Original size 


A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R11"x17", 8.5"x14", 




8.5"x13", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R,5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R 




(in Fax mode : long-length paper up to 800mm is 




applicable) 


Original 


50~128g/m 2 , 15~34lbs 


paper 




weight 




Original 


Max. 50 sheets 


stack 


(max. 30 sheets for A3, B4,1 1"x17",8.5"x14") 


capacity 


(When, however, exceeding 105g/m 2 




and A3, B4,1 1"x17",8.5"x14", max. 15 sheets) 




or, Total thickness less than 




6.5mm (at 50~80g/m 2 , 15-21 lbs) 




5.0mm (at 80~128g/m 2 , 21~34lbs) 


Not 


Transparency film, secondary original paper, 


transportable 


tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, 


original type 


original with crumple/crimp/rip, 




original with attachment/clipping, 




original with many punch holes 




(with 2 or 3 holes acceptable), 




original preprinted with ink-ribbon. 


Original size 


Provided 


detection 




Sizes to be 


Automatic (one detection unit to be used with software 


detected 


modification by destination) 


lnch-1 


11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 




(Default at overseas 


8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" 




100V base engine) 




lnch-2 


11"x17", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11", 






8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" 


AB-1 (Default at 


A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A3, 




Japan domestic 


B4, A4, A4R, A5, 




1 00V / overseas 


8.5"x11", 216x330 mm 




200V base engines) 




AB-2 


A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 






B5, B5R, 21 6x330 mm, 8.5"x1 1 " 


Original tray 


Center of the tray 


Original reference position "<-" 


guide 


(inscribeddisplay) 


Original face-down placement 


display 




indication "fl" 


Original Guide 


(From Center) 




(inscribed display) 


[B5E]-[A4E/A5]-[8.5"]-[B4/B5]- 
[1 1 "]-[A3/A4] 


The position available to attach the staple position guide 




label when the optional finisher (desktop console type) is 




equipped. 



| Supplied from the main unit 



(7) Dimensions 



External dimensions 
(WxDxH) 



808 x 619x180 mm 



Occupied space 
dimensions (WxD) 
Weight 



945 x 61 9 mm 

(When the tray is extended) 

Approx. 19.5 kg 



(8) Display device al 


scanner part 


Type 


Dot map LCD, touch panel 


Display dot number 


640 x 240 dots (dot pitch 0.24x0.24 mm) 


LCD operating 
dimension 


153.5 x 57.5 mm 


LCD back-light 


Fluorescent tube method 


LCD brightness 
adjustment 


Provided 



(9) Key 



Mode selection area Job status key 

Printer mode key 

(online display LED/data in-memory display LED) 

Scan/Fax mode key 

(busy display LED/data in-memory display LED) 

Copy mode key 

User definition key 



Basic input area 



Start key 
CAkey 
1 0-key 
Clear key 

* key 

# key 



(10) Touch sense method 



Resistive film method 



(11) Used character in the LCD 


Dot 


8x 16 , 16 x 16 dots 


Bold display 






4. Rack for Scanner 

(1) Dimensions 



Strength 



60 kg 



External dimensions 30 x 415 x 860 mm (Single goods) 

(WxDxH) 

Occupied space 575 x 415 mm (State of installation) (2pieces) 

dimensions (WxD) 



Weight 



Approx. 5 kg (2pieces) 



| * For the items which are not specified in this Service Manual, refer to the AR-P350/P450 Service Manual. 



AR-M350 SPECIFICATIONS 3-6 



[4] CONSUMABLE PARTS 
1 .Supply system table 

A.USA 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450NT 

(*1 AR-450NT-J) 


*Life setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450ND 




3 


Drum 


Drum x1 


50K 


AR-450DR 




4 


50K maintenance kit 


Cleaner blade x1 
Drum separation pawl x4 
Screen grid x1 
Toner reception seal x1 
Side malt F x1 
Side malt R x1 
Charging plate x1 


50K 


AR-450KC1 




5 


100K maintenance kit 


Transfer roller x1 
Discharging plate x1 
Paper dust removing unit x1 
DV blade x1 
DV side seal F x1 
DV side seal R x1 


100K 


AR-450KA1 




6 


Upper heat roller kit 


Upper heat roller x1 
Fusing separation pawl (Upper) x4 


200K 


AR-450UH 




/ 


Lower heat roller kit 


Lower heat roller x1 
Fusing separation pawl (Lower) x2 


200K 


AR-450LH 




8 


Cleaner blade 


Cleaner blade x10 


50K(x10) 


AR-450CB 


AR-450CB=(AR-450BL)x1 


9 


Cleaning roller 


Cleaning roller x10 
Bearing x20 


200K(x10) 


AR-450CR 


AR-450CR=(AR-450RC)x1 


10 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


11 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



*1 : For USA Government 

Notel : Print on Master/individual carton :Toner/Developer in 2 languages (Engl 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered 

B.CANADA/Latin America 



ish/French), DR in 4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish), 
as service parts. 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450NT 


*Life setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450ND 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-450DR 




4 


50K PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-450KC 




b 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-450KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-450KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton :Toner/Developer in 2 languages (English/French), DR in 4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 



AR-M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-1 



C.Europe/Australia/New Zealand 










NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450T 


"Lite setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450DV 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-450DM 




4 


50K PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-450KC 




5 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-450KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-450KB 




7 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 

D.Middle East/ Africa 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450FT 


"Lite setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450SD 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-450DR 




4 


50K PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-450KC 




b 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-450KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-450KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 



AR-M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-2 



E.Israel/Russia/CIS/Philippines 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450FT 


"Lite setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450SD 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-450DR 




4 


50K PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-450KC 




b 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-450KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-450KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 

F.Asia 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-4b0ST 


*Life setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 4b0g) 


100K 


AR-450SD 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-4b0DR 




4 


bOK PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-4b0KC 




b 


100KPM kit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-4b0KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-4b0KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


b000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR bOK/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 



AR-M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-3 



G.Hong kong 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-450ST-C 


"Lite setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 450g) 


100K 


AR-450SD-C 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-450DR-C 




4 


50K PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-450KC 




b 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-450KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-450KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


5000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:2 languages (English/Chinease). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR 50K/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 

H.Taiwan 



NO 


Name 


Content 


Life 


Product name 


Remark 


1 


Toner CA(Black) 


Toner(Toner : Net Weight 81 4g) 


27K 


AR-4b0FT-T 


"Lite setup is based on A4 6% 


2 


Developer 


Developer(Developer : Net Weight 4b0g) 


100K 


AR-450SD-C 




3 


Drum 


Drum 


x1 


50K 


AR-4b0DR-C 




4 


bOK PM kit 


Cleaner blade 

Drum separation pawl 

Screen grid 

Toner reception seal 

Side malt F 

Side malt R 

Charging plate 


x1 
x4 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


50K 


AR-4b0KC 




b 


100KPMkit 


Transfer roller 

Discharging plate 

Paper dust removing unit 

DV blade 

DV side seal F 

DV side seal R 


x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 
x1 


100K 


AR-4b0KA 




6 


200K PM kit 


Upper heat roller 

Lower heat roller 

Fusing separation pawl (Upper ) 

Fusing separation pawl (Lower) 

Cleaning roller 

Bearing 


x1 
x1 
x4 
x2 
x1 
x2 


200K 


AR-4b0KB 




/ 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


3000x3 


AR-SC1 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN4 & 
AR-FN6 


8 


Staple cartridge 


Staple cartridge 


x3 


b000x3 


AR-SC2 


Common with cartridge for AR-FN7 



Notel : Print on Master/individual carton:4 languages (English/French/German/Spanish). 

Note2: Packed with machine: DR bOK/Developer UN/Process UN 

Note3: The other maintenance parts which are not listed above are registered as service parts. 



AR-M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-4 



2. Production number identification 
A. Drum cartridge 

The lot number, printed on the front side flange, is composed of 10 digits, 
each digit showing the following content: 



C. Developer cartridge 

The lot number is composed of 10 digits each digit indicates the 
following. The lot number is printed on the bag. 



10 



1 



10 



1 Number 

For this model, this digit is 2. 

2 Letter 

Indicates the model conformity code. T for this model. 

3 Number 

Indicates the end digit of the production year. 

4 Number or X, Y, Z 

Indicates the production month. 

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 
5/6 Number 

Indicates the production day on the month. 
7 Number or X, Y Z 

Indicates the month of packing. 

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 
8/9 Number 

Indicates the day of the month of packing. 
10 Letter 

Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant. 



1 Number 

For this model, this digit is 2. 

2 Letter 

Indicates the model conformity code. T for this model. 

3 Number 

Indicates the end digit of the production year. 

4 Number or X, Y, Z 

Indicates the production month. 

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 
5/6 Number 

Indicates the production day on the month. 
7 Number or X, Y, Z 

Indicates the month of packing. 

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 
8/9 Number 

Indicates the day of the month of packing. 
10 Letter 

Indicates the production factory. "A" for Nara Plant. 



B. Toner cartridge 

The lot number is composed of 7 digits each digit indicates the 
following. The lot number shall be printed in the position shown below. 



4 
5,6 



Version number (A - sequentially revised) 

Numeral figure 

Indicates the end digit of the production year. 

Letter 

Indicates the production factory. (B for SOCC) 

Destination code 

Numeral figures 

Indicates the production day. 

Numeral figure or X, Y, Z 

Indicates the production month. 

X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 



Lot No. Location 




Lot No. Location 



Heat seal 




Aluminum bag 



3. Environmental conditions 

A. Operating conditions 



30°C, 85% 



85 



E 

Z5 

X 

20 



35 C, 60% 



10 Temperature CO 35 

(Without dew condensation) 



B. Storage conditions 

90 



t5 



Z5 
X 



20 



-10 



Temperature CO 40 

(Without dew condensation) 



AR-M350 CONSUMABLE PARTS 4-5 



[5] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 
1 . Appearance 

12 3 4 5 6 





1 


DSPF exit area 


Scanned originals are deposited here. 


2 


Document feeding area cover 


Open to remove misfeed originals in this area. 


3 


Original guides 


Adjust to the size of the originals. 


4 


Document feeder tray 


Set the originals here for automatic feeding. 


5 


Operation panel 


Use for operation of copier, network scanner, and facsimile features and for printer configuration operations. 


6 


Document cover 




7 


Document scanning windows 


Sheet type originals are scanned here. 


8 


Document glass 


All originals which cannot be copied from the document feeder tray must be copied here. 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-1 



2. Operation panel 



When the printer is equipped with a scanner module, the operation panel on the main unit will become inoperative and the panel on the scanner module 

must be used. 

The operation panel on the printer engine side does not function. 




1 


Touch panel 


The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel. The display will change to show 
the status of print, copy, network scan or fax according to which of those modes is selected. 


2 


Mode select keys and indicators 


Use to switch the display mode of the touch panel. 


3 


[PRINT] key/ 


Press to enter the print mode. 




READY indicator/ 


•READY indicator 




DATA indicator 


Print data can be received when this indicator is lit. 
•DATA indicator 

Lights up or blinks when print data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is being 
performed. 


4 


[IMAGE SEND] key/ 


Press to enter the network scan/fax mode. 




LINE indicator/ 


•LINE indicator 




DATA indicator 


During sending or receiving FAX data or scan data, this lamp is lighted. 
•DATA indicator 

Lights up or blinks when FAX data is being received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is being 
performed. 


5 


[COPY] key 


Press to select the copy mode and display the basic screen of the copy mode. 

Even when the machine is busy in another mode, the basic copy mode screen will appear when the [COPY] 

key is pressed. 

If this key is pressed and held while the basic screen of the copy mode is displayed, the total output count 

and the quantity of toner remaining (percentage) will be displayed. 


6 


[JOB STATUS] key 


Press to display the current job status. 


7 


[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key 


Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel or to set key operator programs. 


8 


Numeric keys 


Use to enter number values for various settings. 


9 


[*] key ([ACC.#-C] key) 


If the auditing mode has been set, press this key to close an open account after finishing a copy, facsimile 
scanning or network scanning job. 


10 


[#/P] key* 


Press to select the job memory mode. 


11 


[C] key* 


Press to clear a copy quantity entry. 

If this key is pressed while the automatic document feeder is being used, any originals in progress will be 

automatically output. 


12 


Start key* 


When the indicator is lit, copying, facsimile scanning and network scanning jobs can be started. 
Press to start copying. 


13 


[CA] key* 


Press to clear all selected settings and return the machine to the initial settings for the currently selected 
mode. Before starting a copy operation, press the [CA] key first. 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-2 



3. Touch Panel 

A. Basic screen of copy mode 

When the copy mode key is pressed, this display screen will appear showing the basic copy mode selections. 

1 2 



READY TO SCAN FOR COPY. 



SPECIAL MODES' 



0RIGINAL[A4 



2-SIDED COPY 







OUTPUT 



8A4 




!_| 




AUTO A4 



PAPER SELECT 






100% 




COPY RATIO 



•9 

■10 
■11 



8 



Message display 



Basic status messages are displayed here. 



[INTERRUPT] key display area 



When interrupt copy is available, the [INTERRUPT] key will be displayed here. 

When an interrupt copy job is being run, a [CANCEL] key will be displayed here to be used for canceling the 

interrupt copy job. 



Copy quantity display 



[2-SIDED COPY] key 



Displays the selected number of copies before the [START] key is pressed or the number of completed 

copies after the [START] key is pressed. 

A single copy can be made when "0" displayed. 

Touch to display the duplex copy mode setting screen. A highlighted selection on the screen will indicate the 

currently selected mode. The setting screen can be closed by touching the [OK] key on the setting screen 

whether or not a selection change was made. 



[OUTPUT] key 



Touch to display the output mode setting screen. A highlighted selection on the screen will indicate the 
currently selected mode. The setting screen can be closed by touching the [OK] key on the setting screen 
whether or not a selection change was made. 



[SPECIAL MODES] key 



Touch to display the special modes selection screen. 



Paper size display 



The display shows the location of the paper trays, the size of the paper in the trays and the approximate 
amount of paper loaded in each tray. The approximate amount of paper in a tray is indicated by |=J . 



Original size display 

Exposure display and 
[EXPOSURE] key 



The original paper size will be displayed when originals are placed on the document glass or in the 

document feeder. 

A touch of the [EXPOSURE] key will open the exposure selection window. 

A highlighted key on the exposure window indicates which exposure mode (AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO or 

PHOTO) is currently selected. When an exposure mode other than AUTO is selected, an exposure level 

scale will also appear in the window. 



10 



Paper select display and 
[PAPER SELECT] key 



Displays the selected paper size. When the auto paper select mode has been selected, "AUTO" will be 
displayed.A touch of the [PAPER SELECT] key will open the paper selection window. When a selection is 
made, the selection window will close. To close the window without making a selection touch the key again 



11 



Copy ratio display and 
[COPY RATIO] key 



Displays the selected copy ratio. Touch to display the reduction and enlargement copy ratio selection 
screen. 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-3 



B. Print mode screen 

This screen is displayed when the print mode is selected. 

(The display varies with the mode. For the display in other modes) 



SELECT JOB 



PRINT HOLD JOB LIST 




Sharp 005 Microsoft Word - 


- TestOOl 




Sharp 006 EXCELl 





1/1 



CONDITION 
SETTINGS 



3 4 



1 


Message display 


A message is displayed in this column. 


2 


Job status screen 


Refer to the text. 


3 


Print hold job list 


If the job retention function is used, the list of stored print jobs is displayed here (up to 1 00 jobs). 

The job retention function can be used only if the printer is equipped with a hard disk drive unit. If the main 

switch is turned off, stored print data will be cleared. 


4 


Display scroll keys 


Use these keys to view the job hold list when it is contained on more than one screen. 


5 


[CONDITION SETTINGS] key 


Use to switch the display to the printer configuration menu. 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-4 



C. Job status screen (common to print, copy, network scan, and fax modes) 

This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. 

A job list showing the current job at the top of the job queue or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed. 

The contents of the jobs can be viewed, moved up to the highest priority in the job queue or deleted from the queue. 

1 



' ^^^^^j* 



JOB QUEUE 



SETS / PROGRESS STATUS 



1 qjCOPY 



COPYING 



JSHARPOOl 



003 / 



GJjJ PAPER EMPTY* 



1054234 



010 / 



WAITING 



M, PRINT JOB 




I-1.-.IL FTE ||tP F.-.- 



JOB 



1/1 



EEffEESa 



COMPLETE 



DETAIL 



PRIORITY 



:STOP/DELETE, 



8 9 



1 


Job list 


A job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs or a job list which indicates completed jobs is displayed. 
The icons to the left of the jobs in queue represent the job mode. 

gj Print mode Qj Copy mode 

^ Network scan mode 

V> Fax mode (transmission job) £ Fax mode (reception job) 

When a job list which indicates the current job and reserved jobs is displayed, the displayed jobs themselves are 
operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key to select the job 
and execute the desired operation using the keys described in 7,8, and 9 


2 


Mode switching key 


Use to switch the job list between "JOB QUEUE" and "COMPLETE". 
"JOB QUEUE": Displays the list of the current job and the reserved jobs. 
"COMPLETE": Displays the list of completed jobs. 


3 


[PRINT JOB] key 


Use to display the print job list for all modes (print, copy, network scan, and fax). 


4 


[E-MAIL/FTP] key 


Use to display the list of jobs that use the network for sending e-mail by SNMP protocol or sending to an ftp site or 
desktop by ftp protocol. 


5 


[FAX JOB] key 


Use to display the fax communication status and the reserved transmission job status. 


6 


Display switching keys 


Use to switch the page of the displayed job list. 


7 


[STOP/DELETE] key 


Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete the selected reserved job. Received fax print jobs that have been 
reserved, however, cannot be deleted. 


8 


[PRIORITY] key 


If you select a job among the reserved jobs in the "JOB QUEUE" job list to which you wish to give the highest priority 
and touch this key, the job will move to the highest priority reserved job. 


9 


[DETAIL] key 


Use to display the detailed information of the selected job. The paper size for printing can be changed from the 
specified size.This function, however, cannot be used when a fax reception print job is selected. 



* "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display 

When a job status display indicates "PAPER EMPTY", the specified size paper is not loaded in any tray to run that job. 

In this case, printing is suspended for that job until the required paper is loaded. Until the required paper is loaded another reserved job data will be 

printed if possible. 

(If paper runs out during printing, another job will not be printed.) If you wish to change the paper size because you do not have the specified size 

paper, you can change the size by touching the current job key to select it and touch the [DETAIL] key described in 9 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-5 



4. Cross sectional view 



3SPSD 




No. 


Name 


No. 


Name 


1 


CIS unit (AR-EF1 only) 


9 


Original feed roller 


2 


Original resist roller 


10 


Copy lamp base unit 


3 


Original resist front sensor (SPSD) 


11 


No. 1 mirror 


4 


Original set sensor 


12 


Copy lamp (Xenon) 


5 


Original take-up roller 


13 


Mirror base unit 


6 


Original length sensor 1 (SLD1) 


14 


No. 3 mirror 


7 


Original length sensor 2 (SLD2) 


15 


No. 2 mirror 


8 


CCD/lens unit 


16 


Original exit roller 



5. Switch, Sensor 






Code 


Name 


Active condition 


1 


SPSD 


SPF original resist front sensor 




2 


SCOV 


SPF paper feed cover sensor 




3 


SDD 


SPF original set sensor 




4 


SOCD 


OC open/close sensor 




5 




Original size sensor PWB (Light emitting side) 




6 


SLD1 


SPF original length sensor 1 




7 


SLD2 


SPF original length sensor 




8 




SPF original width detection volume PWB 


— 


9 




Original size sensor PWB (Light receiving side) 




10 


SSET 


SPF open/close sensor 




11 


SPOD 


SPF original exit sensor 




12 


MHPS 


Mirror home position sensor 





AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-6 



6. PWB 




No. 


Name 


Function/Operation 


1 


SPF control PWB 


SPF control 


2 


Original size detection PWB (Light emitting side) 


Original size detection when using the table glass 


3 


CCD PWB (in lens unit) (The lens unit cannot be disassembled.) 


Image scan (Table glass/SPF surface) 


4 


SPF original width detection volume PWB 


SPF original width detection 


5 


MFP operation PWB 


Panel operation control 


6 


LCD inverter PWB 


Inverter for LCD backlight 


7 


LVDS PWB 


LCD signal relay 


8 


Original size sensor (Light receiving side) 


Original size detection when using the table glass 


9 


CIS unit (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be disassembled.) 


Image scan (SPF back surface) 


10 


CIS interface PWB (in CIS unit) (The CIS unit cannot be disassembled.) 


CIS signal AD conversion process 


11 


Scanner interface PWB 


Scanner unit and connection of scanner control PWB 


12 


CIS control PWB 


CIS unit control and image process 


13 


CL inverter PWB 


Inverter for copy lamp 


14 


Scanner control PWB 


Scanner unit control 



7. Motor, Clutch, Solenoid 




No. 


Name 


Function/Operation 


1 


SPFM 


SPF motor 


Original transport in SPF scan 


2 


SPSC 


SPF original resist clutch 


SPF original scan timing adjustment 


3 


SPFC 


SPF original feed clutch 


SPF original feed roller drive 


4 


SDSS 


SPF original stopper solenoid 


SPF original stopper gate drive 


5 


MIRM 


Mirror motor 


Mirror base copy lamp base drive 


6 


SPFS 


SPF original feed solenoid 


SPF original feed unit drive 


7 


STMPS 


Stamp solenoid 


Finish stamp drive (Option AR-SU1 required) 



AR-M350 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 5-7 



[6] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 
1. Installing procedure flowchart 

There are many combinations between this machine and option units. For installing option units, observe the following procedures for efficiency. 

To install the devices effciently, follow the procedure below. 

Some peripheral devices may have been installed as standard devices depending on the main unit model. 

Part of descriptions and illustrations may be different. 



Scanner/document feeder device 



Finishing device 



Finishing device 



Duplex/bypass device 




Duplex device 



Paper feeding device 



Paper feeding device 



I Start of installation I 



Main unit, paper feeding 3& 1 
device, and power supply 
unit. 



AR-MU1/AR-DC1 
AR-D1 3 /AR-DC1 
AR-D14/AR-DC1 
Main unit 



Duplex/bypass 
device installed? 



No U- 



Finishing device 
installed? 



Install duplex/pypass device. 



AR-DU3 
AR-DU4 



Install finishing device. 

AR-MS1/AR-DC1 
AR-FN6 /AR-DC1 
AR-FN7 
AR-PN1A/B/C/D 



Scanner/document ^\ 


Yes 


Install scanner/document feeder. 
" AR-M350/M450 only 
AR-EF1 /AR-RK1 


feeder installed? *S 




No X 








[Electrical setting/adjustment] 

1 } Installation of driver software, setting, 
and operation check 

Mainunit/AR-EF1/AR-M11/AR-NC5J/AR-HD3/ 
AR-FX5/AR-PK1/AR-NS2 

2} Paper guide position adjustment/off center adjustment 
AR-MU1/AR-D13/AR-D14/ 
AR-DU3/AR-DU4 -X3 



C End ) 



Install controller board, - ^2 

facsimile unit or other electric 
devices. 

AR-M11 

AR-NC5J 

AR-HD3 

AR-FX5/AR-MM9 

AR-PK1 

AR-NS2 

AR-NC5J 

Extended memory 



SK1: When installing a paper feeding device, an optional power supply unit or a duplex/bypass device, be 
sure to reattach the rear cabinet, the AC inlet cover, and the harness cover of the main unit at the end 
of installation as needed. 

Wl: When installing a controller board, a facsimile unit, and other electric devices, be sure to install them 
at a time. 

■&3: Only off center adjustment is needed for AR-DU3. 

J&4: For the FAX/scanner options, AR-M350/M450 only. 



For installation of an option unit, refer to the Service Manual of the option unit. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-1 



2. Note for installation place 



4. Machine installing procedure 



Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following 
during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved. 

The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for 

easy connection. 

Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets 

the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain 

the outlet is properly grounded. 

For the power supply requirements, see the name plate of the main 

unit. 

Do not install your machine in areas that are: 

damp, humid, or very dusty 

exposed to direct sunlight 

poorly ventilated 

subject to extreme temperature or humidity 

changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. 

Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing 

and proper ventilation. 



1) 
2) 

3) 



4) 



X 11-13/16" (30cm) 







n^ 








31-1/2" 


^= 








(80cm) 






A k. 






' ' 






==§ 


= 


















II |t=i.l 





23-5/8" 
(60cm) 



1 23-5/8" (60cm) 

3. Unpacking procedure 




Check the following items are included in the package. 



Developer 




Toner cartridge for installation 




CD-ROM for AR-350/450 series printers 




Operating Manual 




Counter kit contract 





Note: In advance to installation of the machine, the paper feed option 
units (AR-D13 or AR-D14) should have been installed. 

A. Removal of the machine 

1) Remove the cushioning materials from the right and left of the front 
side. 




2) 



3) 



Remove the locking tape from the right and left sidesof the tray. 
Then, Remove the top of the carton and lower the plastic bag 
covering the machine while the machine is still on the carton base. 

Remove the packing tape from the paper tray, pull out the paper tray 
until it stops and remove it by tilting it upward. 




4) 



One person must lift by the empty front tray pocket with the right 
hand and steady the machine with the left hand placed at the upper 
left of the machine. 

The other person must lift with the right hand by using the lifting 
recess in the rear of the machine and also steady the machine with 
the left hand as shown in the illustration. 





• VOM 

□ 

PR 


n • 



Note:The center of gravity of the machine lies in the left side when 
viewed from the Back of machine. When lifting the machine, be 
careful not to drop it. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-2 



B. Installation of paper feed options to the machine 

Note: Before use of this machine, one of the paper feed option units 

(AR-D13/AR-D14) should be installed to the machine for safety 

reasons. 

Refer to the drawing of the AR-MU1 in this manual. 

Put the machine on the previously installed option unit. 
Be sure to check that the boss of the option unit is securely engaged 
with the machine and that the external lines (front and left sides) of 
the option unit and those of the machine are aligned completely. 



<3> Reattach the paper tray of the main unit. 



1) 




Caution: For installation of the main unit, it must be held by two persons 
and installed without haste. 

2) Connect the main unit to the stand/paper drawer. 
<1>Attach the rear mounting plates using a supplied screw for each. 

Rear mounting plate 




Screw 
Rear mounting plate 



Screw 



' 




Mounting plate 

B-4 / 


{-J 


T 




7^ 

Desk frame 


^ J: 



Caution: Insert the rear mounting plates under the desk frame. 
<2>Pull out the upper paper tray of the stand/paper drawer until it stops 

and attach the front mounting plates using a supplied screw for each. 

Then, remove the lock of the paper tray and close the tray. 

Remove the locks of the middle tray and the lower tray similarly. 



Front mounting 
plate 





3) Remove the rear cabinet of the stand/paper drawer and remove the 

AC inlet cover. 
<1> Remove the four screws that fix the rear cabinet and then remove the 

rear cabinet. 




<2> Remove the screw that fixes the AC inlet cover and then remove the 

AC inlet cover. 
<3>Process the AC inlet cover as shown in the illustration. 




AC inlet cover 

4) Attach the power supply unit (AR-DC1). 

Attach the power supply unit to the hanging portions and secure it 
using the three supplied screws. 

Hanging portion 




Screws 



Screws 
Power supply unit 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-3 



5) Connect the power supply unit harness to the PCU PWB of the main 

unit of the printer. 
<1 >Remove the screw that fixes the harness cover of the main unit of the 

printer and slide the harness cover up to remove it. 

Process the harness cover as shown in the illustration. 

Screw 




Harness cover 

<2>Connect the optional power supply harness connector to CN1 1 (red 
connector) of the PCU PWB of the main unit of the printer. 




<3>Reattach the harness cover to its original position and fix it with the 

removed screw. 

At this time, ensure that the optional power supply unit harness is 

arranged as shown in the illustration. 
•Fix the harness securely to the wire saddle. 

Screw 



Optional power 
supply harness 




Harness cover 



Wire saddle 



7) Attach the rear cabinet of the stand/paper drawer. 
<1 >Pass the cord of the power supply unit through the hole of the rear 
cabinet and attach the rear cabinet to the stand/paper drawer. 




<2>Attach the AC inlet cover to the rear cabinet of the stand/paper 
drawer and fix it with the removed screw. 




AC inlet cover 
Screw 



8) Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the main unit of the 
printer. 

Connect the AC cord of the power supply unit to the outlet connector 
of the main unit of the printer at the location shown in the illustration. 

<=5 



AC cord 




6) Connect the relay harness of the stand/paper drawer to the power 
supply unit. 

Connect the relay harness of the stand/paper drawer to the 
connector of the power supply unit. 

Connector of the power supply connector 



Relay harness of the 
stand/paper drawer 




AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-4 



C. Setting related to process 

1 ) Open the left door and the front door. 




2) Remove the developer cartridge from the machine. 




3) Remove the top cover of the developer cartridge. 




4) While rotating the MG roller, supply developer into the developer 

cartridge evenly.B 
Note: Before opening the developer seal, shake it 4 or 5 times. 




D. Toner cartridge settings 

1) Remove a new toner cartridge from the package and shake it 
horizontally five or six times. 




2) Insert a new toner cartridge. 

Push the cartridge in until it locks securely into place. 




3) Gently remove the sealing tape from the cartridge. 



( 


-^^§p- 




\ 


1 




3^C_ 






1^ xy\\ 




^ ) 



4) Return the cartridge lock lever. 



/ /M 


^fejlllllll^ 




^^^^ 






^^S3 


/ If] 


v 


^Cr a\ 



5) Attach the top cover to the developer cartridge and install the 
cartridge to the machine. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-5 



E. Setting related to fusing 



1) Put down the right and the left levers of the fusing unit in the arrow 
direction. 




F. Paper setting 

1 ) Pull out the first stage paper feed tray. 
Slowly pull out the tray until it stops. 




2) While pressing the paper holding plate, remove the fixing pin. 




5. AR-EF1 / AR-RK1 

<Before installation 

•For installation, an MFP control board (AR-M11) is needed. 



Parts included for the rack f 



Cam A securing screw 
(M3x12)(1 pc.) 



Racks A 
(2 pes.) 



Cam A 
(1 pc.) 



Shaft 
(1 pc.) 



Screws (M4 x £ 
(8 pes.) 



M4 stepped screws 
(3 pes.) 



Parts included in 
the scanner unit 



Tray 
(1 pc.) 



Racks B Cam B 

(2 pes.) {1 pc.) 



Screws (M3 x 6) Screws (M5 x 70) 

(2 pes.) {4 pes.) 



Rack sheet: 1 sheet 



1) Assemble the rack. 

Insert two racks A securely all the way into two racks B respectively 
as shown in the illustration and use four screws (M4 x 8) respectively 
to secure the racks in the order of <1 > to <2> in the illustration. 

Racks A 




2) Cut the rear cabinet of the desk unit. 

Cut the cut-off portions on both ends of the rear cabinet of the desk 
unit by hand and remove them. 




Cut-off portions 



3) Put paper in the tray, and close the paper feed tray. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-6 



3) 



Mount the rack to the desk unit. 

Insert the bosses of the rack into the two rack mounting holes from 
which the cut-off portions of the rear cabinet of the desk unit have 
been removed, and use two screws (M5 x 70) to secure each rack. 





4) 



Bosses 
Rack mounting holes 

Attach the cam and paste the rack sheet. 

Attach the cam to the position shown in the right illustration and 

paste the rack sheet as described in <4>. 

Cam attaching position . 



Rack sheet pasting position 



c1> Insert the shaft to cam B as shown in the illustration and secure it 
with a screw (M3 x 6). 

Shaft 




Screw Tr> 
(M3 x 6) y<y 




Cam B 

> Insert the shaft that has been attached to cam B into the hole of the 
rack as shown in the illustration, attach cam A to the shaft, and 
secure it with a screw (M3 x 6). 

CamB- 

CamA 



Screw 
(M3x6) 




Rack 



<3>Secure cam A with a cam A securing screw (M3 x 12). 

At this time, adjust the position of the head of the cam A securing 
screw to the center of the indicator line of cam A and secure the 
cam. 




Cam A securing screw 
(M3x12) 

<4>Paste the rack sheet to the position shown in the illustration. 




Rack sheet 



5) Put the scanner unit on the rack. 

Hold the grips of the scanner unit, put the scanner unit on the rack 
from the front of the rack by positioning the unit to the rack as shown 
in the illustration, and gently slide the unit until it stops at the end of 
the rack. 




6) Secure the scanner unit. 

Secure the scanner unit that has been put on the rack to the rack 
with three M4 stepped screws. 

M4 stepped 
screw 





7) Remove the securing tape and securing screw for packing. 

Remove all pieces of packing tape and the screw that secure the 
scanner module and remove the packing, the notice sheet. 



Scanner unit 
securing screw 




8) 



Connect the cable. 

Connect the connector of the scanner module to the connector of the 
main unit of the printer and tighten the two screws on the connector 
to secure the connector. 



Caution: To prevent damage to the pins inside the connector, when 
inserting the connector, align the guides of the connector 
exactly. 




Connecting 
cable 



Screws 



9) Attach the output tray. 

Attach the output tray to the scanner unit as shown in the illustration. 



Output tray 




AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-7 



If another peripheral device must be installed, carry out the following 
step at the end of the installation work. 



6. Automatic developer adjustment 

1 ) Attach the cabinets which were removed. 

2) Close the left door. 

At that time, keep the front door open. 
Note:The automatic developer adjustment must be performed by 
entering the simulation mode with the front door open. If the power 
is turned off with the front door closed, warm-up is performed to 
supply toner to the developing unit. As a result, the reference toner 
density cannot be obtained. 

Insert the power plug into the power outlet. 



3) 
4) 



Switch to the copy mode, and press 

[P] ^ [*] ^ [C] - [*] -+ [2] [5] - [START] -* [2] - [START], and 

the machine will enter the simulation mode "AUTOMATIC DV AD". 



5) Close the front door. 
(LCD Display) 



6) 



7) 



8) 



SIMULATION 25-2 



AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. 



Press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] keyj to stop. 
Or stop after 2min. 



SIMULATION 25-2 

AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING.. 



Press the [START] key, and the automatic developer adjustment will 
be performed. 

During execution of the automatic developer adjustment, the data 
(LED) blinks and the LCD indicates the toner sensor value. 

After about 2 min, the adjustment value is stored in the machine. 
Check that the mode was normally completed. 

Normal end: The data LED goes off. 

Abnormal end: The error LED lights up. 
Remove the cause of the error, and execute the automatic developer 
adjustment again. 

Turn off/on the power, and the machine returns to the normal mode 
and enters the warm-up mode. 



7. Adjustment of distortion 

Since adjustment was made at the shipment, any additional adjustment 
is not needed basically. If distortion occurs as shown in the illustration, 
however, perform the adjustment by following the procedure below. 

1) Use a level meter to check that the scanner unit is installed on a 
horizontal surface. 

Make a copy. If distortion occurs as shown in Fig.1 or Fig. 2, loosen 
the cam A securing screw (M3 x 12) to perform the adjustment. 

[Fig. 1] 

First copy image 





A 




\ 


, m „e \ 




Copy paper 






*- Difference 




• In case of Fig. 1 

Move cam A in the direction of A by the difference of the image. 
As a guide for the amount of movement, the image moves 0.5 mm by 
one division (one groove) of cam movement. 

After the movement, tighten the cam A securing screw (M3 x 12) and 
make a copy again to check that the copy image is not distorted. 
[Fig. 2] 

First copy image 





-A 


/ 


-/ 




Copy paper 




«- Difference 




• In case of Fig. 2 

Move cam A in the direction of B by the difference of the image. 

As a guide for the amount of movement, the image moves 0.5 mm by 

one division (one groove) of cam movement. 

After the movement, tighten the cam A securing screw (M3 x 12) and 

make a copy again to check that the copy image is not distorted. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-8 



8. AR-M11 

<Before installation 

•For installation of AR-M1 1 , a scanner module is needed. 
•Start installation after checking that the DATA and COMMUNICATION 
indicators on the operation panel are neither lit nor blinking. 

1) Turn off the main switch of the main unit of the printer. 

Turn the main switch located on the front side of the main unit to the 

"OFF" position. 

Then remove the power plug from the outlet. 




2) Remove the cables connected to the printer control PWB unit. 

Remove all the cables connected to the printer control PWB unit 
from the computer. 



- Centronics cable 

LAN cable 




3) 



Remove the printer control PWB unit. 

Remove the five screws that fix the printer control PWB unit to the 

main unit of the printer. 

Then, hold the two grips and pull out the printer control PWB to 

remove it from the main unit. 



Screws 




4) Move the optional boards to the MFP control PWB. 

Remove the print server card, the HDD PWB, the expansion 
memory, the PS Kanji font ROM, and the E2PROM from the removed 
printer control PWB unit and mount them to the positions of the MFP 
control PWB unit shown in the illustration. 




MFP control PWB unit Extended memory HDD PWB f 
PS Kanji font ROM 

Print server card 




Cover 



•Installation of print server card 

<1 >Remove the screws that fix the cover and remove the cover. 

<2> Insert the connector of the print server card to the connector of the 

MFP control PWB unit. 
<3>Fix the print server card using the removed screws. 

•Installation of HDD expansion PWB 

<1> Remove the three screws shown in the illustration among the screws 

that fix the MFP control PWB unit. 
<2>Mount the three PWB fixing screws to the positions from which three 

screws have been removed. 
<3>lnsert the HDD expansion PWB to the connector of the MFP control 

PWB. 
<4>Fix the HDD expansion PWB to the PWB fixing screws using the 

three screws that have been removed. 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-9 



5) Attach the MFP control PWB. 

Attach the MFP control PWB unit to the main unit of the printer and 
fix it using five screws. 



If another peripheral device must be installed, carry out the following 
step at the end of the installation work. 



Screws 




7) Turn on the main switch of the main unit of the printer. 

Insert the power plug of the main unit of the printer to the outlet. 
Then, turn the main switch located on the front side of the main unit 
to the "ON" position. 



Screws 



6) Connect the cables to the MFP control PWB. 

Connect all the cables that have been removed in step 2 to the 
connectors of the MFP control PWB unit. 

Cable for scanner 




LAN cable 




8) Check the operation. 

<1>Check to see if the indicators on the operation panel of the scanner 

module are lit and key operation is available. 
<2>Place an original in the scanner module and check to see if copying 

can be performed normally. 
<3>For setting change of the printer drivers on the computer, see the 

supplied operation manual. 

Then, execute printing from the computer to check for proper 

printing. 



Centronics cable 



AR-M350 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 6-10 



[7] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 
1. Self print of set values 

Use of SIM 22-6 allows to print the set values and the jam history of the machine. 

These values must be printed before execution of maintenance or disassembly procedures. 



2. Maintenance System Table 
A. Scanner / DSPF 

X Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) 



O Clean 



. Replace 



A Adjust 



Maintenance cycle : 50K 
■& Lubricate □ Move position 



Unit name 


Part name 


When 
calling 


50K 


100K 


150K 


200K 


250K 


300K 


350K 


400K 


Remark 


Optical section 


Mirror/Lens/Reflector/Sensors 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Table glass/OC 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




White reference glass 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Rails 




■A- 


-tr 


-tr 


ft 


ft 


ft 


ft 


ft 




Drive belt/Drive wire/Pulley 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




DSPF 


Paper feed section 


Take-up roller 


o 


O 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


Note 2 


Separation pad 


o 


O 


▲ 


o 


A 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


Note 2 


Paper feed roller 


o 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


o 


▲ 


Note 2 


Transport section 


PS roller 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


O 




Exposure section 
(Dust-proof glass) 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Paper exit section 


Paper feed roller SPF 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Other 


Sensors 






o 




o 




o 




o 


For cleaning, blow air. 


Finish stamp section 

[Option] 

(Japan only) 


Stamp solenoid 


















A 




Stamp individual part 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


User replacement 
at 1 0K or 1 year. 



Note 2: Replacement reference: Same as above or 2 years. 



AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-1 



B. Engine section 

For disassembly procedures, refer to the AR-P350/P450 Service Manual. 



X Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) O Clean 



A Replace 



A Adjust 



Maintenance cycle : 50K 
it Lubricate □ Move position 



Unit name 


Part name 


When 
calling 


50K 


100K 


150K 


200K 


250K 


300K 


350K 


400K 


Remark 


Drum peripheral 


Drum 




▲ 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


Installed when shipping 


Cleaner blade 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Toner reception seal 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Side molt 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Transfer roller 


X 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




Discharge plate 


X 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




TR bearing (F/R) 






X 




X 




X 




A 




Transfer roller collar 






X 




X 




X 




A 




After-transfer star ring 






X 




X 




X 




X 




TR gear 


X 


X 


X 


X 


A 


X 


X 


X 


A 




Screen grid 


(O)X 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Drum separation pawl UN 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Charger case (M/C) 




O 


O 


O 


O 


O 


O 


O 


O 




Charging plate 
(saw teeth) 


(O)X 




















Developing section 


Developer 




X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


Supplied when installing 


DV blade 




X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




DSD collar 




o 


O 


o 


O 


o 


O 


o 


O 




DV side seal F 




X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




DV side seal R 




X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




Toner cartridge 




















Attached when installing./ 

EX Japan: 81 4g, 

user replacement for every 27K. 


Fusing section 


Upper heat roller 




o 


O 


o 


A 


o 


O 


o 


A 




Lower heat roller 




o 


O 


o 


A 


o 


O 


o 


A 




Upper separation pawl 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Lower separation pawl 




A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 


A 




Thermistor 




o 


X 


O 


X 


O 


X 


O 


X 


Clean and remove paper dust. 


Upper heat roller gear 




X 


X 


X 


A 


X 


X 


X 


A 




Paper guides 


O 


o 


o 


o 


O 


o 


o 


o 


O 




Gears 




it 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 




Cleaning roller 




X 


X 


X 


A 


X 


X 


X 


A 




CL roller collar 










A 








A 




Filters 


Ozone filter 






A 




A 




A 




A 




Paper feed section 


Paper feed roller 


O 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


Note 1 


Torque limiter 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 


Note 1 


Transport section 

Paper exit reverse section 


PS follower roller 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Transport rollers 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Transport paper guides 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Paper dust remover 




X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 


X 


A 




Drive section 


Specified position 


it 


•k 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 


it 




Belts 














X 








Image quality 




X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Other 


Sensors 






X 




X 




X 




X 





Note 1 :Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference. 

Paper feed roller/Torque limiter section: 80K or 2 years 



AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-2 



C. Peripheral devices 

X Check (Clean, replace, or adjust as necessary.) 



O Clean 



. Replace 



A Adjust 



Maintenance cycle : 50K 
ft Lubricate □ Move position 



Option name 


Part name 


When 
calling 


50K 


100K 


150K 


200K 


250K 


300K 


350K 


400K 


Remark 


ADU 

+ Manual feed 


Paper feed 
separation section 


Paper feed 
rollers 


(O)X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


Note 3 


Separation pad 


(O)X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


Note 3 


Torque limiter 


(O)X 




X 




X 




X 




X 


Note 3 


Transport section 


Transport rollers 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


O 




Transport paper 
guides 


O 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


O 




Drive section 


Gears 


ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 


(Specified position) 


Belts 














X 








Other 


Sensors 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Desk 

(Multi stage LCC) 

Multi purpose 


Paper feed 
separation section 


Paper feed 
rollers 


(O)X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


Note 3 


Torque limiter 


(O)X 




X 




X 




X 




X 


Note 3 


Transport section 


Transport roller 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Transport paper 
guides 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 


o 




Drive section 


Gears 


ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 


(Specified position) 


Belts 














X 








Other 


Sensors 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Finisher 


Transport section 


Transport rollers 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




De-curler roller 


(O)X 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 


X 


o 




Transport paper 
guides 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




Drive section 


Gears 


ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 


(Specified position) 


Belts 














X 








Other 


Sensors 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Discharge brush 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Staple un 




















Replace UN 
at 100K staple. 


Staple cartridge 




















User replacement 
for every 3000pcs. 


Mail-bin 
stacker 


Transport section 


Transport roller 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




Transport paper 
guides 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




Drive section 


Gears 


ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 


(Specified position) 


Belts 














X 








Other 


Sensors 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Discharge brush 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Saddle finisher 


Transport section 


Transport roller 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




Transport paper 
guides 


o 




o 




o 




o 




o 




Drive section 


Gears 


ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 




ft 


(Specified position) 


Belts 














X 








Other 


Sensors 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Discharge brush 


X 




X 




X 




X 




X 




Staple UN 




















Replace UN at 1 00K staple 
(including the staple UN 
and the holder section). 


Staple cartridge 




















User replacement 
for every 5000 pes. 



Note 3: Replacement reference: Use the counter value of each paper feed port as the replacement reference. 

Paper feed roller/Separation pad/Torque limiter section: 80K or 2 years 



AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-3 



3. Disassembly and assembly 

A. Scanner unit 

(1) (D) SPF unit removal 

1 ) Remove the rear cabinet of the scanner section. 

2) Disconnect the connector. 

3) Disconnect the grounding wire. 




U^f 6 >^ 7) 

3) (S) Slide the SPF unit to the bottom, then remove it. 




(2) Scanner section 

a. Rear cabinet, rear lower cabinet 

1 ) Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet. 




1 > — # 
b. Left cabinet 

1 ) Remove the original exit tray, and remove the scanner left cabinet. 





c. Right cabinet 

1 ) Remove the scanner right cabinet. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-4 



d. Table glass, SPF glass f. Original detection PWB (Light emitting side) 

1) Remove the table glass holder and the SPF glass holder, and 1) Remove the rear cabinet. 

remove the table glass and the SPF glass. 2) Remove the original detection unit (Light emitting side). 




e. Scanner upper cabinet unit 

1 ) Remove the SPF unit 

2) Remove the table glass. 

3) Remove the rear cabinet. 

4) Remove the scanner upper cabinet unit. 






3) Remove the original detection PWB (Light emitting side). 

1) 




g. Scan motor removal 

1 ) Remove the scanner rear cabinet and the rear lower cabinet. 

2) Pull out the harness from the scanner control PWB. 

3) Remove the scan motor. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-5 



h. OC open sensor 

1 ) Remove the rear cabinet. 

2) Remove the OC open sensor. 




i. Mirror home position sensor 

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 

2) Remove the mirror home position sensor. 




j. Scanner control PWB 

1 ) Remove the scanner rear lower cabinet. 

2) Disconnect the connector and earth band, and pull out the scanner 
control PWB. 




1)-V 3) 



When the scanner control PWB is replaced, the EEPROM must be 
replaced. 



k. Operation panel unit 

1) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet. 




2) Remove the harnesses. 




3) Remove the scanner right cabinet. 

4) Remove the operation panel unit. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-6 



I. Inverter PWB/LVDS PWB/LCD panel 

1) Remove the operation panel unit. 

2) Remove the harness, and remove the inverter PWB and the LVDS 
PWB. 




3) Remove the LCD rear cover, and remove the LCD. 

2) 1) 




m. Operation control PWB 

1 ) Remove the operation panel unit. 

2) Remove the operation control PWB. 



1) 



2) 



»1^ V 




n. Original detection PWB (Light receiving side) 

1 ) Remove the operation panel lower cabinet. 

2) Remove the original detection PWB (light receiving side). 




o. Scan lamp 

1 ) Remove the table glass. 

2) Remove the scan lamp unit. 



^>, 1) 




p. CCD/lens unit 

1 ) Remove the table glass. 

2) Remove the dark-box cover. 




3) Remove the CCD/lens unit. 

Note: The CCD/lens unit is factory-adjusted before shipping. 

Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the market. 

Never touch the screws other than screw 2) of the CCD/lens unit. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-7 



Note for CCD/lens unit installation 

<1>Adjust the CCD unit adjustment value listed in the table below 
with the scribed line on the lens base. 

CCD unit adjustment value 

(+) direction 
- Reference line 




(-) direction 
1 scale: 1.4mm 





CCD adjustment value 


+4 scales 


5.0- 


+3 scales 


3.6-4.9 


+2 scales 


2.2-3.5 


+1 scale 


0.8-2.1 


Reference 


-0.6-0.7 


-1 scale 


-2.0- -0.7 


-2 scales 


-3.4- -2.1 


-3 scales 


-4.8- -3.5 


-4 scales 


--4.9 



<2>Make a sample copy at the above position, and measure 

the magnification ratio. 
<3>Change the installing position in the horizontal direction to 

adjust the magnification ratio. 
•When the copy image is longer than the original, shift to 
the positive (+) direction. 

•When the copy image is shorter than the original, shift to 
the negative (-) direction. 

1 scale of the scribed line corresponds to 0.3% of 

magnification ratio. 

If this adjustment is not satisfactory, make a fine adjustment 

with SIM 48-1. 

(Refer to the adjustment described below.) 



q. Scanner interface PWB 

1 ) Remove the table glass. 

2) Remove the PWB cover and the harness cover. 




3) Remove the scanner interface PWB. 




(3) (D) SPF unit 

a. Upper transport unit 

1 ) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 




2) Remove the upper transport unit. 





AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-8 



b. Stopper solenoid 

1 ) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 

2) Remove the stopper solenoid. 



e. Original length sensor 

1 ) Remove the OC cover. 




c. Sensors 

1 ) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 

2) Remove the sensors. 



1) 



*£3 




d. (D) SPF control PWB 

1 ) Remove the SPF PWB, and remove the (D) SPF control PWB. 

1) 





2)Remove the original length sensor cover, and remove the sensor. 




f. Original width detection volume 

1 ) Remove the OC cover. 

2) Remove the original length sensor cover. 

3) Remove the volume cover and remove the volume. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-9 



Original width detection volume installation 

<1 >Extend the original guide to the maximum position. 
<2>Adjust so that the mark on the width detection pinion gear is fitted 
with the mark on the volume mounting plate. 



3) Remove the original paper feed unit. 



f— 2) 




<3>Fix the mounting plate with the screw. 

When the rotational volume sensor is replaced, the sensor value 
must be adjusted to the paper size (mark on the tray). 
(Refer to the SIM 53-6 or 53-7.) 

g. Original paper feed unit 

1 ) Remove the OC cover. 

2) Remove the SPF lower cover. 





h. Take-up roller, paper feed roller 

1 ) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 

2) Remove the paper feed roller cover. 

3) Remove the hook of each roller, and remove each roller. 




i. CIS unit 

1 ) Remove the upper transport unit cover. 

2) Remove the CIS unit. 




When the CIS unit is replaced, the CIS shading adjustment must be 
performed. (Refer to the descriptions of ADJUSTMENTS.) 



AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-10 



3) Remove the cover, and remove the CIS control PWB. 




For easy installation of the cover, slide the earth line to the connector 
side when attaching. 



Note: The CIS unit is factory-adjusted before shipping. 

Since these adjustments cannot be performed in the 
market, never touch the following screws of the CIS unit. 



a 



<i in 



j. Open sensor 

1 ) Remove the open sensor. 



a 



iii )^\{ (S; 



2~ 




k. Paper exit sensor 

1 ) Remove the paper exit sensor. 




I. Paper exit roller 

1 ) Remove the original paper feed unit. 

2) Remove the paper exit roller gear. 




3) Remove the paper exit frame, and remove the paper exit roller. 

e^ 5) 




3) 



AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-1 1 



m. SPF motor 

1 ) Remove the original paper feed unit. 

2) Remove the SPF drive unit. 




3) Remove the SPF motor. 




n. SPF resist roller, SPF resist roller clutch 

1 ) Remove the SPF resist roller unit. 




2) Remove the SPF resist roller and the SPF resist roller clutch. 

1) 




o. SPF paper feed unit, original paper feed solenoid, 
SPF original paper feed clutch 

1 ) Remove the SPF paper feed unit. 

2) Remove the SPF paper guide. 




3) Remove the SPF pickup unit. 




4) Remove the original paper feed solenoid and the SPF original paper 
feed clutch. 




AR-M350 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY, MAINTENANCE 7-12 



[8] MACHINE OPERATION 
1. Acceptable originals 

A stack of up to 50 original sheets of the same size paper can be set in 

the document feeder tray provided the stack 

height is within the limit shown below. 

A stack of up to 30 mixed size originals can be set if the width of the 

originals is the same and the stack height is within 

the limit shown below. In this case, however, stapling and duplex will not 

function and some special functions may not 

give the expected result. 

A. Size and weight of acceptable originals 



5-1/ 


2" x 8- 

or A5 


1/2" 






Original size: 




11" x 17" 
or A3 






< > 




x21C 




(14? 
Weight (thickness) 


mm) (297 x420 mm) 






J<"+CT 




14 1 
g/m 2 ... Weight of a 


ds. or 50g/m 2 34 lbs. or 128g/m 2 
sheet of paper of 1 m 2 





B. Total amount of originals that can be set 
in the document feeder tray 



Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 1/4" or 
6.5 mm (for 14 to 21 lbs. or 50 to 80 g/rrf paper). 

I 1/4" or 6.5 mm 
or less 




Total aggregate thickness must not exceed 3/16" or 
5.0 mm (for 21 to 34 lbs. or 80 to 128 g/rrf paper). 

"] 3/1 6" or 5.0 mm 
or less 




<Notes on use of the automatic document feeder> 

•Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of 
originals out of the specified range may cause an original misfeed. 

•Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to 
remove any staples or paper clips. 

•If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from 
pasteups, be sure they are dried before they are fed. If not, the interior 
of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled. 

•To prevent incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds or 
smudges on copies, use the following as a guide for feeding originals. 

Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or 
originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed 
through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder 
should not be damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted 
paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple punched holes 
other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly. 

•When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the 
punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot. 



Hole positions" 



#r 



•¥- 



Hole 
positions 



Hole positions" 



J 



2. Standard original setting orientation 

Descriptions of functions that follow in this manual assume that originals 
are oriented as shown. 

Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so 
that the top of the original is positioned to the rear side of the machine. 
If not, staples will be incorrectly positioned and some special features 
may not give the expected result. 




II ii.Ei°n°r 



3. Automatic copy image rotation 
- rotation copying 

If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original 
image will be automatically rotated 90" and copied. (When an image is 
rotated, a message will be displayed.) When enlargement of originals 
larger than 8-1/2" x 1 1" or A4 is selected, rotation cannot be done. 

[Example] 



Orientation of original Orientation of paper 



Copy after rotatior 





ca 

f 



Face down 



Face down 



4. Adjustment values 

A. Processing adjustment values 

Each controller has its EEPROM. The adjustment values are collected to 
the MFP controller. 

If any adjustment value is changed, the changed value is returned to the 
controller and saved. 



LCD 











MFP CONTROLLER I 




When any adjustment value is 
changed, it is retuned to each 
controller and saved. 



Transmission of saved 

adjustment value 

(When turning on the power, etc 



x 



PCU 



X 



SCANNER 
CONTROLLER 



AR-M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8-1 



B. Adjustment values 

(1) Adjustment values saved in 



PCU 



Counters 




Adjustment values 




Others 


Drum rotating time counter 
(accumulated time) 


Developing bias voltage value 


Serial number 


Developing unit rotating time counter 


Cleaning mode developing bias voltage value 


Trouble history 


Toner supply time (Section IC chip) 


Main high voltage adjustment 


Tray 1 size 


Drum rotating time (Section IC chip) 


Transfer charger voltage value 


LCC tray size 


Total counter 


Transfer belt cleaning voltage value 


Manual feed destination information 


Maintenance counter 


Toner concentration reference value 


Tray 2 destination information 


Developing counter 


Concentration correction start set time (Developing unit) 


Desk 1 destination information 


Drum counter 


Concentration correction rotating time (Developing unit) 


Desk 2 destination information 


Toner cartridge counter 


Concentration correction quantity (Developing unit) 


Machine tray remaining paper quantity data 


Effective paper counter 


Correction execution direction, upper/lower limits 
(Developing unit) 


Multi-purpose remaining paper quantity data 


Tray 1 paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(low temperature side) correction quantity 


Option tray 1 remaining paper quantity data 


Multi-purpose paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(low temperature side) set temperature 


Option tray 2 remaining paper quantity data 


Desk 1/LCC 1 paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(low temperature side) cancel temperature 


Final toner concentration sensor output value 


Desk 2/LCC 2 paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(high temperature side) correction quantity 


Toner cartridge IC chip destination 


Manual paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(high temperature side) judgment temperature 


Counter mode setup 


ADU paper feed counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 

(high temperature side) judgment voltage difference 


White paper exit count setup 


Staple counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(high temperature side) correction value 


Trouble memory mode setup 


Punch counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(low temperature side) cancel temperature 


Fusing operation mode (anti-curling) 


Machine right side paper exit counter 


Toner concentration temperature correction 
(high temperature side) toner control delay time 


CE mark conforming operation mode 




Multi-purpose width adjustment value 


Maintenance cycle 




Manual feed width adjustment value 


Print stop setup at developer life over 




Heater lamp temperature (center, normal control) 


Saddle alignment operation priority mode 




Lead edge adjustment 






Lead edge void set value 






Rear edge void set value 






Side edge setup 






Print off-center adjustment value 






Resist quantity adjustment value 






Laser power adjustment value 






PPD1 sensor adjustment 








Process correction inhibit allow setup value 








Developing bias rising correction wait time 






Developing bias rising correction adjustment value 






Built-in finisher jogger position adjustment 






Saddle adjustment value 





AR-M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8-2 



(2) Adjustment values saved in SCANNER 



Counters 




Adjustment values 




Others 


Scan counter 


Original lead edge adjustment value 


Exposure mode setup value 


SPF paper pass counter 


Original off-center adjustment value 


Serial number 


SPF stamp counter 


Original image loss quantity adjustment value 






Magnification ratio adjustment value 






SPF resist quantity adjustment value 






Exposure motor speed adjustment value 






Platen original detection adjustment value 






SPF width detection adjustment value 






Touch panel adjustment value 






Exposure level adjustment value 






Gamma change value 






OC/SPF exposure correction value 






Shading adjustment value (CCD/CIS) 






CCD shading start position adjustment value 





(3) Adjustment values saved in MFP controller 



Counters 




Adjustment values 




Others 


Copy counter 


FAX SOFT SW. etc. 


Trouble history 


Printer counter 




Jam history 


FAX reception counter 




Destination setup 


FAX transmission counter 




Language setup 


Trouble counter 




Toner save mode setup 


Jam counter 




1 3" setup 






Auditor setup 






Serial number 






Middle binding mode AMS setup 






PC/Modem communication trouble detection 
YES/NO setup 






Tag number setup 






Y change value 






Exposure mode setup 






OC/SPF exposure correction value 






Printer setup values 






Network setup values 



5. Key operator program 





KFY OPERATOR PROGRAM 


Set value(Default) 


Remark 




Engine section LCD 


Copy function 
settings 


Initial status settings 


Paper tray, 






exposure mode 






copy ratio, 






duplex mode 






output mode 






Exposure adjustment 




1~5*~9 




Rotation copy setting 








Auto paper selection 
setting 








600dpi x 600dpi scanning 
mode 




600x300dpi*/600x600dpi 




Quick scan from document 
glass 




600x300dpi7600x600dpi* 




Device control 


Original size detector 
setting 




INCH-1/INCH-2/AB-17AB-2 




Disabling of document 
feeder 








Scan to 
E-mail initial 
status settings 


Default sender set 








Initial file format setting 








Compression mode 
at broadcasting 









AR-M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8-3 





KFYDPFRATDR PROGRAM 


Set value(Default) 


Remark 




Engine section LCD 


Account 
control 


Auditing mode 




ON/OFF* 




Print per account 


Print per account display 


0N70FF 




Print per account print 






Reset account 








Account number control 


Enter new account number(5digits) 






Delete account number 






Change account number 






Print account number 






No print if acc't # invalid 




Yes/No* 




Energy save 


Auto power shut-off timer 




1 5min/30min*/60min/1 20min/240min 




Auto power shut-off 




Disable/Enable* 




Preheat mode 




1 5min*/30min/60min/1 20min/240min/None 




Toner save 




ON/OFF* 




Operation 
panel settings 


Auto clear setting 




1 5sec/30sec/60sec7OFF 




Message display time 




3sec/6sec79sec/1 2sec 




Language setting 




American English/EnglishVFrench/Spanish 


Depend on the 
distination 


Device 
settings 


Disable duplex unit 




Yes/No* 




Disable stapler unit 




Yes/No* 




Disable paper desk 
drawers 




Yes/No* 




Disable finisher 




Yes/No* 




Disable mail-bin stacker 




Yes/No* 




Saddle stitch adjust 


Paper size A4 


-3.0mm~0.0mm*~3.0mm (0.1mm unit) 


With the 
saddle finisher 
installed 


Paper size B4 


-3.0mm~0.0mm*~3.0mm (0.1mm unit) 


Paper size A4R 


-3.0mm~0.0mm*~3.0mm (0.1mm unit) 


Paper size Ledger 


-3.0mm~0.0mm*~3.0mm (0.1mm unit) 


Paper size Letter-R 


-3.0mm~0.0mm*~3.0mm (0.1mm unit) 


Print key 
operator 
program list 










Key operator 
code change 


Set code 




00000* 




System 
settings 


Default settings 


Print density level 


NormalVDAKER/DARKEST/LIGHTEST/LIGHTER 




Disable notice page printing 


Yes7No 




Disable test page printing 


YesVNo 




A4/LT auto select 


ON/OFF* 




Interface settings 


Hexadecimal dump mode 


ON/OFF* 




PDL for parallel port 


AutoVPostScript/PCL 




PDL for network port 


Auto7PostScript/PCL 




I/O timeout 


1 sec~20sec*~999sec 




Port switching 


Per job7Timeout/Paralell OFF/Network OFF 




Network settings 


IP address setting 


IP address 000.000.000.000* 




IP subnet mask 000.000.000.000* 




IP gateway 000.000.000.000* 




Enable TCP/IP 


Yes*/No 




Enable NetWare 


Yes7No 




Enable EtherTalk 


Yes*/No 




Enable NetBEUI 


Yes7No 




Reset the NIC 






Intialize/Store settings 


Restore factory defaults 






Store current configuration 






Restore configuration 






Product key 


PS3 expansion kit 








E-mail alert and status 









AR-M350 MACHINE OPERATION 8-4 



[9] ADJUSTMENTS 








Adjustment item 


1 


Process 
section 


A 


High voltage output adjustment 


2 


Engine 
section 


A 


LSU right angle adjustment 


B 


Print off-center adjustment 


C 


Resist quantity adjustment 


3 


Scanner 
section 


A 


Scanner unit distortion adjustment 


B 


OC scan distortion adjustment 


C 


Vertical image distortion balance adjustment 


D 


Vertical image distortion balance adjustment 


E 


Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment 


F 


Original detection light emitting unit height adjustment 


G 


Original size detection photo sensor check 


H 


Original size detection photo sensor adjustment 


I 


(D) SPF hinge height adjustment 


J 


(D) SPF hinge diagonal adjustment (Front) 


K 


Scan magnification ratio adjustment 


L 


OC scan lead edge adjustment 


M 


Original off-center adjustment 


N 


Image density adjustment 





DSPF width detection adjustment 



1 . Process section 

A. High voltage output adjustment 

(1) Developing bias output check and setup 

1) Remove the rear cabinet to allow checking of the high voltage 
monitor output pin. 

2) Execute the simulation of the target high voltage. 
(See the table below.) 

3) Select the mode to be set with 1 0-key, and press START key. 

4) Enter the set value with 10-key and press START key. The set value 
is outputted for 30 sec. 

5) Apply a high voltage tester between the measurement pin and the 
frame. 

Note:Take care not to short the measuring pin and the frame. 

6) The unit stops after 30 sec of output. 






Default 


Set range 


Measurement 
pin 


High voltage 

probe 
impedance 


Monitor output 
voltage 


Set value 


MC grid MAIN GRID (SIM 8-2) 


AUTO 


AE mode 


-650V+5V 


645 


200-900 


CN2-7 


100M£2 


CHARACTER 


Text mode 


-650V+5V 


645 


200-900 


MIX 


Text/Photo 
mode 


-650V+5V 


645 


200-900 


PHOTO 


Photo mode 


-650V+5V 


645 


200-900 


PRINTER 


Printer mode 


-650V±5V 


645 


200-900 


FAX 


Fax mode 


-650V±5V 


645 


200-900 


Transfer current (THV+ (SIM 8-6) 


FRONT 


Front 




45PPM : 267 
35PPM : 220 


0-620 






BACK 


Back 




45PPM :310 
35PPM : 267 


0-620 


Developing bias DV BIAS (SIM 8-1) 


AUTO 


AE mode 


-500V+5V 


485 


0-745 


CN2-1 


100MH 


CHARACTER 


Text mode 


-500V+5V 


485 


0-745 


MIX 


Text/Photo 
mode 


-500V+5V 


485 


0-745 


PHOTO 


Photo mode 


-500V+5V 


485 


0-745 


PRINTER 


Printer mode 


-500V±5V 


485 


0-745 


FAX 


Fax mode 


-500V±5V 


485 


0-745 


PLUS 


Positive bias 


+150V±5V 


150 


0-255 


Separation voltage SHV (SIM 8-17) 


FRONT 


Front 


+1.25V+0.1V 


45PPM : 160 
35PPM : 120 


0-375 


CN2-3 


10MQ 


BACK 


Rear 


+1.25V+0.1V 


45PPM : 160 
35PPM : 120 


0-375 


Transfer voltage THV (SIM 8-1 7) 






-800V+10V 


780 


0-1250 


CN2-5 


10GS2 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-1 



2. Engine section 

A. LSU right angle adjustment 

This adjustment is required in the following cases: 
•When the LSU is replaced. 
•When a distortion is generated in printer output. 
(Check with self-print pattern "71 .") 

After completion of this adjustment, perform the following adjustments: 
•Print off-center adjustment 
•Void area adjustment 

1) Execute SIM 64-1. 

2) Make self-print of print pattern 71 and grid pattern from tray 1 . 

3) Check the self-printout. 



<Right angle check method> 

<1 > Make a self-print pattern 71 . 

<2> Draw a line perpendicular to the sub scanning direction 

(paper transport direction) with a square. 

At that time, let the point of intersection of the perpendicular line 

and the horizontal line be the start point. 
<3> Measure distance A at a position 220mm apart from the point of 

intersection of the vertical line outputted by self print and the line 

drawn with a square. 
<4> Check that distance A satisfies the specification below. 


Print 
lead edge 


£a 






J 


220mm 


/ ' ' 


\ 














Spec 
A=Within 


±0.5mm/220mm 



















4) 



If the printout is out of the specifications, perform the following 
procedures. 

Loosen two screws (M4) which are fixing the LSU. 
Turn the adjustment screw on the upper side (rear of the printer 
operation panel) clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the height 
of the LSU front side. 

After completion of adjustment, tighten the two fixing screws of the 
LSU unit. 

Print the grid pattern again and check it. 

Repeat procedures 7) to 10) until the printout is in the specified 
range. 
1 0) After completion of the work, apply screw lock to the screws. 




Print lead edge 



<Specifications> 






Measurement 
position 


Specification 


Set value 


Print distortion 
adjustment 


SIM 64-1 
Self-print pattern 
71 


B=90 o ±0.13° 


Adjustment 
scale 1 = about 
0.25° shift in 8 



B. Print off-center adjustment 

This adjustment is performed in the following cases: 
•When the center is misaligned in printing. 
•When the LSU is replaced. 

•When the option paper feed unit or the automatic duplex unit is installed 
or replaced. 

Before execution of this adjustment, the following adjustments must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

•Print magnification ratio adjustment 

After completion of this adjustment, the following adjustment must be 

executed. 

•Void area setup 

1) Execute SIM 50-10. 

2) Set the paper fed tray and the magnification ratio for the adjustment. 

3) After entering the adjustment values, press START key, and printing 
is started. 

4) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the printed 
copy. Repeat procedure 2) until the specification is satisfied. 

When adjusting the off-center of LCC1, load paper only on the left 

tray of LCC. 

When adjusting the off-center of LCC2, load paper only on the right 

tray of LCC. 

This is because no distinction of right and left is made when 

selecting a tray. 



Print lead edge 






Specification ± 1 .5mm 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-2 





Adjustment position 


Measurement 
reference 


Specification 


Set value 




Default 


Range 




Print off-center SIM 50-10 


Tray 1 


Tray 1 


Output pattern 
center line 


0±1.5mm 


50 


0-99 


Set value 1 : 
0.1mm shift 


Tray 2 


Tray 2 


Tray 3 


Tray 3/LCC left 


Tray 4 


Tray 4/LCC right 


MFT 


Manual feed 


ADU 


Duplex 



•For the duplex mode (Single ? Duplex), add 1 to the above set value. 

•When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center, decrease the value. 

•When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center, increase the value. 



C. Resist quantity setup 

•This adjustment required a fine accuracy. 
Do not change the default as far as possible. 

This adjustment is performed in the following cases: 
•When the void quantity is changed by the paper feed tray. 
•When paper is skewed. 

Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustments must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

•Print magnification ratio adjustment 

•Print off-center setup 

•Void area setup 

1) Execute SIM 51-2. 

2) Adjust the resist quantity so that paper is transferred stably. 

<Factory setup value> 



45PPM 


BPT 


55 


T1 


60 


T2 


50 


DESK 


50 


ADU 


50 


35PPM 


BPT 


60 


T1 


65 


T2 


55 


DESK 


55 


ADU 


55 



3. Scanner section 

A. Scanner unit distortion adjustment 

Before executing this adjustment, the following adjustment must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

1 ) Make a test chart as shown below. (Make a self-print pattern 71 .) 



2) Make a copy from the table glass, and check it. 

At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted 
position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly. 

3) If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the following 
adjustment. 

4) Adjust the distortion. 

[Fig. 1] [Fig. 2] 

First copy image First copy image 





A 




! 


Image \ 




Paper 






«- Difference 





A 


/ 


/ 

Image / 




Paper 




^Difference 





•In the case of Fig. 1 

Shift cam A in the direction A by the difference in the copy image. 

For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm. 

After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and make a 

copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there is no distortion. 

•In the case of Fig. 2 

Shift cam A in the direction B by the difference in the copy image. 

For one scale (one groove), shift by 0.5mm. 

After shifting, tighten the fixing screw (M3 x 12) of cam A and make a 

copy again, and check the copy again to insure that there is no distortion. 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-3 



B. OC scan distortion adjustment 
(MB-B rail height adjustment) 

•This adjustment requires a high-level preciseness. 

It is easier to perform the scanner unit distortion adjustment previously 

described. 

Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustment must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

1 ) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern 71 .) 




2) 

3) 
4) 
5) 



Make a copy from the table glass, and check it. 

At that time, set the test chart correctly. If it is set in a distorted 

position, the adjustment cannot be made correctly. 

If the output value is not in the specified range, perform the following 

adjustment. 

Remove the front cabinet in front of the scanner, and check that 

installing position of the MB rail. 

Loosen the screw at the right of the MB rail to adjust. 







<Specifications> 








Measurement 
point 


Specification 


Set value 




OC scan 
distortion 
adjustment 


Angle 6 in the 
above figure 


=90°±0.13° 


1 scale = about 
0.25°shift in e 



2) 



Vertical image distortion balance adjustment 
(Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment) 

Insert the front/rear mirror base drive wire into the frame groove and 
press and fix it with the wire holder. At that time, do not tighten the 
wire fixing screw. Change the direction of the lamp positioning plate. 
(F and R) 

Push the copy lamp unit onto the positioning plate, and tighten the 
wire fixing screw. 




<Note for assembling the copy lamp unlt> 

After fixing, manually shift the copy lamp unit a few times to check that it 
moves smoothly. 

D. Vertical image distortion balance adjustment 
(No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing 
position adjustment) 

This adjustment is to adjust the parallelism of the mirror base to the OPC 

drum surface and the original surface. 

1) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley to bring mirror base B into 
contact with mirror base positioning plate. 

If, at that time, the front frame side and the frame side of mirror base 
B are brought into contact with the mirror base positioning plate 
simultaneously, the parallelism is correct and there is no need for 
adjustment. 




AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-4 



E. Vertical (sub scanning direction) distortion 
adjustment [Winding pulley position adjustment] 

This adjustment is executed in the following cases: 
•When the mirror base drive wire is replaced. 
•When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced. 
•When a copy shown below is made. 




Original Copy 

1 ) Set A3 white paper on the original table as shown below. 




A3 white paper 



2) 
3) 



Glass holding plate 



Fit the paper edge and 
the glass holding plate edge 

With the original cover open, make a normal (X 1 .0) copy. 

Measure the black distance at the lead edge and the rear edge of the 

copy paper. 




Paper exit directi on 

La : Lead edge black background section 
Lb : Rear edge black background section 

If La = Lb, the procedures 4) through 7) are not required. 



4) Loosen the fixing screw of the front or the rear frame mirror base 
drive pulley. 



•If La < Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in direction B. 

(Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) 
•If La > Lb, turn the rear frame mirror base drive pulley in direction A. 

(Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.) 

Rear side 




Front side 



Adjust screw 



5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley. 

6) Perform procedures 1) through 3). 

7) If La is not equal to Lb, perform procedures 4) and 5). 
If La = Lb, the adjustment is completed. 

Repeat procedures 1) through 6) until La = Lb. 

F. Original detection light emitting unit height 
adjustment 

1) Execute SIM 41-3. 

2) Open the original cover, hold the original detection light emitting unit 
gently, and select "1" and press START key without placing an 
original. 




32±0.5mm 



3) 



4) 



Check that "COMPLETE" is displayed on the LCD, and press 
CUSTOM SETTING key, and the screen returns to the original menu. 
Place an A3 (or WLT) original on the table glass, and select "2" and 
press START key. 

When "COMPLETE" is displayed on the LCD, the adjustment has 
been completed. 



SIMULATION 41-3 






PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY. 




ocsw 








PD1[128] 


200 


PD2[128]: 


200 


PD3[128] 


50 


PD4[128]: 


52 


PD5[128] 


51 


PD6[128]: 


50 


PD7[128] 


52 







5) After completion of adjustment, press the document detection light 
emitting unit down with your fingers completely to the bottom, and 
release it. Check that the document detection light-emitting unit 
moves up smoothly. 

<Specification> 





Specification 


Adjustment 
position 


Original size detection photo sensor 
adjustment 


COMPLETE 


SIM 41-2 



G. Orignal size detection photo sensor check 

1) Execute SIM 41-1. 

2) Put A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, and check that all the 
sensor displays (except for OCSW) on the LCD are highlighted. 

3) Gradually move the unit to the left, and check that the highlighted 
sensor displays turn off one by one sequentially. 



SIMULATION 41-1 
PD SE NSOR CHECK.. 
OCSW EBB 



PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 



(The detected sensors are highlighted.) 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-5 



H. Orignal size detection photo sensor adjustment 



J. DSPF hinge diagonal adjustment (Front) 



1) Execute SIM 41-2. 

At that time, check that the scanner mirror base is at the home 
position. 

2) Open the document cover. Select 1 without placing paper on the 
table glass, and press START. 

3) When COMPLETE is displayed on the LCD, press CUSTOM 
SETTING to return to the initial screen. 

4) Place A3 (or WLT) paper on the table glass, select 2 and press 
START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is normally 

completed. 

If ERROR is displayed, the error PD sensor is displayed. 



SIMULATION 41-2 

PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1 -2, AND PRESS START 

(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.) 

1. NO ORIGINAL 

2. A3 ORIGINAL 



Select pTand press [START] key.| 



I 



I 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 41-2 

PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. 

NO ORIGINAL - COMPLETE (or " ERROR alg^U^...") 
A3 ORIGINAL - INCOMPLETE 



Select j 1 and P ress [START] key.| 
-JLr (In case of an error) 



Press [[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 41-2 

PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. 

NO ORIGINAL - COMPLETE 

A3 ORIGINAL - COMPLETE (or " ERROR atEH] 



<Specification> 





Specification 


Adjustment 


Document size detection photo sensor 
adjustment 


COMPLETE 


SIM 41-2 



I. DSPF hinge height adjustment 

1) Close the DSPF. 

2) Check that the dove and the reference plate are in contact with the 
table glass. If not, adjust with the setscrew. 




<Specification> 





Specification 


Adjustment 
position 


Distance between 


3-point contact 


Hinge 


dove (Reference plate) 


(Left front/Left rear/Right 


adjustment set 


and table glass 


front when viewed from the 
front) 


screw 



Before executing this adjustment, the following adjustments must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

•DSPF height adjustment 

1 ) Make a test chart as shown below. (Print a self-print pattern 71 .) 

2) Make a copy with DSPF. 

3) Measure the rear side and check that the value is in the specified 
range. 




4) 
5) 
6) 



If the value is not in the specified range, loosen the nut which is fixing 

the hinge R adjustment screw, and adjust the adjustment screw. 

Make a copy again, and check again that the value is in the specified 

range. 

Tighten the nut to fix the adjustment screw. 




<Specification> 





Specification 


Adjustment 
position 


Skew feed 


Within ±3mm 


Hinge R 
adjustment screw 


Lead edge skew 


A4 or less: 1 mm or less 
Greater than A4: 1 .5mm or less 


Eccentric screw for 
CIS adjustment 



K. Scan magnification ratio adjustment 

(1) OC scan magnification ratio adjustment 

1) Place a print of self-print pattern (A3 or WLT) 70 or a scale on the 
table glass. 

2) Close the original cover, and make a copy. 

3) Check that the value is within the specification. 

4) If not, adjust with SIM 48-1 . 

5) Make a copy again and check again that the value is within the 
specification. 



SIMULATION 48-1 












MAGNIFICATION ADJ 
0. TRAY SELECT [ 


USTMENT. 


SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. 
START 


| 1. COPY 


2. MAGNIFICATION 

3. CCD(MAIN) EI 
6. CIS(MAIN) ESI 


ililil 

4. CCD(SL 


B) EJ 5. 


SPF(SUB) 


ETil 


H 



<Specification> 





Specification 


Adjustment 
position 


Adjustment 
value 


Main scan direction 
magnification ratio 


±0.5% 


SIM48-1 


Set value 1 : 
0.1% change 


Sub scan direction 
magnification ratio 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-6 



(2) DSPF scan magnification ratio 

1 ) Set a chart of print pattern 70 on SPF/DSPF. 

2) Make a copy. (In the case of DSPF back copy, make a single copy in 
the duplex mode.) 

Check that the output paper satisfies the specifications. 
If not, adjust with SIM 48-1. 

Make a copy again, and check that the output paper satisfies the 
specifications. 



3) 
4) 
5) 



SIMULATION 48-1 

MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION Tlilil 

3. CCD(MAIN) 21 4 - CCD(SUB) gj 5. SPF(SUB) gj] 
6. CIS(MAIN) Efrl 



<Specifications> 





Specifications 


Adjustment 
position 


Adjustment 
value 


SPF sub scan direction 
magnification ratio 


±0.5% 


SIM 48-1 


Set value 1 : 
0.1% change 


DSPF main scan (back) 
direction magnification 
ratio 



The SPF main scan direction magnification ratio is common with OC. 



L. OC scan lead edge adjustment 

Before executing this adjustment, the following adjustment must have 

been completed. 

•OC scan magnification ratio adjustment 



Set an original on the original table. 

Enter SIM 50-1. 

Make a copy. 

Select the number to be set on the right of the LCD, and perform the 

adjustment of each item. 

Select "3: RRC-A" and change the value with 10-key to perform the 

copy adjustment. 

Select "4: RRC-B" so that the distance between the paper lead edge 

and the copy image lead edge is within 3.0mm. Change the value 

with 10-key and perform the copy adjustment. 

Check that the lead edge shift is within 3.0mm. If not, perform the 

fine adjustment of procedure 5) and 6). 

Select "5: DEN-B" so that the white spot in the latter half of copy 

(rear edge void) is within 3.0mm. Change the value with 10-key and 

perform the copy adjustment. 

(The rear void adjustment is changed by the step of 0.1mm.) 
•When the rear edge void is too small, increase the value. 
•When the rear edge void is too great, decrease the value. 
9) Press [CA] key to cancel the simulation. 



7) 



8) 



SIMULATION 50-1 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION [EH 

3. RRCA EjJ 4. RRCB Qj] 5. DENB 

6. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) Qj] 7. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) g 
8. DENA E3j] 9. FR VOID E&I 



<Specification> 







Specifi-cation 


Set value 






Default 


Range 




RRCA 


Original scan start position 




50 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.2mm shift 


RRCB 


Image and paper position adjustment on the OPC drum 




50 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 


DENA 


Lead edge void adjustment 


Total 8mm or less 


35 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 


DENB 


Rear edge void adjustment 


35 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 


IMAGE LOSS (LEAD) 


Both sides image loss 


4.0mm or less 


15 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 


IMAGE LOSS (SIDE) 


F/R void quantity 


Total 8mm or less 


20 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 


FR_VOID 




Total 8mm or less 


35 


0-99 


Set value 1 


0.1mm shift 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-7 



M. Original off-center adjustment 



Before execution of this adjustment, the following adjustment must have 

been completed. 

•LSU right angle adjustment 

•Print off-center adjustment 

•Print magnification ratio adjustment 

1 ) Set an original on the original table. 

2) Execute SIM 50-12. 

3) Select the paper feed tray and the magnification ratio. 

4) After entering the adjustment value, pres START key, and printing is 
started. 



5) Check the off-center (distance from the paper lead edge) of the 
printed copy. Repeat procedure 2 until the printed copy satisfies the 
specifications. 



Print lead edge 


t a 




Specification ± 1 .5mm 





Adjustment position 


Measurement reference 


Specification 


Set value 


Default 


Range 




Print off-center 
SIM 50-10 


Tray 1 


Tray 1 


Output pattern center line 


As shone in the table below. 


50 


0-99 


Set value 1 : 
0.1mm shift 


Tray 2 


Tray 2 


Tray 3 


Tray 3/LCC left 


Tray 4 


Tray 4/LCC right 


MFT 


Manual feed 


ADU 


Duplex 









•For the duplex mode (Single ? Duplex), add 10 to the above set value. 

•When the print line is shifted toward a from the paper center, decrease the value. 

•When the print line is shifted toward b from the paper center, increase the value. 

<Specifications> 



Machine (OC mode) 


Single 


±1.5mm 


Duplex 


+1.7mm 


Overall (DSPF) 


Single S - S 


±2.8mm 


Single D - S 


+3. 5mm 


Duplex S - D 


±3.0mm 


Duplex D - D 


±3. 5mm 



N. Image density adjustment 

The image density adjustment is required for the following copy quality mode by using the simulation. 
There are two methods; the collective adjustment and the individual adjustment of the copy quality mode. 



•Copy mode 










•FAX mode 










Copy quality mode Collective 


adjustment 


Individual 
adjustment 






adjustment 


Individual 
adjustment 


Binary value mode 


Auto mode 


SIM46-2 




Normal mode 


Binary value mode 


AUTO 


SIM46-12 


SIM46-13 


Character mode 


SIM46-9 


LIGHT 


Character/Photo mode 


SIM46-10 


DARK 


Photo mode 


SIM46-11 


Small text mode 


Binary value mode 


AUTO 


SIM46-14 








LIGHT 






DARK 




Half tone mode 


AUTO 




LIGHT 




DARK 




Fine mode 


Binary value mode 


AUTO 


SIM46-15 




LIGHT 




DARK 




Half tone mode 


AUTO 




LIGHT 




DARK 




Super fine mode 


Binary value mode 


AUTO 


SIM46-16 




LIGHT 




DARK 




Half tone mode 


AUTO 




LIGHT 




DARK 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-8 



(1) Test chart setting 

1) Place a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the original table as shown 
below. 

2) Place several sheets of A3 (1 1 x 17) white paper 

(Sharp's specified paper) on the test chart at the rear reference. 




: • DDE 

one 

3.-, r 



12 3 4 5 6 7 



9 10 W 



□D 




Test chart comparison 



UKOG-0162FCZZ 
DENSITY No. 


1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


10 


W 


UKOG-0089CSZZ 
DENSITY No. 


0.1 




0.2 




0.3 








0.5 


1.9 





KODAK GRAY 
SCALE 




1 




2 




3 




4 




19 


A 


SHARP 

CORPORATION 
MADE IN JAPAN 

























(2) Density adjustment procedure 

a. Collective adjustment of two or more copy quality modes 

Normally this adjustment is performed with SIM 46-2. In this method, two 
or more copy density adjustments in different modes can be adjusted 
collectively. 

1) Execute SIM 46-2. 
(Binary value mode) 



Quality mode 


Linked simulation data 


AE3.0 (AE) 




CH3.0 (Character) 


sim46-9 


MIX3.0 (Character/Photo) 


sim46-10 


PH3.0 (Photo) 


sim46-1 1 



SIMULATION 46-2 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3.AE3.0 Qj] 4. CH3.0 {^J 

5. MIX 3.0 [ I 6. PHOTO 3.0 Hil 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] kiy] Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-2 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START 

3.AE3.0 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

4 



L 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-2 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



l 



Press |[START] key| or E E 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 46-2 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. MFT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |jSTART] keyj 




Press |[START] key| or 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] ke'y] 



SIMULATION 46-2 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START. 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3.AE3.0 4.CH3.0 

S. MIX 3.0 6. PHOTO 3.0 



2) Press the COPY button to make a copy. 

Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. 

If not, change the adjustment value. 



•Adjustment spec 










Mode 


EXP. 


Chart 
No. 


Adjustment 
level 


Chart 
No. 


Adjustment 
level 


Character 


3 


3 


Copied 


2 


Not copied 


Character/ 
Photo 


3 


3 


Copied 


2 


Not copied 


Photo 


3 


3 


Copied 


2 


Not copied 


Auto 




3 


Copied 


2 


Not copied 



If the copy density is too light, increase the adjustment value. 
If the copy density is too dark, decrease the adjustment value. 
Adjustment range: 30-170 



b. Individual adjustment of each copy quality mode This adjustment is used when a different density level for different copy 

AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-9 



quality mode is required. SIM 46-5 to -7 and SIM 46-9 to -1 1 are used. 
1 ) Execute the simulation corresponding to the copy quality mode to be 
adjusted. 



SIMULATION 46-9 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-1 1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT B 1. COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL || 

3. 1.0 J 4.1.5 BJ 5.2.0 I 
6.2.5. I 7.3.0 EJ 8.3.5 | 
9.4.0 3 10.4.5 El 11.5.0 EKI 



Select other than 0-2, 



andpress | lSTART] kiy] Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
t I 



SIMULATION 46-9 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 
3. 1.0 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key.| Press |[START] key.| 

4 



IE 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-9 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] key] 



b 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-9 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. MFT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-9 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-1 1 , AND PRESS START. 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3.1.0 4.1.5 5.2.0 

6.2.5. 7.3.0 8.3.5 

9.4.0 10.4.5 11.5.0 



2) Press the COPY button to make a copy 

Check that the copy density is as shown in the table below. If not, change 

the adjustment value. 

For the auto mode, there is only one adjustment value. For the other 

modes, the adjustment value for each density level must be adjusted. 

c. Gain adjustment in DSPF back (CIS) scan 

When images are too dark or too bright in scanning the back (CIS) of 
DSPF, perform the following procedures. 

1) Make a duplex copy of a sample, and check the density of canning 
the back. 

2) Execute SIM 46-17. 



SIMULATION 46-17 



CCD/CIS SHADING GAIN DATASETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 
1 . CCD ODD E 2. CCD EVEN [E 

3. cis jm 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-17 

CCD SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP.INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS 

START. 

1.CCDODD 



3) Select "3. CIS" and adjust the gain of CIS. 

When the CIS gain setup value is increased, the image becomes 

brighter. 

When the CIS gain setup value is decreased, the image becomes 

darker. 

O. DSPF width detection adjustment 

(1) When replacing DSPF unit 



1) Use SIM53-7 to enter the value indicated on the side of the right 
hinge of the DSPF unit. 



SIMULATION 53-7 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION: 

2. POSITION 1: 

3. POSITION 2: 

4. MIN. POSITION: 



i 



Press | [START] key] 



Press [pJSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 53-7 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND 

PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION 



(2)When replacing the original width detection volume. 

Execute SIM53-6 to perform the machine DSPF original tray size 

adjustment. 

1 ) Extend the guide to MAX. position, select 1 , and press START. When 

COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

Move the guide to A4R position, select 2, and press START. When 

COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

Move the guide to A5R position, select 3, and press START. When 

COMPLETE is displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

Move the guide to MIN. position, select 4, and press START. When 

COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is completed. 
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 4), repeat the adjustment 
again. 



2) 



3) 



4) 



SIMULATION 53-6 



SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION 

2. POSITION 1 

3. POSITION 2 

4. MIN. POSITION 



T 



Select 1, and 



3S | 



press [[START] key] Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



I 



SIMULATION 53-6 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MAX. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 53-6 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Selec t 3, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 53-6 



SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Selec t 4, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 53-6 



SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MIN. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



AR-M350 ADJUSTMENTS 9-10 



[10] SIMULATIONS 

1. Entering the simulation mode 

Enter the copy mode and perform the following procedures. 

[P] — [*] — [C] — [*] — [Main code] -> [START] -* [Sub code] -> [START] 

2. Switching the simulation mode 

Press [USER SETTING] to return to the code entry screen. 

3. Canceling the simulation mode 

Press CA key to cancel the simulation mode. 

4. Simulation list 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




1 


1 


Used to check the operations of the scanner (reading) unit and 
its control circuit. 


Operation test, check 


Scanner (reading) 


Operation 




2 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the scanner (reading) unit and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Scanner (reading) 


Operation 




2 


1 


Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder 
unit and its control circuit. 


Operation test, check 


DSPF 


Operation 




2 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the automatic document feeder unit and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


DSPF 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the operation under load in the automatic 
document feeder unit and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


DSPF 


Operation 




3 


2 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the finisher and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Finisher 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the operation under load in the finisher and their 
control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Finisher 


Operation 




6 


Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the finisher. 
(Used to adjust the alignment plate (jogger) stop position in the 
finisher paper width direction. The adjustment is made by 
changing the alignment plate home position in the paper width 
direction by software. ) 


Adjustment 


Finisher 


Operation 




10 


Used to adjust the console finisher (AR-FN7). 


Adjustment 


Finisher 


Operation 




20 


Used to check the mail bin stacker (AR-MS1 ) sensor. 


Operation test, check 


Mail bin stacker 


Operation 




21 


Used to check the operations of the mail bin stacker loads. 


Operation test, check 


Mail bin stacker 


Operation 




4 


2 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the paper feed section (desk paper feed/large capacity trays) 
and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Paper feed 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the operation under load in the paper feed 
section (desk paper feed/large capacity trays) and their control 
circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Paper feed 


Operation 




5 


1 


Used to check the operations of the lamps and LCD on the 
operation panel and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Operation 
(display, operation) 


Operation 




2 


Used to check the operations of the heater lamp and its control 
circuit. 


Operation test, check 


Fusing 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the operations of the copy lamp and its control 
circuit. 


Operation test, check 


Scanner (reading) 


Operation 




6 


1 


Used to check the operation under load (clutches and 
solenoids) in the paper transport system and their control 
circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Paper transport 
(paper exit, 
switchback, transport) 


Operation 




2 


Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control 
circuit. 


Operation test, check 


Others 


Operation 




7 


1 


Used to set the aging conditions. 


Setup 




Operation 




6 


Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. 


Setup 




Operation 




8 


Used to set Enable/Disable of warm-up time display. 


Setup 




Operation 





AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-1 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




8 


1 


Used to check and adjust the developing bias voltage in each 
print mode and its control circuit. 


Adjustment, 
operation test, check 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 






2 


Used to check and adjust the main charger grid voltage in each 
print mode and its control circuit. 


Adjustment, 
operation test, check 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 






6 


Used to check and adjust the transfer charger current and its 
control circuit. 


Adjustment, 
operation test, check 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 






17 


Used to set and check the transfer roller output. 


Operation test, check 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Operation 




9 


1 


Used to check the operation under load (clutches and 
solenoids) in the duplex section and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Duplex 


Operation 




2 


Used to check the sensors and detectors in the duplex section 
and their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 


Duplex 


Operation 




10 





Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its control 

circuit. 

(Note) 

Do not execute this simulation with toner in the toner hopper. 

If executed, toner will enter the developing section, causing an 

overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove toner motor from the toner 

hopper before execution. 


Operation test, check 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Operation 




13 





Used to cancel the self diag "U1 " trouble. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Cancel 

(incase of a trouble) 




Trouble 




14 





Used to cancel the self diag "U1/LCC/US/PF" troubles. 


Cancel 

(incase of a trouble) 




Trouble 


Error 


15 





Used to cancel the self diag "U6 (09/20/21/22)" trouble. 


Cancel 

(incase of a trouble) 


Paper feed 


Trouble 




16 





Used to cancel the self diag "U2" trouble. 


Cancel 

(incase of a trouble) 




Trouble 


Error 


17 





Used to cancel the self diag "PF" trouble 
(when copy is inhibited by the host computer). 


Cancel 

(incase of a trouble) 


Communication 
(RIC/MODEM) 


Trouble 


Error 


21 


1 


Used to set the maintenance cycle. 


Setup 




Spec 


Counter 


22 


1 


Used to check the print count in each section and in each 
operation mode. (Used to check the maintenance timing.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 




Counter 




2 


Used to check the number of total misfeed and troubles. 
(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the machine 
must be repaired. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this 
count by the total counter value.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Trouble 




3 


Used to check the misfeed position and the number of misfeed 

at that position. 

(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, the machine 

must be repaired.) 

(Sections other than DSPF sections) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Trouble 


Misfeed 


4 


Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Trouble 




5 


Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). 


Other 




Software 




6 


Used to print the list of adjustments and setup data 
(simulations, FAX soft switches, counters). 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (print) 




Data 


Setup, 

adjustment 

data 


7 


Used to display the key operator code. 

(Used when the customer has forgotten the key operator code.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Data 


User data 


8 


Used to check the number of use of the staple, DSPF, and 
scanner (reading) unit. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Counter 




9 


Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper 
feed section. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Paper feed 


Counter 




10 


Used to check the system configuration 
(option, internal hardware). 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Spec 


Option 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-2 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




22 


11 


Used to check the use frequency of FAX. (send/receive) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


FAX 


Data 




12 


Used to check the misfeed position and the number of misfeed 
at that position. (If the number of misfeed is considerably great, 
the machine must be repaired.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


DSPF 


Trouble 


Misfeed 


13 


Used to display the process cartridge data. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Counter 




19 


Used to display the scanner mode counter. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 




Counter 




24 


1 


Used to clear the misfeed counter, misfeed history, trouble 
counter, and trouble history. (After completion of maintenance, 
these counters must be cleared.) 


Data clear 




Counter 




2 


Used to clear the number of use (print quantity) of each paper 
feed section. 


Data clear 


Paper feed 


Counter 




3 


Used to clear the number of use of the staple, ADF, RADF, SPF, 
DSPF, and the scanner (reading) unit. 


Data clear 




Counter 




4 


Used to reset the maintenance counter. 


Data clear 




Counter 




5 


Used to reset the developer counter. 

(The developer counter of the DV unit installed is reset.) 


Data clear 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Counter 


Developer 
(DV unit) 


6 


Used to reset the copy counter. 


Data clear 




Counter 


Copy 


7 


Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the toner cartridge 
counter. (Perform when the OPC drum is replaced.) 


Data clear 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Counter 


OPC drum 


9 


Used to clear the printer print counter. (After completion of 
maintenance, this counter must be cleared.) 


Data clear 


Printer 


Counter 


Printer 


10 


Used to clear the FAX counter. (After completion of 
maintenance, this counter must be cleared.) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Data clear 


FAX 


Counter 




11 


Used to reset the drum rotation time, toner motor rotation time, 

and developer rotation time counters. 

The developer counter of the DV unit installed is reset. 


Data clear 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Counter 


Developer 
(DV unit) 


15 


Used to clear each counter in the scanner mode. 


Data clear 




Counter 




25 


1 


Used to check the operations of the main drive section 
(excluding the scanner (reading) section) and the toner density 
sensor. (The toner density sensor output can be monitored.) 


Operation test, check 


Drive 


Operation 




2 


Used to initialize the toner density when replacing developer. 
(Auto adjustment) 


Setup 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 






26 


3 


Used to set the specification mode of the auditor. Setup must 
be made according to the use condition of the auditor. 


Setup 


Auditor 


Spec 




5 


Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the 
maintenance counter. 


Setup 




Spec 


Counter 


6 


Used to set the specification according to the destination. 


Setup 




Spec 


Destination 


10 


Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. 


Setup 




Operation 




18 


Used to set Enable/Disable of toner save operation. 
(This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK versions. 
(Depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination) setup). 
For the other destinations, user program P22 allows to make 
the similar setup.) 


Setup 




Spec 


Operation 
mode 
(Common 
operation) 


30 


Used to set the operation mode conforming to the CE mark 

(Europe standards). 

(For flickers when driving the fusing heater lamp.) 


Setup 




Spec 


Operation 
mode 
(Common 
operation) 


35 


Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 22-4 is displayed 
as one-time trouble or continuous troubles when two or more 
number of a same trouble occurred. 


Setup 




Spec 




38 


Used to stop printing when developer life is expired. 


Setup 


Other 


Operation 





AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-3 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




26 


41 


Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio auto 
selection function (AMS) in the pamphlet copy mode. 


Setup 




Spec 


Operation 
mode 
(Common 
operation) 


52 


Used to set Enable/Disable of count-up when white paper is 
discharged. (White paper means the index paper 
(without copying) in the OHP index paper insertion mode, 
the front/rear covers (without copying) in the cover insertion 
mode, and white paper in the duplex exit mode (CA, etc.).) 


Setup 


Paper transport 
(Paper exit, 
switchback, transport) 






27 


1 


Used to set the operation specifications when a communication 
trouble occurs between the host computer and MODEM 
(machine side). (When a communication trouble occurs 
between the host computer and MODEM (machine side), self 
diag display (U7-00) is displayed and setup is made to inhibit or 
allow printing. ) 


Setup 


Communication 
(RIC/MODEM) 


Spec 


Operation 
mode 
(Common 
operation) 


5 


Used to enter the machine tag No. (This function allows to 
check the machine tag No. from the computer.) 


Setup 


Communication 
(RIC/MODEM) 


Data 




30 


1 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the paper feed, paper transport, and paper exit sections and 
their control circuits. 


Operation test, check 




Operation 




2 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in 
the paper feed section and their control circuits. 
(The operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed 
section can be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Operation test, check 


Paper feed 


Operation 




40 


1 


Used to check the operations of the manual paper feed tray 
paper size detectors and their control circuit. 
(The operations of the manual paper feed tray paper size 
detectors can be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Operation test, check 


Paper feed 


Operation 




2 


Used to adjust the detection level of the manual paper feed tray 
paper width detector. 


Adjustment 


Paper feed 


Operation 




7 


Used to enter the adjustment value of the manual paper feed 
tray width detection level. 


Adjustment, setup 


Paper feed 


Operation 




11 


Used to check the width detection level of the multi purpose 
tray paper width detector. 


Operation test, check 


Paper feed 


Operation 




12 


Used to adjust the width detection level of the multi purpose 
tray paper width detector. 


Adjustment, setup 


Paper feed 


Operation 




41 


1 


Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and 
the related circuit. (The operation of the document size sensor 
can be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Operation test, check 


Other 


Operation 




2 


Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor. 


Adjustment 


Other 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and 
the related circuit. (The output level of the document size 
sensor can be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Operation test, check 


Other 


Operation 




43 


1 


Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. 


Setup 


Fusing, paper exit 






44 


1 


Used to set Enable/Disable of each correction operation in the 
image forming (process) section. 


Setup 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Operation 




4 


Used to set the target image (reference) density level in the 
developing bias voltage correction. 


Setup 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Data 




9 


Used to check the result (main charger grid voltage developing 

bias voltage, laser power, etc.) of correction 

(process correction) in the image forming section. 

(By this simulation, the correction operation can be checked.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


Process (OPC drum, 
developing, transfer, 
cleaning) 


Data 


Operation 
data 

(machine 
condition) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-4 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 


Item 


Main 


Sub 


46 


2 


Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode 

(binary, auto, text, text/photo, photo mode). 

An adjustment with this simulation affects all the copy density 

adjustment values. 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


9 


Used to adjust the print density for each density level 
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Text mode). 
A desired print density can be set for each density level 
(display value). 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


10 


Used to adjust the print density for each density level 
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Text/Photo mode). 
A desired print density can be set for each density level 
(display value). 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


11 


Used to adjust the print density for each density level 
(display value) in the copy mode (binary-Photo mode). 
A desired print density can be set for each density level 
(display value). 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




12 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode (all modes). 
An adjustment with this simulation affects all the copy density 
adjustment values. (Only when FAX is installed) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




13 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 
(normal mode). (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




14 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 
(small text mode). (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




15 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode (fine mode). 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




16 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 
(super-fine mode). (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




17 


Used to adjust the CCD/CIS shading reference value. 


Setup, check 




Picture 
quality 




18 


Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in each copy mode. 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


19 


Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in the auto copy mode 
and to set the density detection area, and to set the image 
process mode. 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


20 


Used to adjust the copy density correction in the SPF/DSPF 
copy mode for the document table copy mode. This adjustment 
is made so that the copy density becomes the same as that in 
the document table copy mode. 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Density 


21 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level. 
(1 mode auto adjustment) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 


Density 


22 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make 
individual setup. (Normal mode) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 


Density 


23 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make 
individual setup. (Small text mode) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 


Density 


24 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make 
individual setup. (Fine mode) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 


Density 


25 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to make 
individual setup. (Superfine mode) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display) 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 


Density 


48 


1 


Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio 
(main scan direction, sub scan direction). 


Adjustment 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 




5 


Used to adjust the scan motor speed. 


Adjustment 


Scanner (reading) 


Picture 
quality 





AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-5 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




50 


1 


Used to adjust the document scan position, the image print 
position, and the void area (image loss). (A similar adjustment 
can be made with SIM 50-2 (simple method).) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Picture 
position 


2 


Used to adjust the document scan position, the image print 
position, and the void area (image loss). (This simulation allows 
simple procedure of the similar adjustment to SIM 50-1 .) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 


Picture 
position 


6 


Document scan position adjustment. (DSPF) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




7 


Document scan position adjustment (Simple method) (DSPF) 


Adjustment 




Picture 
quality 




10 


Used to adjust the print image center position. 
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.) 


Adjustment 


Image process (ICU) 


Picture 
quality 


Picture 
position 


12 


Used to adjust the reading image center position. 
(Adjusted for each document mode.) 


Adjustment 


Image process (ICU) 


Picture 
quality 


Picture 
position 


51 


2 


Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on the resist roller 
in each section (machine paper feed, duplex paper feed, SPF 
paper feed). (This adjustment is required when the print image 
position varies or when paper jam occurs frequently.) 


Adjustment 


Paper transport 
(paper exit, 
switchback, transport) 


Operation 




53 


6 


Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level. 


Adjustment 




Operation 




7 


Used to enter the adjustment value of SPF width detection. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


SPF/ADF/RADF/UDH 


Operation 




60 


1 


Used to check the ICU (DRAM) operation (read/write). 
(SIMM memory, Onboard memory) 


Operation test, check 


Image process (ICU) 


Operation 




61 


1 


Used to check the operations of the LSU unit. 


Operation test, check 




Operation 




2 


Used to adjust laser power (absolute value) in the copy mode. 


Adjustment 




Operation 




3 


Used to adjust laser power 

(absolute value) in the FAX reception mode. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment 




Operation 




4 


Used to adjust laser power 
(absolute value) in the printer mode. 


Adjustment 




Operation 




62 


2 


Used to check the hard disk operation (read/write). 
(Only for the model with the hard disk) (Partial check) 


Operation test, check 


Memory 


Operation 




3 


Used to check the hard disk operation (read/write). 
(Only for the model with the hard disk) (All area check) 


Operation test, check 


Memory 


Operation 




63 


1 


Used to check the shading correction result. 
(The shading correction data are displayed.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


Scanner (exposure) 


Operation 




2 


Used to execute shading. 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


Scanner (exposure) 


Operation 




7 


Used to adjust the white plate scan start position in shading 
white correction. 


Adjustment 


Scanner (exposure) 


Operation 




64 


1 


Used to check the operations of the printer section 

(self printing). (The print pattern, paper feed mode, print mode, 

print quantity, density can be changed optionally.) 


Operation test, check 


Printer 


Operation 




65 


1 


Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detecting 
position. 


Adjustment 


Operation 
(display, operation) 






2 


Used to check the result of the touch panel 

(LCD display section) detecting position adjustment. 

(The coordinates are displayed.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


Operation 
(display, operation) 







AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-6 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




66 


1 


Used to set the FAX soft switch function. (Used to utilize the 
FAX soft switch function.) 


Setup 


Fax 






2 


Used to set the FAX soft switch setup to the default. 
(Except for the adjustment values) 


Data clear 


Fax 


Data 




3 


Used to check the operations of FAX PWB memory 
(read/write). (This adjustment is required when replacing the 
PWB with a new one.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Data 




4 


Used to check the operations of data signal output in the FAX 

data output mode. 

(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 

Send level OdB (Max.) (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




5 


Used to check the operations of data signal output in the FAX 
data output mode. 

(Used to check the MODEM operation. )Signals are sent in the 
send level set with the soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




6 


Used to print the confidential password. 

(Used when the confidential password is forgotten.) 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


User data output, check 
(display, print) 


Fax 


Data 




7 


Used to print the image memory data (memory send, receive). 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


User data output, check 
(display, print) 


Fax 


Data 




8 


Used to check the output operation of the FAX sound signals. 
(Sound output IC operation check) Send level OdB (Max.) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




9 


Used to check the output operation of the FAX sound signals. 
(Sound output IC operation check) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




10 


Used to clear all data of image memory 

(memory send, receive). Confidential data are also cleared. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


User data output, check 
(display, print) 


Fax 


Data 




11 


Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS. 

(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 

Send level OdB (Max.) (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




12 


Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 mode 300BPS. 
(Used to check the MODEM operation.) Signals are sent in the 
send level set with the soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




13 


Used to enter (set) the number for the FAX dial signal output 

test. 

(The dial number signal set with this simulation is outputted in 

the dial signal output test with SIM 66-1 4-16) 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Data 




14 


Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (1 OPPS) 

and to test the dial signal output. 

(The dial number signal set with SIM 66-13 is outputted.) 

Used to check dialing troubles and the operation. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 





AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-7 



Code 


Function (Content) 


Purpose 


Section 




Main 


Sub 




66 


15 


Used to set the make time in the FAX pulse dial mode (20PPS) 
and to test the dial signal output. (The dial number signal set 
with SIM 66-13 is outputted.) Used to check dialing troubles 
and the operation. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




16 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) output in the FAX tone dial 
mode. (The dial number signal set with SIM 66-1 3 is outputted.) 
The send level can be set to an optional level. 
Dialing troubles and operation. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




17 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) output in the Fax tone dial 
mode. Send level Odb (Max.). Used to check the operation. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




18 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) in the FAX tone dial mode. 
The send level set with the soft switch is outputted. Used to 
check the operation. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




19 


Used to backup the FAX SRAM data into the flash 
Memory(Option FAX memory:AR-MM9) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




20 


Used to restore the backup data (SIM 66-1 9) to SRAM. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




21 


Used to print the FAX information (registrations, communication 
management, file management, system errors). 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Adjustment, setup, 
operation data output, 
check (display, print) 


Fax 


Data 




22 


Used to adjust the handset sound volume. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




23 


Used to download the FAX program. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






24 


Used clear the FAST memory data. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






25 


Used to register the FAX number for MODEM dial-in. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






26 


Used to register the external telephone number for MODEM 
dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






27 


Used to register the voice-warp transfer number. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






28 


Used to record a sound message. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Inhibited 


Fax 






29 


Used to clear the telephone directory. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




30 


Used to check TEL/LIU status change. 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




31 


Used to set the TEL/LIU status. 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




32 


Used to check received data. 


Inhibited 


Fax 






33 


Used to check signal detection. 


Inhibited 


Fax 






34 


Used to measure and display the communication time. 


Setup 


Fax 


Operation 




35 


Modem program rewriting. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




36 


Used to check interface between MFPC and MDMC. 
Check is made in the data line or the command line. 


Operation test, check 


Fax 


Operation 




67 


2 


Used to check the parallel l/F operation of the printer. 

(This simulation is made only in the production site and not in 

the market. It requires a special tool.) 


Inhibited 


Printer 




Interface, 
communi- 
cation 


11 


Used to set Enable/Disable of the parallel l/F select signal of 
the printer. 


Adjustment 


Printer 


Operation 


Interface, 
communi- 
cation 


16 


Used to check the operation of the network card. 


Operation test, check 


Printer 


Operation 


Interface, 
communi- 
cation 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-8 



5. Details of simulations 



Main code 1 



1-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the scanner 
(reading) unit and its control circuit. 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



Main code 2 



2-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the automatic 
document feeder unit and its control circuit. 


Section 


DSPF 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 1-1 



SCANNER CHECK. 

1. HIGHSPEED 

2. MIDDLE SPEED 

3. LOW SPEED 

4. TOP SPEED 



SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 
Stops when scan is completed. 



SIMULATION 1-1 
SCANNER CHECK. 

1. HIGHSPEED 

2. MIDDLE SPEED 

3. LOW SPEED 

4. TOP SPEED 



EXECUTING.. 



<List of set values> 



1-2 



SIMULATION 2-1 

SPF AGING TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. HIGHSPEED 

2. LOW SPEED 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] to stop. 



SIMULATION 2-1 



SPF AGING TEST. EXECUTING.. 

1. HIGHSPEED 

2. LOW SPEED 



<List of set values> 



High speed operation 



Low speed operation 



1 


High speed operation 


168mm / sec 


2 


Middle speed operation 


110mm / sec 


3 


Low speed operation 


55mm /sec 


4 


Top speed operation 


220mm / sec 



2-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the scanner (reading) unit and their 
control circuits. 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The sensor display is highlighted when it is 
detected. 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the automatic document feeder unit 
and their control circuits. 


Section 


DSPF 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The sensor display is highlighted when it is 
detected. 



SIMULATION 1-2 



SCANNER SENSOR CHECK.. 



SIMULATION 2-2 
SPF SENSOR CHECK. 
hfcai kM«M 

SPSD SPOD 
SWD4 SWD3 
SLD2 SLD1 
SWD LEN:jaii]il 


ESBffl 

SWD2 


SDD 
SWD5 
SWD1 
STSET 
E8I8I 


SWD_AD 



<List of display values> 



<List of display valuo 



MHPS 



Optical system home position 



SSET 


SPF sensor 


SOCD 


Open sensor 


SCOV 


Paper feed cover sensor 


SDD 


Document set sensor 


SPSD 


Document resist front sensor 


SPCD 


Document exit sensor 


SWDn 


Document width sensor (n^ 1 (Inside) ~6(Outside)) 


SLDn 


Document length sensor (n -» 1 (Inside) ~2(Outside)) 


OSSET 


OS installation sensor 


STSET 


Stamp unit installation sensor 


SWD LEN 


SPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1 mm) 


SWD_AD 


SPF document width detection volume output AD value 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-9 



2-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation under load in the 
automatic document feeder unit and their control 
circuits. 


Section 


DSPF 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad. 



Main code 3 



3-2 



Purpose 



Operation test, check 



Function (Content) Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the finisher and their control circuits. 
Section Finisher 

Item Operation 

Operation/Procedure The display is highlighted when detected. 



SIMULATION 2-3 

SPF LOAD TEST. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START. 

LMOTOR(H) 2. MOTOR(L) 

3. SDSS 4. SPFS 5. SPFC 6. SPSC 7. STMPS 



I 



Finisher (AR-FN6) 



Press | [START] key| to get started. 
^ 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] ke>| to stop. 



SIMULATION 2-3 



SPF LOAD TEST. EXECUTING... 

LMOTOR(H) 2. MOTOR(L) 

3. SDSS 4. SPFS 5. SPFC 6. SPSC 



SIMULATION 3-2 






FINISHER SENSOR CHECK. 




PID 


SCID 


SCID2 


PPD 


SCPD 


POD 


T1PF 


T2UP 


T2DN 


T2PD 


STSP 


STLS 


STNC 


STHP 


JFHP 


JRHP 


PSHP 


STUHP 


XXXX 


STTHP1 


STTHP2 


DOPD 


DSW1 


DSW2 


24VM 


MMLK 







cList of set values> 



1 



Motor high speed rotation 



J> Motor low speed rotation 

J3 Document stopper solenoid 

4 Document feed solenoid 



Document feed clutch 



6 Document resist clutch 



Stamp solenoid 



Console f 


nisher (AR-FN7) 




SIMULATION 3-2 






FINISHER SENSOR CHECK. 




FSSS 


FJS 


FFDSW 


FTCS FFDS 


FSPS 


FSUC 


FSS 


FSTHPS FSHPS FLE FLLLS 


FULS 


FFE 


FFES 


FFRHPS FFHPS FFPS FSLS 


FBES 


FOBHPS 


FAS 


FRJHPS FFJHPS FARHPS FPHPS 


FES 








(FPE) 


(FPSHPS) 


(FPUC) 


(FPDS) (FPDSS4) (FPDSS3) (FPDSS2) 


(FPDSS1) 


(FPTS) 


Devices in ( ) 


are added when the punch unit is installed. 



<List of display values> 



Finisher 


Console finisher 


STHP 


Stapler HP detection 


FSSS 


Stapler safety switch 


POD 


Tray 2 paper exit detection 


FJS 


Joint switch 


SCID 


Staple compiler paper entry 
detection 


FFDSW 


Front door switch 


PID 


Paper entry detection 


FTCS 


Upper cover sensor 


T2PD 


Tray 2 paper empty detection 


FFDS 


Front door sensor 


T2DN 


Tray 2 lower limit detection 


FSPS 


Self prime sensor 


T2UP 


Tray 2 upper limit detection 


FSUC 


Stapler connection detection 


JRHP 


Jogger R HP 


FSS 


Staple sensor 


JFHP 


Jogger (F) HP 


FSTHPS 


Stapler HP sensor 


SCID2 


Staple compiler paper entry 
detection 2 


FSHPS 


Slide HP sensor 


STTHP2 


Staple rotation HP detection 2 


FLE 


Lift lock sensor 


STTHP1 


Staple rotation HP detection 1 


FLLLS 


Lift lower limit sensor 


STUHP 


Staple shift HP detection 


FULS 


Lift upper limit sensor 


PSHP 


Pusher HP detection 


FFE 


Bookbinding clock sensor 


PPD 


Paper hold return detection 


FFES 


Bookbinding paper sensor 


DSW2 


Staple replacement door open 
detection 


FFRHPS 


Bookbinding roller HP sensor 


DSW1 


Compiler jam cancel door open 
detection 


FFHPS 


Bookbinding HP sensor 


24VM 


24V power supply 


FFPS 


Bookbinding position sensor 


T1PF 


Tray 1 full detection 


FSLS 


Paper surface sensor 


STSP 


Stapling ready detection 


FBES 


Tray paper sensor 


STLS 


Cartridge inside spare staple 
empty detection 


FOBHPS 


Paper exit belt HP sensor 


STNC 


Cartridge empty detection 


FAS 


Alignment tray sensor 


DOPD 


Interface unit door open 
detection 


FRJHPS 


Alignment HP sensor R 


MMLK 


Main drive motor lock detection 


FFJHPS 


Alignment HP sensor F 


SCPD 


Staple compiler paper empty 
detection 


FARHPS 


Bundle roller HP sensor 






FPHPS 


Paddle HP sensor 






FES 


Entry port sensor 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-10 



•The following units 
console finisher: 



are added when the punch unit is installed to the 



FPE 


Punch motor encoder 


FPSHPS 


Punch side register HP 


FPUC 


Punch connection detection 


FPDS 


Punch dust sensor 


FPDSS4 


Punch side register sensor 4 


FPDSS3 


Punch side register sensor 3 


FPDSS2 


Punch side register sensor 2 


FPDSS1 


Punch side register sensor 1 


FPTS 


Punch timing sensor 



3-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation under load in the 
finisher and their control circuits. 


Section 


Finisher 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The display is highlighted when detected. 



SIMULATION 3-3 

FINISHER LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- , AND PRESS START. 



I 



Press |[START]key| to get started. 
^ 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 3-3 



FINISHER LOAD TEST. EXECUTING... 



<List of display values> 



Finisher 


Console finisher 


1 


T2S 


Tray 2 solenoid 


1 


FFC 


Folding clutch 


2 


T20M 


Paper exit motor 


2 


FPSM 


Puncher side register 
motor 


3 


SPS 


Stopper solenoid 


3 


FPNM 


Punch motor 


4 


SCRS 


Roller pressure 
release solenoid 


4 


FLM 


Shift motor 


5 


PPS 


Rear edge h folding 
solenoid 


5 


FFSM 


Stapler motor 


6 


SCGS 


Compiler gate 
solenoid 


6 


FSM 


Slide motor 


7 


STTM 


Staple rotation motor 


7 


FRJM 


Alignment motor R 


8 


STUM 


Stapler shift motor 


8 


FFJM 


Alignment motor F 


9 


MM 


Main drive motor 


9 


FAM 


Bundle exit motor 


10 


EVM 


Elevator motor 


10 


FPM 


Paddle motor 


11 


STM 


Staple motor 


11 


FFM 


Transport motor 


12 


JRM 


Jogger motor rear 








13 


JFM 


Jogger motor front 








14 


PSM 


Pusher motor 









3-6 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the stacking capacity of the 
finisher (AR-FN6). (Used to adjust the alignment 
plate (jogger) stop position in the finisher paper 
width direction. The adjustment is made by 
changing the alignment plate home position in 
the paper width direction by software. ) 


Section 


Finisher 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Enter the adjustment value with 10 digit key pad 
and press START key. The jogger moves to LT 
position (Inch series) or A4 position (AB series) 
according to the entered value, and stops there. 



SIMULATION 3-6 



FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 40-60, AND PRESS START 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



,1, Stops when the operation 

T i 


is terminated. 


SIMULATION 3-6 




FINISHER JOGGER ADJUSTMENT. MOVING... 




I 


ss 



(Stored on PCU PWB) 



3-10 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the console finisher (AR-FN7). 


Section 


Finisher 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Setting of the console finisher is performed. 



SIMULATION 3-10 




CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START. 


1. SADDLE POSITION 


2. FOLDING POSITION 


3. FRONT ADJUST 




4. REAR ADJUST 


5. STAPLE REAR 


6. STAPLE FRONT 


7. STAPLE BOTH 


8. STAPLE PITCH 
10. PUNCH HOLE 


9. PUNCH CENTER 



n 



Press | [START] key| to get started. 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 3-10 



CONSOLE FINISHER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 
1. FOLDING POSITION 



<List of set values> 





Adjustment content 


Range 


Initial 
value 


1STEP 


1 


Saddle binding position adjustment 


0-400 


200 


0.0707mm 


2 


Saddle folding position adjustment 


0-400 


200 


0.0525mm 


3 


Front alignment position adjustment 


0-20 


10 


0.367mm 


4 


Rear alignment position adjustment 


0-20 


10 


0.367mm 


5 


Staple rear one-position binding position adjustment 


0-200 


100 


0.04374mm 


6 


Staple front one-position binding position adjustment 


0-200 


100 


0.04374mm 


7 


Staple 2-position binding center adjustment 


0-200 


100 


0.04374mm 


8 


Staple 2-position binding pitch adjustment 


0-99 


50 


0.04374mm 


9 


Punch center adjustment (Slide direction) 


47-53 


50 


1mm 


10 


Punch hole position adjustment (Paper feed direction) 


0-99 


50 


0.105mm 



(Values stored in EEPROM) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-11 



3-20 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the mail bin stacker (AR-MS1 ) 
sensor. 


Section 


Mail bin stacker 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The display is highlighted when detected. 



SIMULATION 3-20 




MAIL BOX SENSOR CHECK. 




llUiill MPFD2 MPFD3 MPFD4 MPFD5 MPFD6 


MPFD7 


MPFD8 MPID MPPD1 MPPD2 MPPD3 MPPD4 


MPPD5 


M24VM MDD1 MDOPD 





<List of display values> 






MPFD1 


Tray 1 paper full detection 


MPPD1 


Paper transport sensor 1 


MPFD2 


Tray 2 paper full detection 


MPPD2 


Paper transport sensor 2 


MPFD3 


Tray 3 paper full detection 


MPPD3 


Paper transport sensor 3 


MPFD4 


Tray 4 paper full detection 


MPPD4 


Paper transport sensor 4 


MPFD5 


Tray 5 paper full detection 


MPPD5 


Paper transport sensor 5 


MPFD6 


Tray 6 paper full detection 


M24VM 


24V power supply 


MPFD7 


Tray 7 paper full detection 


MDD1 


Jam cancel door 


MPFD8 


Tray 8 paper full detection 


MDOPD 


Interface unit door 


MPID 


Interface unit paper entry 
detection 







3-21 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the mail bin 
stacker loads. 


Section 


Mail bin stacker 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 3-21 

MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- 

1.MM 

2.GSOL1 

3.GSOL2 

4.GSOL3 

5.GSOL4 

6.GSOL5 

7.GSOL6 

8.GSOL7 



AND PRESS START. 



i 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 
^ 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 3-21 



MAIL BOX LOAD TEST. EXECUTING.. 

1.MM 

2.GSOL1 

3.GSOL2 

4.GSOL3 

5.GSOL4 

6.GSOL5 

7.GSOL6 

8.GSOL7 



<List of set values> 



1 


Main motor 


2 


Gate solenoid 1 


3 


Gate solenoid 2 


4 


Gate solenoid 3 


5 


Gate solenoid 4 


6 


Gate solenoid 5 


7 


Gate solenoid 6 


8 


Gate solenoid 7 



Main code 4 



4-2 



Purpose 



Operation test, check 



Function (Content) Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the paper feed section (desk paper 
feed/large capacity trays) and their control 
circuits. 



Section 



Paper feed 



Item 



Operation 



Operation/Procedure The display is highlighted when detected. 



(3-tray desk) 



SIMULATION 4-2 






DESK SENSOR CHECK 






DDRS 


DPFD1 


DPFD2 


DPFD3 


MCLUD 


DLUD1 


DLUD2 


MCSPD 


DSPD1 


DSPD2 


MCPED 


DPED1 


DPED2 


MCSS1 


MCSS2 


MCSS3 


MCSS4 


DCSS11 


DCSS12 


DCSS13 


DCSS14 


xxxxxx 


DCSS21 


DCSS22 


DCSS23 


DCSS24 


XXXXXX 





(LCC) 



SIMULATION 4-2 






LCC SENSOR CHECK. 






TDRS 


TTSD 


TPFD1 


TPFD2 


TPFD3 


MCLUD 


TLUD1 


TLUD2 


MCSPD 


TSPD1 


TSPD2 


MCPED 


TPED1 


TPED2 


MCSS1 


MCSS2 


MCSS3 


MCSS4 







<List of display values> 



3-tray desk 


LCC 


DDRS 


Desk door sensor 


TDRS 


Tandem side door sensor 


DSPD2 


Desk cassette 2 
remaining paper quantity 
sensor 


TTSD 


Tandem tray sensor 


DSPD1 


Desk cassette 1 
remaining paper quantity 
sensor 


TLUD2 


Tandem tray 2 
upper limit sensor 


DCSS24 


Desk cassette 2 

paper rear edge sensor 4 


TLUD1 


Tandem tray 1 
upper limit sensor 


DCSS23 


Desk cassette 2 

paper rear edge sensor 3 


TSPD2 


Tandem tray 2 
remaining quantity sensor 


DCSS22 


Desk cassette 2 

paper rear edge sensor 2 


TSPD1 


Tandem tray 1 
remaining quantity sensor 


DCSS21 


Desk cassette 2 

paper rear edge sensor 1 


TPED2 


Tandem tray 2 
paper sensor 


DLUD2 


Desk cassette 2 
upper limit sensor 


TPED1 


Tandem tray 1 
paper sensors 


DPED2 


Desk cassette 2 
paper sensor 


TPFD3 


Tandem paper transport 
sensor 3 


DPFD3 


Desk paper transport 
sensor 3 


TPFD2 


Tandem paper transport 
sensor 2 


DCSS14 


Desk cassette 1 

paper rear edge sensor 4 


MCSS4 


MP tray size detection 4 


DCSS13 


Desk cassette 1 

paper rear edge sensor 3 


MCSS3 


MP tray size detection 3 


DCSS12 


Desk cassette 1 

paper rear edge sensor 2 


MCSS2 


MP tray size detection 23 


DCSS1 1 


Desk cassette 1 

paper rear edge sensor 1 


MCSS1 


MP tray size detection 1 


DLUD1 


Desk cassette 1 
upper limit sensor 


MCSPD 


MP tray remaining quantity 
detection 


DPED1 


Desk cassette 1 
paper sensor 


MCLUD 


MP tray upper limit 
detection 


DPFD2 


Desk paper transport 
sensor 2 


MCPED 


MP tray paper empty 
detection 


MCSS4 


MP tray size detection 4 


TPFD1 


MP tray transport detection 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-12 



3-tray desk 


LCC 


MCSS3 


MP tray size detection 3 






MCSS2 


MP tray size detection 2 






MCSS1 


MP tray size detection 1 






MCSPD 


MP tray remaining quantity 
detection 






MCLUD 


MP tray upper limit 
detection 






MCPED 


MP tray paper empty 
detection 






DPFD1 


MP tray transport detection 







Main code 5 



5-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the lamps and 
LCD on the operation panel and their control 
circuits. 


Section 


Operation (display, operation) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


All LEDs are ON. The LCD contrast changes 
Max/Min every 2sec. 



4-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation under load in the 
paper feed section (desk paper feed/large 
capacity trays) and their control circuits. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 4-3 

DESK/LCC LOAD TEST. SELECT 1- 

1. 

2. 



AND PRESS START. 



i 



Press | [START] key| to get started. 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 4-3 



DESK/LCC LOAD TEST. EXECUTING.. 

1. 

2. 



<List of set values> 



3-tray desk 


LCC 


1 


DLUM2 


Desk lift-up motor 2 


1 


TLUM2 


LCC lift-up motor 2 


2 


DLUM1 


Desk lift-up motor 1 


2 


TLUM1 


LCC lift-up motor 1 


3 


MCLUM 


Desk multi lift-up 
motor 


3 


MCLUM 


LCC multi lift-up 
motor 


4 


DPFCL 


Desk paper transport 
clutch 


4 


TPFCL 


LCC transport clutch 


5 


DPCL2 


Desk paper feed 
clutch 2 


5 


TPCL2 


LCC paper feed 
clutch 2 


6 


DPCL1 


Desk paper feed 
clutch 1 


6 


TPCL1 


LCC paper feed 
clutch 1 


7 


MCPCL 


Desk multi paper feed 
clutch 


7 


MCPCL 


LCC multi paper feed 
clutch 


8 


DMM 


Desk transport motor 


8 


TMM 


LCC transport motor 




5-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the heater lamp 
and its control circuit. 


Section 


Fusing 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. The lamp repeat 
ON/OFF every 500ms 5 times. 



SIMULATION 5-2 



HEATER LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1.HL1(LOWER) 

2.HL2(UPPER) 



Press | [START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 
Repeats specified times and stops. 



SIMULATION 5-2 



HEATER LAMP TEST. EXECUTING.. 

1.HL1(LOWER) 

2.HL2(UPPER) 



<List of set values> 



1 Heater lamp 1 (Lower) 

2 Heater lamp 2 (Upper) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-13 



5-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the copy lamp 
and its control circuit. 


Section 


Scanner (reading), DSPF (reading) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The copy lamp or CIS is lighted for 10sec and 
turned off. 



Main code 6 



6-1 



CIS is displayed only when DSPF is installed. 



SIMULATION 5-3 



COPY LAMP TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. COPY LAMP 

2.CIS 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation under load 
(clutches and solenoids) in the paper transport 
system and their control circuits. 


Section 


Paper transport (paper exit, switchback, 
transport) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad. 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 
Stops after 1 0sec. 



SIMULATION 5-3 



COPY LAMP TEST. EXECUTING.. 

1. COPY LAMP 

2.CIS 



SIMULATION 6-1 






FEED OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-17 


, AND PRESS START. 






2.HLPR 3.DCPR 


4. MM 5.DM 6.DSB 


FW 


7.DSB RV 


8.CPFC 9.RRC 


10.TRC 11.FGS FIN 




12.LUM 
15.MCM 


13.TRC_DSK 
16.MCPCL 17.MCFCL 


14.PSPS ^^E1 
18.MCLUM WfX 




19.MPFS 


20.MPFC 21.MSS 







Press |[START] key| to get started. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] to stop. 



Or stops after repeating 
"y the specified number of times. 


SIMULATION 6-1 


FEED OUTPUT CHECK. EXECUTING... 




2.HLPR 3.DCPR 4. MM 5. DM 6.DSB FW 


7.DSB RV 


8.CPFC 9.RRC 10.TRC 11.FGS FIN 


12.LUM 
15.MCM 


13.TRC_DSK 14.PSPS ^B\ 
16.MCPCL 17.MCFCL 18.MCLUM WlA 


19.MPFS 


20.MPFC 21.MSS 



<List of set values> 







2 


HLPR (Heater power relay) 


3 


DCPR (DC power relay) 


4 


MM (Main motor) 


5 


DM (Drum motor) 


6 


DSB_FW (Stepping motor forward rotation) 


7 


DSB_RV (Stepping motor reverse rotation) 


8 


CPFC (Paper feed clutch) 


9 


RRC (Resist roller clutch) 


10 


TRC (Transport roller clutch) 


11 


FGS_FIN (Finisher gate solenoid) 


12 


LUM (Tray 1 lift-up motor) 


13 


TRC_DSK (Desk clutch sync signal) 


14 


PSPS (Separation pawl solenoid) 


15*1 


MCM(MP drive motor control signal) 


16*1 


MCPCL(MP tray paper feed clutch signal) 


17*1 


MCFCL(MP tray transport clutch signal) 


18*1 


MCLUM(MP tray lift-up motor signal) 


19*2 


MPFS (Manual paper feed solenoid signal) 


20*2 


MPFC (Manual paper feed clutch signal) 


21*2 


MSS (Manual paper feed gate solenoid) 



*1 Displayed when OPTION of multi-purpose only. 
*2 Displayed when manual feed OPTION is added. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-14 



6-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of each fan motor 
and its control circuit. 


Section 


Others 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 6-2 

FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. FMHi 

2. FMLo 



1 



Press |[START] key| to get started. 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] kejj to stop. 



SIMULATION 6-2 

FAN MOTOR CHECK. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. FMHi 

2. FMLo 



<List of set values> 



1 Fan motor high speed 

2 Fan motor low speed 



Main code 7 



7-1 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the aging conditions. 


Section 




Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 7-1 

AGING TEST SETTING. SELECT 0-36, AND PRESS START. 

0. NO MISS FEED DETECTION 

1. AGING 

AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION. 

AGING/NO MISS FEED DETECTION/ 

NO WARM UP/NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL. 

NO WARM UP. 

AGING/INTERVAL. 

AGING/INTERVAL/NO MISS FEED DETECTION. 
+10 : NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK. 
+20: NO SHADING. 
+30 : NO PROCESS UNIT CHECK/NO SHADING. 



Press |[START] key| to register. 

The operation mode is kept until the power is turned off or setting is made again. 

<List of set values> 






No jam detection 


1 


Aging mode 


2 


Aging mode without jam detection 


3 


Aging mode without jam/without warm-up/without fusing 
temperature control 


4 


Without warm-up 


5 


Intermittent aging mode 


6 


Intermittent aging mode without jam detection 


Above +1 


No process unit (including developing unit) detection 


Above +20 


No shading 


Above +30 


No process unit detection/No shading 



7-6 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. 


Section 




Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. Used to set the 
intermittent aging cycle of Sim 7-1 . 



SIMULATION 7-6 

INTERVAL AGING CYCLE SETUP. INPUT TIME AND PRESS START. 

(1-999, UNIT: sec) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-15 



7-8 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set Enable/Disable of warm-up time 
display. 


Section 




Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The warm-up time is displayed in the unit of 
second. 



SIMULATION 7-8 

WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



I 



Press |[START] key| to start measuring. Pres s] [CUSTOM SETTING] key, to stop 
f I 



SIMULATION 7-8 

WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARMING UP.PLEASE WAIT. 

(UNIT:sec) Btf|] 



Warm-up ends. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] ke 



SIMULATION 7-8 

WARM UP TIME DISPLAY. WARM UP COMPLETED. 

(UNIT:sec) Mt[l] 



Main code 8 



8-1 



Purpose 



Adjustment 



Function (Content) Used to check and adjust the developing bias 

voltage in each print mode and its control circuit. 

Section Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 



Item 



Operation/Procedure Enter the output value to be adjusted with 

the 10 digit key pad. The current set value is 
highlighted at the right of each item. 
After entering the value with the 10-digit key 
pad press the START key. The output is made 
for 30 sec at the set value. 

Then the output is stopped. 



SIMULATION 8-1 

DV BIAS SETTING. SELECT 1-7, AND PRESS START. 

1.AUTO Kilil 2.CHARACTER Kill! 

3.MIX ESI 34.PHOTO ESI 

5.PRINTER ESI fi.FAX ■iWll 7. PI US Eilil 



I 



Press | [START] keyj 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key, . 



SIMULATION 8-1 

DV BIAS SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

1 : AUTO (0-745) 



BSE 



I 



Press |[START] keyj 
^ 



Press j [CUSTOM SETTING] kej| . 

I Or after 30sec output 



SIMULATION 8-1 

DV BIAS SETTING. EXECUTING.. 

1 : AUTO 



EH 



<List of set values> 







Default 


Set range 


1 


Auto mode 


485 


0-745 


2 


Text mode 


3 


Text/Photo mode 


4 


Photo mode 


5 


Printer mode 


6 


Fax mode 


7 


Reverse developing bias voltage 


150 


0-255 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 1 0-1 6 



8-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to check and adjust the main charger grid 
voltage in each print mode and its control circuit. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Enter the output value to be adjusted with 

10 digit key pad. The current set value is 

highlighted at the right of each item. 

After entering the value with 10 digit key pad, 

press START key. 

The output is made for 30sec at the set value. 

Then the output is stopped. 



SIMULATION 8-2 

MAIN GRID SETTING. SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS START. 

1.AUTO IrflM ?. CHARACTFR 

3. MIX ESI 4. PHOTO fcMlM 

5. PRINTER Brfllll 6. FAX EBIiM 



Press |[START] keyj 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key, . 



SIMULATION 8-2 

MAIN GRID SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

1 . AUTO (200-900) BSflll] 



Press |[START] keyj 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key, . 

I Or after 30sec output 



SIMULATION 8-2 

MAIN GRID SETTING. EXECUTING... 

1 : AUTO 



<List of set values> 







Default 


Set range 


1 


Auto mode 


645 


200 ~ 900 


2 


Text mode 


3 


Text/Photo mode 


4 


Photo mode 


5 


Printer mode 


6 


Fax mode 



8-6 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to check and adjust the transfer charger 
current and its control circuit. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Enter the output value to be adjusted with 

10 digit key pad. The current set value is 

highlighted at the right of each item. 

After entering the value with 10 digit key pad, 

press START key. 

The output is made for 30sec at the set value. 

Then the output is stopped. 



SIMULATION 8-6 



THV+SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. FRONT BE! 

2. BACK lilil 



Press |[START] keyj 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key] . 



SIMULATION 8-6 



THV+SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. ™— — 

1. FRONT(0-620) 



I 



Press |[START] keyj 



SIMULATION 8-6 



Press j [CUSTOM SETTING] key] . 

I Or after 30sec output 



THV+SETTING. EXECUTING.. 
1. FRONT 



<List of set values> 









Default 


Set range 


1 


Cassette/manual paper feed 


45PPM 


267 


0-620 


35PPM 


220 


2 


Paper feed from ADU 


45PPM 


310 


35PPM 


267 



8-17 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to set and check the transfer roller output. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Enter the output value to be adjusted with 

10 digit key pad. The current set value is 

highlighted at the right of each item. 

After entering the value with 1 digit key pad, 

press START key. 

The output is made for 30sec at the set value. 

Then the output is stopped. 



SIMULATION 8-17 

TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1 . SHV FRONT ESI 

2. SHV BACK ■aaii 

3. THV- E3 



Press |[START] keyj 



Press j [CUSTOM SETTING] key, . 



SIMULATION 8-17 

TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START 

1. FRONT (0-375) 



Press |[START] keyj 



Press j [CUSTOM SETTING] key, . 

I Or after 30sec output 



SIMULATION 8-17 

TRANSFER ROLLER SETTING. EXECUTING... 

1 . FRONT (0-375) 



<List of set values> 







Default 


Set range 


1 


SHV front surface 


160(45PPM) 
120(35PPM) 


0-375 


2 


SHV back surface 


3 


THV-output 


780 


0-1250 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-17 



Main code 9 



Main code 10 



9-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation under load 
(clutches and solenoids) in the duplex section 
and their control circuits. 


Section 


Duplex 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad. 



Purpose Operation test, check 

Function (Content) Used to check the operation of the toner motor 
and its control circuit. 



Section 



Process 

(OPC drum/developing/transfer/cleaning)/ 

Developing toner 



Item Operation 

Operation/Procedure Select with 1 digit key pad. The toner motor 
rotates for 1 0sec. 



SIMULATION 9-1 

ADU OUTPUT CHECK. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1. ADMEN1 

2. ADMEN2 

3. DGS 



Note: Never execute this simulation with toner in the toner hopper. 

If executed, excessive toner will enter the developing section, 
causing an overtoner trouble. Be sure to remove the toner motor 
from the toner hopper before execution. 



Press | [START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 9-1 

ADU OUTPUT CHECK EXECUTING.. 

1. ADMEN1 

2. ADMEN2 

3. DGS 



SIMULATION 10 

TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



Press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 
Or after 1 0sec execution 



<List of set values> 



1 


ADMEN1(ADU motor 1 control signal) 


2 


ADMEN2(ADU motor 2 control signal) 


3 


DGS(ADU gate solenoid) 



SIMULATION 10 

TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION. EXECUTING... 



<List of set values> 



9-2 



1 



Toner motor rotation start 



2 Cancel (The display returns to the main code entry menu.) 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the sensors and detectors in the 
duplex section and their control circuits. 


Section 


Duplex 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The display is highlighted when detected. 



Main code 13 



SIMULATION 9-2 



ADU SENSOR CHECK. 

fJrilkHJ ItMWMll AINPD APOD APPD1 APPD2 



Purpose Cancel (incase of a trouble) 

Function (Content) Used to cancel the self diag "U1 " trouble. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 
Section 



Item 



Trouble 



Operation/Procedure Select with 1 digit key pad. 



<List of display values> 



ADUSET 



ADU installation detection 



DSW D 



AINPD 



ADU cabinet open detection 
ADU paper entry detection 



APOD ADU paper exit detection 

APPD1 ADU paper detection 1 

APPD2 ADU paper detection 2 



SIMULATION 13 

U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



1 After canceling U1 trouble, the display returns to the main code 
entry menu. 



2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 1 0-1 8 



Main code 14 




Purpose 


Cancel (in case of a trouble) 


Function (Content) 


Used to cancel the self diag U1/LCC/US/PF 
troubles. 


Section 




Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad 



Main code 17 




Purpose 


Cancel (incase of a trouble) 


Function (Content) 


Used to cancel the self diag "PF" trouble 
(when copy is inhibited by the host computer). 


Section 


Communication (RIC/MODEM) 


Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 14 




TROUBLE CANCELLATION. (OTHERS) 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 


m\ 


2. NO 





<List of set values> 



1 After canceling a trouble other than U1 , U2, PF, and LCC, 
the display returns to the main code entry menu. 



Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



SIMULATION 17 

PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



1 After canceling PF trouble, the display returns to the main code 
entry menu. 



2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



Main code 15 




Purpose 


Cancel (incase of a trouble) 


Function (Content) 


Used to cancel the self diag "U6 (09/20/21/22)" 
trouble. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



SIMULATION 15 

LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



1 After canceling LCC trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



Main code 16 




Purpose 


Cancel (incase of a trouble) 


Function (Content) 


Used to cancel the self diag "U2" trouble. 


Section 




Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad. 



Main code 21 



21-1 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the maintenance cycle. 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


Used to set the maintenance cycle in an SRU 
machine. 



SIMULATION 21-1 

MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP. SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START 

0. DEFAULT 1. 40K 2. 50K 3. 80K 

4. 100K 5. 120K 6.FREE 



<List of set values> 



Maintenance display at the cycle of each control spec. 



1 



Maintenance display at 40K 



_2 Maintenance display at 50K 

_3 Maintenance display at 80K 

4 Maintenance display at 100K 



Maintenance display at 120K 



No maintenance display 



SIMULATION 16 

U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



1 After canceling U2 trouble, the display returns to the main code 
entry menu. 



2 Without canceling a trouble, the display returns to the main 
code entry menu. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-19 



Main code 22 



22-1 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the print count in each section 

and in each operation mode. 

(Used to check the maintenance timing.) 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Data of each counter are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-1 








COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. 






TOTAL : ******** 


DRUM 


........ 


TONER : 


DEVE : 


MAINTENANCE : 




TOTAL OUTPUT : 


........ 


COPIES : ******** 


PRINTER: 


FAX OUTPUT : 


........ 


RIGHT SIDE : * — 


*** 


OTHERS : 


........ 



<List of display values> 



TOTAL 


Total counter 


DRUM 


Drum cartridge counter 


TONER 


Toner cartridge counter 


DEVE 


Developer cartridge counter 


MAINTENANCE 


Maintenance counter 


TOTAL OUTPUT 


Total output quantity 


COPIES 


Copy effective paper counter 


PRINTER 


Printer counter 


FAX 


Fax print counter 


RIIGHTSIDE 
OUTPUT 


Right side paper exit counter 


OTHERS 


Other print counter (List print, etc.) 



22-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the number of total misfeed and 
troubles. (If the number of misfeed is 
considerably great, the machine must be 
repaired. The misfeed rate is obtained by 
dividing this count by the total counter value.) 


Section 




Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


The numbers of times of paper jam, SPF jam, 
and troubles are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-2 

JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. 
PAPER JAM : ******** SPF JAM : — 

TROUBLE : ******** 



<List of display values> 



PAPER JAM Number of times of paper jam 
SPF JAM Number of times of SPF jam ~ 



TROUBLE 



Number of times of troubles 



22-3 



Purpose 



Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 



Function (Content) Used to check the misfeed position and the 
number of misfeed at that position. 
(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, 
the machine must be repaired.) 

(Sections other than DSPF sections) 



Section 



Item 



Trouble 



Operation/Procedure The history of the latest 50 paper jams is 
displayed. (Refer to the jam codes below.) 



SIMULATION 22-3 
PAPER JAM HISTORY. 



(10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters) 



<Jam codes> 



Code 



AINPDN 



AINPDS 



APODN 



APODS 



Description 



TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed jam (MPFD not-reaching) 

MPFDND1 MPFD not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) 

MPFDND2 MPFD not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 

MPFDNTD MPFD not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed paper) 

MPFDST2 MPFD remaining jam (Machine tray 3 feed paper) 

MPFDSD1 MPFD remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) 

MPFDSD2 MPFD remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 

MPFDSTD MPFD remaining jam (Tandem desk feed paper) 

PPD1 NMF PPD1 not-reaching jam (Manual feed tray paper) 

TRAY1 Tray 1 feed paper jam (PPD1 not-reaching) 

PPD1NT2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Machine tray 2 feed paper) 

PPD1 ND1 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) 

PPD1ND2 PPD1 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 

PPD1 NTD PPD1 not-reaching jam (Tandem desk feed paper) 

PPD1NAD PPD1 not-reaching jam (ADU refeed paper) 

PPD1 SMF PPD1 remaining jam (Manual feed tray feed paper) 

PPD1ST1 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 1 feed paper) 

PPD1 ST2 PPD1 remaining jam (Machine tray 2 feed paper) 

PPD1 SD1 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) 

PPD1SD2 PPD1 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 

PPD1STD PPD1 remaining jam (Tandem desk feed paper) 

PPD1SAD PPD1 remaining jam (ADU refeed paper) 

PPD1PRI PPD1 jam (Image ready is not supplied from ICU.) 

POD1N POD1 not-reaching jam 

POD1S POD1 remaining jam 

POD2N POD2 not-reaching jam 

POD2SR POD2 remaining jam 

(When discharging to the right side of machine.) 



POD2SL POD2 remaining jam 

(When discharging to the left side of machine.) 



ADU paper entry sensor not-reaching jam 



ADU paper entry sensor remaining jam 



ADU paper exit sensor not-reaching jam 



ADU paper exit sensor remaining jam 



APPD1 N ADU transport sensor 1 not-reaching jam 



APPD1S ADU transport sensor 1 remaining jam 



APPD2N ADU transport sensor 2 not-reaching jam 
(When ADU transport) 



APPD2S ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam 
(When ADU transport) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-20 



Code 


Description 


BPT 


Manual feed tray paper feed jam (APPD2 not-reaching) 


APPD2SM 


ADU transport sensor 2 remaining jam 
(Manual feed tray feed paper) 


DESK2 


Desk tray 2 paper feed jam (DPFD3 not-reaching) 


DPFD3SD2 


DPFD3 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 


DESK1 


Desk tray 1 paper feed jam (DPFD2 not-reaching) 


DPFD2ND2 


DPFD2 not-reaching jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 


DPFD2SD1 


DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 1 feed paper) 


DPFD2SD2 


DPFD2 remaining jam (Desk tray 2 feed paper) 


TTRAY2 


Tandem tray 2 paper feed jam (TPFD3 not-reaching) 


TPFD3STD2 


TPFD3 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed paper) 


TTRAY1 


Tandem tray 1 paper feed jam (TPFD2 not-reaching) 


TPFD2NTD2 


TPFD2 not-reaching jam (Tandem tray 2 feed paper) 


TPFD2STD1 


TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 1 feed paper) 


TPFD2STD2 


TPFD2 remaining jam (Tandem tray 2 feed paper) 


FPID_N 


Built-in finisher PID not-reaching jam 


FPID_S 


Built-in finisher PID remaining jam 


FSCID_N 


Built-in finisher SCID not-reaching jam 


FSCID_S 


Built-in finisher SCID remaining jam 


FSCID2_N 


Built-in finisher SCID2 not-reaching jam 


FSCID2_S 


Built-in finisher SCID2 remaining jam 


FPPD_S 


Built-in finisher PPD remaining jam 


FSCPD_N 


Built-in finisher SCPD not-reaching jam 


FSCPD_S 


Built-in finisher SCPD remaining jam 


FPOD_N 


Built-in finisher POD not-reaching jam 


FPOD_S 


Built-in finisher POD remaining jam 


FES_N 


Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) not-reaching 
jam 


FES_S 


Console finisher entry port sensor (FES) remaining jam 


FFPS_N 


Console finisher saddle not-reaching jam 
(Not reaching the folding sensor (FFPS).) 


FFPS_S 


Console finisher saddle remaining jam 

(The folding sensor (FFPS) does not turn off.) 


FSTPL 


Console finisher staple jam 

(The stapler does not complete clinching.) 


FPNCH 


Console finisher punch jam 

(The puncher does not complete punching.) 


FDOP 


Console finisher door open jam 

(During/after paper passing, the front door, joint, or 

upper cover is opened.) 


PID_N 


mail bin PID not-reaching jam 


PID_S 


mail bin PID remaining jam 


MPPD1_N 


mail bin MPPD1 not-reaching jam 


MPPD1_S 


mail bin MPPD1 remaining jam 


MPPD2_N 


mail bin MPPD2 not-reaching jam 


MPPD2_S 


mail bin MPPD2 remaining jam 


MPPD3_N 


mail bin MPPD3 not-reaching jam 


MPPD3_S 


mail bin MPPD3 remaining jam 


MPPD4_N 


mail bin MPPD4 not-reaching jam 


MPPD4_S 


mail bin MPPD4 remaining jam 


MPPD5_N 


mail bin MPPD5 not-reaching jam 


MPPD5_S 


mail bin MPPD5 remaining jam 



22-4 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history. 


Section 




Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


The history of the latest 30 troubles is displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-4 
TROUBLE HISTORY. 



(10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters) 



22-5 



Purpose 


Other 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the ROM version of each unit 
(section). 


Section 




Item 


Software 


Operation/Procedure 


The version of each ROM is displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-5 










ROM VERSION DATA DISPLAY. 








S/N(MFP) : 


000000000 


S/N( 


ENGINE): 


0000000000 


S/N(SCANNER) : 


000000000 








MFP: 


1.00 


(LANGUAGE : 1.00) 




PCU : 


1.00 




BOOT: 


1.00 


SCANNER: 


1.00 




FAX: 


1.00 


FINISHER: 


1.00 




NIC: 


1.00 


DESK/LCC : 


1.00 




MAIL BIN : 


1.00 


PUNCH UNIT: 


1.00 









<List of display values> 



S/N(MFP) 


Controller serial number 


S/N(ENGINE) 


Engine section serial number 


S/N(SCANNER) 


Scanner section serial number 


MFP 


MFP controller 


(LANGUAGE) 


(Language version) 


BOOT 


MFP controller boot ROM 


FAX 


FAX controller 


NIC 


Network card 


PCU 


PCU controller 


SCANNER 


Scanner controller 


FINISHER 


Finisher controller 


DESK/LCC 


Desk/LCC controller 


MAIL BIN 


mail bin controller 


PUNCH UNIT 


Punch unit 



(Product key controlled by PCU PWB serial number.) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-21 



22-6 





Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to print the list of adjustments and setup 
data (simulations, FAX soft switches, counters). 


Section 




Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


the selected data is displayed on the menu box. 



22-8 

Purpose 



Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 



Function (Content) Used to check the number of times the staple, 
and scanner (reading) unit were used. 



Section 

Item Counter 

Operation/Procedure The counter data below are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-6 



DATA PRINT MODE, SELECT SETTING.AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT iAUTO ONLY 

1. PRINT START 



When "1" is selected, 
press |[START] key] 



D 



SIMULATION 22-6 

DATA PRINT MODE.. EXECUTING.. 

O.TRAY SELECT :Q 



<List of display values> 





TRAY SELECT auto only (no selection) 


1 


PRINT START 



22-7 



Purpose 


User data output, check (display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to display the key operator code. 

(Used when the customer has forgotten the key 

operator code.) 


Section 




Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The key operator code is displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-7 

KEY OPERATOR CODE DISPLAY. 

CODE: 



SIMULATION 22-1 



ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA DISPLAY 

SPF: 

SCAN : ******** 

STAPLER : ******** PUNCH 

STAMP : ** 



<List of display valuo 



SPF 


Number of times of document feed 


SCAN 


Number of times of scan 


STAPLER 


Number of times of stapling 


PUNCH 


Number of times of punching 


STAMP 


Number of times of SPF finish stamp 



22-9 



Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 

(display) 
Function (Content) Used to check the number of times 

(print quantity) of each paper feed section. 



Section 



Paper feed 



Item Counter 

Operation/Procedure The counter data below are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-9 




PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. 


TRAY1 : ******** 


TRAY2 : 


TRAY3 : 


TRAY4 : 


BPT : ******** 


ADU : ******** 



<List of display values> 


TRAY1 


Use quantity of tray 1 


TRAY2 


Use quantity of tray 2 (Multi purpose tray) 


TRAY3 


Use quantity of tray 3/LCC left tray 
(Common to Desk/LCC) 


TRAY4 


Use quantity of tray 4/LCC right tray (Desk/LCC) 


BPT 


Use quantity of manual feed tray 


ADU 


Use quantity of duplex paper feed 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-22 



<List of machine model codes> 



22-10 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the system configuration 
(option, internal hardware). 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


The machine composition below is displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-10 




SYSTEM INFORMATION. 




MACHINE: 




SPF: ******* XXXXXXXXXXX 




FINISHER : ******* MAIL BIN : 


****** PUNCH : ****** 


DESK/LCC : ADU: 


xxxxxxxxxxxx 


PROCESS TYPE : * 




SYSTEM MEMORY: "MB 


HDD: ***MB ICU F ****** 


NIC : ** NSCN : 


PS3 : 


FAX: ******* FAX MEMORY : **MB 


HANDSET:******* 


STAMP : ******* 





<List of display valuo 



MACHINE 


AR-P350/350LP , AR-P450/450LP, 
AR-M350/350M, AR-M450/450M 


SPF 


NONE/ (Model code) 


DSPF 


NONE/ (Model code) 


FINISHER 


NONE/ (Model code) 


MAIL BIN 


NONE/ (Model code) 


PUNCH 


NONE/ (Model code) 


DESK/LCC 


NONE/ (Model code) 


ADU 


NONE/ (Model code) 


SPEED 


Machine speed 35/45 (CPM) 


PROCESS TYPE 


Process control spec 

(1 , 2: AR machine 3: DM machine) 


SYSTEM MEMORY 


Memory capacity (MB) 


HDD 


Hard disk capacity (MB) 


ICU 


PRINTER/MFP 


NIC 


NONE/ (Model code) 


NSCN 


NONE/ (Network scanner) 


PS3 


NONE/ (PS3 expansion kit) 


FAX 


NONE/ (Model code) 


FAX MEMORY 


FAX expansion memory capacity (MB) 


HAND SET 


NONE/ (Model code) 


STAMP 


Finisher stamp NONE/ (Model code) 



Item 


Display 


Content 


MACHINE 


AR-P350/350LP 




AR-P450/450LP 




AR-M350/350M 




AR-M450/450M 




SPF 


- 


Document feed unit not installed 


AR-EF2 


Document feed unit (SPF) installed 


AR-EF1 


Duplex document feed unit installed 


FINISHER 


- 


After-work unit not installed 


AR-FN6 


Built-in finisher installed 


AR-FN7 


Console finisher installed 


MAIL BIN 


- 


Mail bin not installed 


AR-MS1 


Mail bin installed 


Punch unit 


- 


Punch unit not installed 


AR-PN1A 


Punch unit 2 holes 


AR-PN1B 


Punch unit 3 holes 


AR-PN1C 


Punch unit 4 holes 


AR-PN1D 


Punch unit 4 holes wide hole 


ADU 


- 


Duplex module not installed 


AR-DU3 


Duplex module installed 


AR-DU4 


Duplex module + 
manual feed unit installed 


DESK 


- 


Paper feed desk not installed 


AR-MU1 


Multi-purpose tray installed 


AR-D14 


Paper feed desk installed 


AR-D13 


Tandem desk installed 


ICU 


PRINTER 


Printer board 


AR-M11 


MFP board 


MEMORY 


0MB 


No expansion memory 


***MB 


Expansion memory ***MB 


HD 


0MB 


Hard disk not installed 


****MB 


Hard disk installed (AR-HD3) 


NIC 


- 


NIC not installed 


AR-NC5J 


NIC installed 


PS3 
expansion kit 


- 


PS3 expansion kit not installed 


AR-PK1 


PS3 expansion kit installed 


FAX 


- 


FAX expansion kit installed 


AR-FX5 


FAX expansion kit not installed 


Network 
scanner 


- 


Network expansion kit not installed 


AR-NS2F 


Network expansion kit installed 


Expansion 
memory 


" 


Expansion memory for FAX not 
installed 


AR-MM9 


Expansion memory for FAX 8MB 
(AR-MM9) installed 


Handset 


- 


handset not installed 


AR-HN5 


Handset installed 


Finish stamp 


- 


Finish stamp unit not installed 


AR-SU1 


Finish stamp unit installed 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-23 



22-11 



22-13 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the use frequency of FAX. 
(send/receive) (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The counter data below are displayed. 



Purpose 



Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 



Function (Content) Used to display the process cartridge data. 



Section 



Item Counter 

Operation/Procedure The counter data below are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-11 



FAX COUNTER DATA DISPLAY. 

FAX SEND : ** ** FAX RECEIVE : ' 

FAX OUTPUT: ******** 

SEND IMAGES : ******** SEND TIME: 

RECEIVE TIME : :**:** 



SIMULATION 22-13 

PROCESS CARTRIDGE DATA DISPLAY. 

DRUM : ********(counts) (sec.) 

TONER : "(counts) (sec.) 

DEVE : """""(counts) """""(see.) 



<List of display values> 



<List of display values> 



FAX SEND 


Number of times of FAX sending 


FAX RECEIVE 


Number of times of FAX receiving 


FAX OUTPUT 


FAX print quantity 


SEND IMAGES 


Quantity of sending 


SEND TIME 


Time for sending 


RECEIVE TIME 


Time for receiving 



DRUM 


Drum cartridge counter 


Count value (counts) 


Rotating time (sec) 


TONER 


Toner cartridge counter 


Count value (counts) 


Rotating time (sec) 


DEVE 


Developer cartridge counter 


Count value (counts) 


Rotating time (sec) 



22-19 



22-12 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the misfeed position and the 
number of misfeed at that position. 
(If the number of misfeed is considerably great, 
the machine must be repaired.) 


Section 


DSPF 


Item 


Trouble 


Operation/Procedure 


The history of the latest 50 paper jams is 
displayed. (Refer to the jam code table below.) 



Purpose Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 

(display, print) 

Function (Content) Used to display the scanner mode counter. 



Section 



Item 



Counter 



Operation/Procedure The counter values related to the network 
scanner are displayed. 



SIMULATION 22-19 

NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY. 

NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER : 
MAIL COUNTER: 
FTP COUNTER: 



SIMULATION 22-12 






SPF JAM HISTORY. 








„„„,,„„„,„„„„„„,,„ 


***,******* 


(10 lines x 80 digits = 800 characters) 





<List of display values> 



NETWORK SCANNER 
ORIGINAL COUNTER 
MAIL COUNTER 



Number of scanned documents 

(total of PC and SPF) 

Number of times of mail sending 



FTP COUNTER 



Number of times of FTP sending 



<Jam code tablo 



Code 



Description 



SPSD N 



SPSD not-reaching jam 



SPSD S 



SPSD remaining jam 



SPOD_N SPOD not-reaching jam 

SPOD_S SPOD remaining jam 

SPSDSCN Exposure start timer end 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-24 



Main code 24 



24-3 



24-1 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the misfeed counter, misfeed 
history, trouble counter, and trouble history. 
(After completion of maintenance, these 
counters must be cleared.) 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the number of use of the staple, 
DSPF and the scanner (reading) unit. 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-1 

JAM/ TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELECT1-3.AND 

PRESS START. 

1. PAPER JAM 

2. SPF JAM 

3. TROUBLE 



I 



Press | [START] key] 
^ 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-1 

PAPER JAM COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



PAPER JAM 


Number of times of paper jam 


SPF JAM 


Number of times of SPF jam 


TROUBLE 


Number of times of troubles 



SIMULATION 24-3 

ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELEC1-5, AND PRESS START. 

1.SPF 

2. SCAN 

3. STAPLER 

4. PUNCH 

5. STAMP 



Press |[START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-3 

SPF COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



1 



SPF paper passing quantity 



Number of times of document scan 



3 Number of times of stapling 

4 Number of times of punching 



Number of times of finish stamp 



24-2 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the number of use (print quantity) 
of each paper feed section. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-2 

PAPER FEED COUNTER DATA CLEAR.SELECT1-6.AND PRESS START. 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 

3. TRAY3/LCC1 2. TRAY4/LCC2 

5. BPT 6. ADU 



Press |[START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-2 

TRAY1 COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



24-4 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to reset the maintenance counter. 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24^ 

MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR.PRESS START. 

1. MAINTENANCE 



i 



Press | [START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24^4 

MAINTENANCE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



maintenance counter 



<List of set values> 



1 Tray 1 use quantity 



Tray 2 use quantity 



Tray 3/LCC left tray use quantity 



Tray 4/LCC right tray use quantity 



J5 Manual feed tray use quantity 

6 Duplex paper feed use quantity 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-25 



24-5 



24-7 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to reset the developer counter. 

(The developer counter of the DV unit installed is 

reset.) 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the OPC drum counter and the 




toner cartridge counter. 




(Perform when the OPC drum is replaced.) 


Section 


Process 




(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 




key. 




The procedure below is executed and the display 




returns to the original state. 




1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-5 



DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START. 
1. DV CARTRIDGE 



I 



Press | [START] key] 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-5 

DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



;List of set values> 



1 



Developer cartridge counter 



SIMULATION 24-7 



DRUM/TONER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT.AND PRESS START. 

1. DRUM CARTRIDGE 

2. TONER CARTRIDGE 



1 



Press | [START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-7 

DRUM CARTRIDGE COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE ? 

LYES 

2. NO 



;List of set values> 



1 



Drum cartridge counter 



2 Toner cartridge counter 



24-6 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to reset the copy counter. 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-6 



COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR. PRESS START. 
1.COPY 



Press | [START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-6 

COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



;List of set values> 



1 



Copy effective paper counter 



24-9 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the printer print counter. 




(After completion of maintenance, this counter 




must be cleared.) 


Section 


Printer 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 




key. 




The procedure below is executed and the display 




returns to the original state. 




1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-9 

PRINTER/OTHERS COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT.1-2, AND 

PRESS START. 

1. PRINTER 

2. OTHERS 



I 



Press | [START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-9 

PRINTER COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE ? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



Printer counter 



Other effective paper counter 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-26 



24-10 



24-11 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the FAX counter. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 10 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-10 

FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR. SELECT.1-6, AND PRESS START. 



FAX SEND 
FAX RECEIVED 
FAX OUTPUT 
SEND IMAGES 
SEND TIME 
RECEIVE TIME 



I 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to reset the drum rotation time, toner motor 
rotation time, and developer rotation time 
counters. The developer counter of the DV unit 
installed is reset. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



Press | [START] key] 

T 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-10 

FAX SEND COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



SIMULATION 24-11 

TIMER DATACLEAR. SELECT.1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1 . DRUM ROTATION (CARTRIDGE) 

2. DV ROTATION (CARTRIDGE) 

3. TONER SUPPLY (CARTRIDGE) 



I 



<List of set values> 



1 



FAX SEND: Number of times of FAX sending 



2 FAX RECEIVE: Number of times of FAX reception 



J FAX OUTPUT: FAX print quantity 

4 SEND IMAGES: Sending quantity 



SEND TIME: Time for sending 



RECEIVE TIME: Time for reception 



Press | [START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-11 

DRUM ROTATION COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



Drum rotating time (cartridge) 



Developing unit rotating time (cartridge) 



Toner supply time (cartridge) 



24-15 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear each counter in the scanner mode. 


Section 




Item 


Counter 


Operation/Procedure 


Select with 1 digit key pad and press START 

key. 

The procedure below is executed and the display 

returns to the original state. 

1 : Counter is cleared 2: Not cleared 



SIMULATION 24-15 

NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER CLEAR.SELECT.1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1 .NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER 

2. MAIL COUNTER 

3. FTP COUNTER 



I 



Press | [START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 24-15 

NETWORK SCANNER ORIGINAL COUNTER DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



<List of set values> 



Document scan counter in the network scanner mode 



Number of times of mail sending 



Number of times of FTP sending 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-27 



Main code 25 



25-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the main drive 
section (excluding the scanner (reading) section) 
and the toner density sensor. (The toner density 
sensor output can be monitored.) 


Section 


Drive 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


the toner density control sensor value is 
displayed. Press START key, and the main motor 
will rotate to start monitoring the toner density 
control sensor. 



SIMULATION 25-1 



DV MONITOR. PRESS START. 



Press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] keyj to stop. 
Or stop after 2min. 



SIMULATION 25-1 

DV MONITOR. EXECUTING... 



25-2 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to initialize the toner density when 
replacing developer. (Auto adjustment) 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


The toner density control sensor value is 
displayed. Press START key, and the main motor 
will rotate. After stirring for 2 min, the toner 
density control sensor value is sampled 1 times 
and the average value is stored. 



Note:Open front cover before entering SIM for Auto adjust. 



SIMULATION 25-2 

AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. 



Main code 26 



26-3 



Purpose 



Setup 



Function (Content) Used to set the specification mode of the auditor. 
Setup must be made according to the use 

conditions under auditor. 

Section Auditor 



Item 



Spec 



Operation/Procedure The auditor setting is performed. (Default: 1) 



SIMULATION 26-3 

AUDITOR SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1. P10 

2. VENDOR 

3. OTHERS 



26-5 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the count mode of the total counter 




and the maintenance counter. 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Setting of the count-up number of A3/WLT 




paper passing (1 or 2) is made. 




The current set value is highlighted on the 




right side of the item. 




2) Setting of the count-up number of the selected 




counter is made. 




1: 1 count up 




2: 2 counts up (Default : 2) 



SIMULATION 26-5 

A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS 

START. 

1. TOTAL COUNTER Q 

2. MAINTENANCE(DRUM) COUNTEr|| 

3. DV CARTRIDGE COUNTER Q 



I 



Press |[START] key] 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 26-5 



A3(LEDGER) COUNT UP MODE SETTING. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS 

START. 

1. TOTAL COUNTER 

(1 : 1COUNT UP, 2 : 2COUNT UP) 



Press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] keyj to stop. 
Or stop after 2min. 



<List of target counters> 



SIMULATION 25-2 



AUTOMATIC DV ADJUSTMENT. EXECUTING... 



1 Total counter 



J? Maintenance counter/drum cartridge counter 

3 Developer cartridge counter 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-28 



26-6 



26-18 





Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the specification according to the 
destination. 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


After setting the destination, the power is turned 
off/on. 



When NIC is installed, reset cannot be performed. Therefore, the 
power must be turned off/on. 

This simulation cannot change the FAX destination. Use SIM 66-2 to 
change the FAX destination. 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set Enable/Disable of toner save 

operation. 

(This simulation is enabled only in Japan and UK 

versions. (Depends on SIM 26-6 (Destination) 

setup). 

For the other destinations, user program P22 

allows to make the similar setup.) 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


The toner mode setup is made. (Default: 1) 



SIMULATION 26-6 



DESTINATION SETUP. SELECT 1-10, AND PRESS START. 

1.USA 2. CANADA 3. INCH 

4. JAPAN 5.AB _B 

6. EUROPE 7. UK 8. AUSTRALIA 

9. AB A 10. CHINA 



<List of destinations> 



1 


United States of America 


2 


Canada 


3 


Inch series EX 


4 


Japan 


5 


AB series B5 


6 


Europe 


7 


UK 


8 


Australia 


9 


AB series A5 


10 


China 



SIMULATION 26-16 



TONER SAVE MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START 

0. YES 

1. NO 



<List of set values> 



Toner save mode is enabled. 



1 



Toner save mode is disabled. 



26-30 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the operation mode conforming to 
the CE mark (Europe standards). (For flickers 
when driving the fusing heater lamp.) 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 





26-10 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the trial mode of the network 
scanner. 


Section 




Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The network scanner trial mode is set. 
(Testing scanner without product key is limited to 
500 sheets.) (Default: 0) 



SIMULATION 26-10 



NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS 

START. 

0.END 

1 .START 



<List of set values> 





Trial mode cancel 


1 


Trial mode start 



SIMULATION 26-30 



CE MARK CONTROL SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START 

0. NO 

LYES 



<List of set values> 



No control of CE mark 

1 Control of CE mark 



26-35 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set whether the trouble history of SIM 
22-4 is displayed as one-time trouble or 
continuous troubles when two or more number of 
a same trouble occurred. 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


The trouble memory storing method is set. 
(Default: 0) 



SIMULATION 26-35 

TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETTING. SELECT 0-1, AND PRESS 

START. 

0.ONCE 

1.ANY 



<List of set values> 



_0 Only once (If same as the previous one, it is not stored.) 

1 Any times (Though same as the previous one, it is stored.] 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-29 



26-38 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to stop printing when developer life is 
expired. 


Section 


Other 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Print enable/disable is set when the developer 
cartridge is expired in a DM machine. (Default: 1) 



Main code 27 



27-1 



This simulation is ignored in the AR model, that is, the operation is 
continued. 



SIMULATION 26-38 

DEVELOPER LIFE END SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. PRINT CONTINUE 

1. PRINT STOP 



<List of set values> 







Print continue 



Print stop 



26-41 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification 
ratio auto selection function (AMS) in the 
pamphlet copy mode. 


Section 




Item 


Spec 


Operation/Procedure 


Pamphlet mode AMS setting is enabled or 
disabled. Press START key to save. 
(Europe : 1, Others : 0) 



SIMULATION 26-41 



PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS 

START. 

0. NO 

LYES 



;List of set values> 



J) AMS setting disabled 

1 AMS setting enabled 



Purpose 



Setup 



Function (Content) Used to set the operation specifications when a 
communication trouble occurs between the host 
computer and MODEM (machine side). 
(When a communication trouble occurs between 
the host computer and MODEM (machine side), 
self diag display (U7-00) is displayed and setup 
is made to inhibit or allow printing. ) 



Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) 

Item Spec 

Operation/Procedure Yes/No of communication trouble between 
PC/MODEM is set. (Default: 0) 



(Japan only) 



SIMULATION 27-1 

DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. YES 

1. NO 



<List of set values> 



_0 U7-00 is not displayed in a communication trouble. 

1 U7-00 is displayed in a communication trouble. 



27-5 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to enter the machine tag No. 

(This function allows to check the machine tag 

No. from the computer.) 


Section 


Communication (RIC/MODEM) 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The tag number is set. The current value is 
displayed on PRESENT column. Enter a new tag 
number with 10 digit key pad and press START 
to store. 



26-52 



Purpose 

Function (Content) 



Section 



Item 



Operation/Procedure 



Setup 

Used to set Enable/Disable of count-up when 
white paper is discharged. 
(White paper means the index paper (without 
copying) in the OHP index paper insertion mode, 
the front/rear covers (without copying) in the 
cover insertion mode, and white paper in the 
duplex exit mode (CA, etc.).) 



Paper transport (Paper exit, switchback, 
transport) 



Count-up setting of white paper exit mode is 
made. Press START key to save. (Default: for 
Japan and Australia, 1 for the others) 



japan ana Australia, i n 

The following counters are not counted up. 
•Copies counter 'Total counter 

•Printer counter 'Effective paper counter 

•Department control counter 



SIMULATION 27-5 

TAG # SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

PRESENT: 00010000 

NEW : |l]j]jlj^y 



SIMULATION 26-52 

BLANK PAPER COUNT UP SETTING. SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. NO(NO COUNT UP) 

LYES (COUNT UP) 



<List of set values> 



_0 Count-up is not made. 

1 Count-up is made 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-30 



Main code 30 



30-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the paper feed, paper transport, and 
paper exit sections and their control circuits. 


Section 




Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Then sensors of the machine are checked. 
The sensor name is highlighted when it is 
detected. 



SIMULATION 30-1 
SENSOR CHECK.. 
PPD1 POD1 POD2 
DSWF 



DVCRUin PRCRUin 



<List of display values> 



PPD1 


Resist roller front paper detection 


POD1 


Fusing rear transport detection 1 


POD2 


Fusing rear transport detection 2 


POD3 


Paper full detection 


DVCRUin 


DV unit version detection 


PRCRUin 


Process unit version detection 


DSWL 


Cabinet open detection 


DSWF 


Machine front door 



30-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the sensors and 
detectors in the paper feed section and their 
control circuits. (The operations of the sensors 
and detectors in the paper feed section can be 
monitored on the LCD display.) 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Then sensors of the machine paper feed tray are 
checked. The sensor name is highlighted when it 
is detected. 



SIMULATION 30-2 



TRAY SENSOR CHECK.. 

CSS1 PEDLUD 

EEI1HMCDRS MCPPD MCLUD MCPED MCSPD MCSS1 MCSS2 

MCSS3MCSS4 (MP Tray size:® 

EESmiMPED MPLD MPLS1 MPLS2 

(Bypass Tray size:^) 



<List of display values> 



CSS1 


Tray 1 insertion detection 


MCSS1 


MP tray size detection 1 


PED 


Tray 1 paper empty 
detection 


MCSS2 


MP tray size detection 2 


LUD 


Tray 1 upper limit 
detection 


MCSS3 


MP tray size detection 3 


MCSET 


MP unit detection 


MCSS4 


MP tray size detection 4 


MCDRS 


MP unit side door open 
detection 


MP Tray 
size 


(The detection size of MP 
tray is displayed.) 


MCPPD 


MP tray transport 
detection 


MPFSET 


Manual feed tray 
detection 


MCLUD 


MP tray upper limit 
detection 


MPED 


Manual feed tray paper 
empty detection 


MCPED 


MP tray paper empty 
detection 


MPLD 


Manual feed length 
detection 


MCSPD 


MP tray remaining 
quantity detection 


MPLS1 


Manual feed pull-out 
sensor 1 






MPLS2 


Manual feed pull-out 
sensor 2 






Bypass 

Tray 

size 


(The detection size of 
manual feed tray is 
displayed.) 



Main code 40 



40-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the manual 
paper feed tray paper size detectors and their 
control circuit. (The operations of the manual 
paper feed tray paper size detectors can be 
monitored on the LCD display.) 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The sensors of the manual feed tray are 
checked. The sensor name is highlighted when it 
is detected. 



SIMULATION 40-1 

BYPASS TRAY SENSOR CHECK. 

EHEMPLS1 MPLS2 
(Bypass Tray width size: 



<List of display values> 



MPLD 



Manual feed tray length detection 



MPLS1 



Manual feed pull-out sensor 1 



MPLS2 Manual feed pull-out sensor 2 

Bypass Tray (The detected width of manual feed tray is displayed.) 
width size A4/A3, 11x, B5/B4, 8.5x, A4R, B5R, A5R, 5.5x, 7.25x, 

EXTRA 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-31 



40-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the detection level of the manual 
paper feed tray paper width volume. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The manual feed tray size is adjusted. 

1) Extend the guide to the MAX. position. Select 

1 and press START. When COMPLETE is 
displayed, press CUSTOM SETTING to 
return to the initial screen. 

2) Move the guide to A4R position. Select 2 and 

press START. When COMPLETE is 
displayed, press CUSTOME SETTING to 
return to the initial screen. 

3) Move the guide to A5R position. Select 3 and 

press START. When COMPLETE is 
displayed, press CUSTOME SETTING to 
return to the initial screen. 

4) Move the guide to MIN. position in the initial 

screen. Select 4 and press START. When 
COMPLETE is displayed, the adjustment is 
completed. 

If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 4), 

repeat the adjustment again." 



This adjustment is performed only when the width detection volume 

is replaced. 

Normally use SIM 40-7 for input. 



SIMULATION 40-2 

BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 

1.MAX. POSITION 

2.POSITION 1 

3.POSITION 2 

4.MIN. POSITION 



When "1" is selecte d, 
press |[START] key.| 

i 



AAA 



Press jiCUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 40-2 

BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MAX. POSITION ■■■ COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



When "2" is selected , 
press |[START] key.| 



Press |IcTJSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 40-2 

BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 1 - COMPLETE (or "ERROR"' 



When "3" is selecte d, 
press |[START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key ] 



SIMULATION 40-2 

BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 2 ■■■ COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



When "4" is selected , 
press |[START] key.| 



Press |IcTJSTOM SETTING] key( 



SIMULATION 40-2 



BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MIN. POSITION - COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



40-7 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to enter the adjustment value of the 
manual paper feed tray width detection level. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The adjustment value(Specified on the back of 
the tray pull-out section) of the manual feed tray 
size is entered. 



SIMULATION 40-7 




BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 


1. MAX. POSITION : 




2. POSITION 1 : 

3. POSITION 2 : 

4. MIN. POSITION : 


1 ™ 



± 



Press |[START] key.| 
f 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 40-7 

BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION 



<List of set values> 



1 


Max. width(Max.) 


2 


Adjustment point 1(P1) 


3 


Adjustment point 2(P2) 


4 


Min. width(Min.) 



40-11 



Purpose Operation test, check 

Function (Content) Used to check the width detection level of the 
multi-purpose tray paper width detector. 



Section 



Paper feed 



Item 



Operation 



Operation/Procedure The multi-purpose tray (MPT) sensors are 

checked. The sensor name is highlighted when it 
is highlighted. 



SIMULATION 40-11 

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY SENSOR CHECK. 



MCSS2 MCSS3 MCSS4 
(Multi Purpose Tray width s\7e: Ti&Wi$\ 



<List of display values> 



MCSS1 



Multi-purpose tray size detection 1 



MCSS2 



Multi-purpose tray size detection 2 



MCSS3 Multi-purpose tray size detection 3 

MCSS4 Multi-purpose tray size detection 4 

Multi Purpose (The detected size of MPT width is displayed.) 
Tray width size A4/A3, 1 1 x, B5/B4, 8.5x, A4R, B5R, A5R, 5.5x, 7.25x, 
EXTRA 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-32 



40-12 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the width detection level of the 
multi-purpose tray paper width detector. 


Section 


Paper feed 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The multi-purpose tray size is adjusted. 

1) Extend the guide to the MAX. position. 
Select 1 and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

2) Move the guide to MIN. position. 
Select 2 and press START. 
When COMPLETE is displayed, 
the adjustment is completed. 

If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 2), 
repeat the adjustment again. 



Main code 41 



41-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the document 
size sensor and the related circuit. 
(The operation of the document size sensor can 
be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Section 


Other 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The OC document sensor is checked. 



SIMULATION 41-1 
PD SENSOR CHECK.. 

ocsw l531l5igi3»El 


PD4 
(The 


PD5 PD6 PD7 

detected sensor is 


highlighted.) 



SIMULATION 40-12 

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-2.AND PRESS 

START. 

1. MAX POSITION 

2.MIN. POSITION 



When "1" is selected, 



<List of display values> 


OCSW 


Original cover state 


Open : Normal display 


Close : Highlighted 


PD1 ~7 


Document sensor state 


No document : Normal display 


Document loaded : Highlighted 



press |[START] key.| Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 40-12 

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MAX. POSITION- COMPLETER "ERROR") 



41-2 



=When "2" is selected, 



E press |[START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 40-12 

MULTI PURPOSE TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MIN. POSITION- COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the detection level of the 
document size sensor. 


Section 


Other 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The OC document sensor is adjusted. 

1) Open the original cover. Press 1 without an 
original. Press START, and COMPLETE is 
displayed. Press CUSTOM SETTING to 
return to the initial screen. 

2) Place an A3 (or WLT) paper in the initial 
screen. Select 2 and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

the adjustment is completed. 
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 2), 
repeat the adjustment again. 



SIMULATION 41-2 

PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. SELECT1 -2, AND PRESS START. 

(PLEASE OPEN THE ORIGINAL COVER.) 

1. NO ORIGINAL 

2. A3 ORIGINAL 



When "1" is selected, 



press |[START] kiyj, Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] ke"y] 



* 






1 


i 


SIMULATION 41-2 
PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. 
NO ORIGINAL - COMPLETE (or 
A3 ORIGINAL - INCOMPLETE 


ERROR al 










Idi ...-) 







EWhen "2" is selecte d, 
= press |[START] key.| 

^ (In case of an error) 



Press jpJSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 41-2 



PD SENSOR ADJUSTMENT. 
NO ORIGINAL - COMPLETE 
A3 ORIGINAL - COMPLETE (or " ERROR at gi 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-33 



41-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation of the document 
size sensor and the related circuit. 
(The output level of the document size sensor 
can be monitored on the LCD display.) 


Section 


Other 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The OC document sensor detection level is 
displayed. (Real time display) 



SIMULATION 41-3 






PD SENSOR DATA DISPLAY. 




WMVl 








PD1[128] 


200 


PD2[128]: 


200 


PD3[128] 


50 


PD4[128]: 


52 


PD5[128] 


51 


PD6[128]: 


50 


PD7[128] 


52 







<List of display values> 


ocsw 


Original cover state 


Open : Normal display 


Close : Highlighted 


PD1 -7 


PD sensor detection level 


Figures in [ ] indicate the adjustment threshold values 
(41-2 adjustment value). 



Main code 43 



43-1 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the fusing temperature in each 
operation mode. 


Section 


Fusing, paper exit 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The fusing control temperature is set. 
The current set value is highlighted on the right 
of each item. Select an item (1 - 6), and enter a 
set value with 1 digit key pad. Press START key 
to store the value. 



SIMULATION 43-1 








FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. 


SELECT 1 - 6, AND PRESS START. 


1. INSIDF NORMAI EETil 5 


INSIDE MPT 


trail 




2. OUTSIDE NORMALIEH 6 


OUTSIDE MPT 


iESl 


H 


3. INSIDE PRFHFATtBia 






4. OUTSIDE PREHEATiEU 







1 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 43-1 

FUSER TEMPERATURE SET. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

1. INSIDE NORMAL 



(Enter the value with 10-key) 



<List of display values> 







Default 


Set range 


1 


Heater inside/Normal 


190 


165-210 


2 


Heater outside/Normal 


190 


165-210 


3 


Heater inside/Pre-heat 


150 


100-160 


4 


Heater outside/Pre-heat 


150 


100-160 


5 


Heater inside/Manual paper feed 
used 


190 


165-210 


6 


Heater outside/Manual paper feed 
used 


190 


165-210 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-34 



Main code 44 



44-1 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set Enable/Disable of each correction 
operation in the image forming (process) 
section. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 





SIMULATION 44-1 



PROCESS CORRECTION VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE 0-127 

AND PRESS START. 

BIT0:Vg1, BIT1:Vg2, BIT2:Vb1, BIT3:Vb2 

BIT4:Vb3, BIT5:LD1, BIT6:LD2 



bit = 1 : Correction enabled 
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 



7 6 5 4 3 2 10 






























LD2 


LD1 


Vb3 


Vb2 


Vb1 


Vg2 


Vg1 



44-4 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the target image (reference) density 
level in the developing bias voltage correction. 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The process correction value is set. 
Select an item (1 - 9), and enter a value with 
10 digit key pad. Press SYTART to store the 
value. 



SIMULATION 44-4 


PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. SELECT 1-8 AND PRESS 


START. 




1.PTH 


lilil 2.S-WT [HE1 ^^_a 
4.Vb1 2 ££■ 5.Vb1-3SB | 


3.Vb1-1 


6.Vb2-1 


EJ1 7.Vb2-2 3>M B.Vh?-3HW 



± 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 44^ 

PROCESS CONTROL VALUE SETTING. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS 

START. 

1.PTH 



<List of display values> 



1 


PTH*1 


Process Thermistor temperature forcible set value 
(0-99 °C : Normal 0) 


2 


S_WT *2 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) rising correction 
wait time (0-180sec : Default 90) 


3 


Vb1-1 *3 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(First rotation) 1 (0 - 150V : Default 50) 


4 


Vb 1-2*3 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(First rotation) 2 (0 - 150V : Default 50) 


5 


Vb1-3*3 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(First rotation) 3 (0 - 150V : Default 50) 


6 


Vb2-1 *4 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(Second rotation) 1 (0 - 50V : Default 15) 


7 


Vb2-2 *4 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(Second rotation) 2 (0 - 50V : Default 15) 


8 


Vb2-3 *4 


Vb (Devepoping bias correction value) correction quantity 
(Second rotation) 3 (0 - 50V : Default 15) 



Only when this value is 0, control is performed with the actual 

measurement value of process Thermistor. 

If it is not 0, control is forcibly performed. 

When the drum motor standby time is greater than this value, the 

correction of SIM 44-1 Vb1 is performed. 

This value is SIM 44-9 Vb1-1 correction value. The value 

corresponding to the drum rotating time is used. 

This value is SIM 44-9 Vb1-2 correction value. The value 

corresponding to the drum rotating time is used. 



DRUM ROTATION TOME 


Vb1 correction value 
(X' th rotation) 


45PPM 


35PPM 


~ 40K (sec) 


~ 50K (sec) 


(X' th rotation) -1 


40 ~ 80 K (sec) 


50 ~ 95K (sec) 


(X' th rotation) -2 


80K~ (sec) 


95K~ (sec) 


(X' th rotation) -3 



44-9 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the result (main charger grid 
voltage developing bias voltage, laser power, 
etc.) of correction (process correction) in the 
image forming section. 

(By this simulation, the correction operation can 
be checked.) 


Section 


Process 

(OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning) 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The process correction value is checked. 



SIMULATION 44-9 




PROCESS CONTROL DA 
DRUM ROTATION TIME: 
Vg1:Eg(V) Vg2:ES(V) 
Vb1-1:|H(V) Vb1-2:HS 
I Dl:EEB(mW) 

CONTROL: El 
TO: H T1:H 


TA DISPLAY. 


liHcSttfa (sec) 

(V) Vb2:DC(V) 
I D?:EIBaimWl 

DESTINATIONS PTH:gg(deg) 
T2: H 



<List of display values> 



DRUM ROTATION TIME 


Drum rotation time 


Vg1~Vg2 


Grid voltage correction value 


Vb1-1 *1 


Vb (Developing bias correction value) 
correction value (first rotation) 


Vb1-2*1 


Vb (Developing bias correction value) 
correction value (second rotation) 


Vb2 


Developing bias correction value 


Vb3 


Developing bias correction value 


LD1 


Laser power correction value 


LD2 


Laser power correction value 


CONTROL 


CRUM control spec (1 - 3) 


DESTINATION 


CRUM destination (A - J) 


PTH*2 


Process Thermistor temperature value 


TO 


Toner control correction value 
(Rotation time correction) (+100) 


T1 


Toner control correction value T1 
(Temperature correction) (±100) 


T2 


Toner control correction value T2 
(Temperature correction) (±100) 



*1 : Vb1-1 and Vb1-2 are enabled or disabled by SIM 44-1 Vb1 setup. 
*2: When PTH is set to with SIM 44-4, the detected value in this 

adjustment is displayed. If PTH is set to other than 0, the value set 

with SIM 44-4 is displayed. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-35 



Main code 46 



46-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode 
(binary, auto, text, text/photo, photo mode). 
An adjustment with this simulation affects all the 
reading density adjustment values. 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(Auto adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1 ) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-2 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 0-6, AND PRESS START. 
0. TRAY SELECT Q 1 . COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. AE3.0 ^^ 4.CH3.0 gj| 

5. MIX 3.0 1 I 6. PHOTO 3.0 Efll 



Select other than - 2, 



andpress | [START]k e7| Press| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-2 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START 

3. AE3.0 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key.| Press |[START] key.| 

4 



t 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-2 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] key] 



E 



Press 
press 



[START] key] o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 46-2 




EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 




(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 


H 


5. BPT 





Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] keyj 




Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 46-2 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (2). SELECT 3-6, AND PRESS START. 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3. AE3.0 4. CH3.0 

5. MIX 3.0 6. PHOTO 3.0 



<List of set values 1> 






Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Copy start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


AE mode 


4 


Text mode 30 


5 


Text/Photo mode 30 


6 


Photo mode 30 


<List of display values 1> 


Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 


<List of set values 2> 


1 


TRAY1 


2 


TRAY2 


3 


TRAY3 


4 


TRAY4 


5 


Manual feed 


<List of set values 3> 


3 


AE mode 


4 


Text mode 30 


5 


Text/Photo mode 30 


6 


Photo mode 30 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-36 



46-9 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the print density for each density 
level (display value) in the copy mode 
(binary-Text mode). 

A desired reading density can be set for each 
density level (display value). 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(Text mode) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-9 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 0-1 1, AND PRESS START 

0. TRAY SELECT f\ 1. COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL || 

3. 1.0 El 4 - 1-5 §3 5. 2.0 
6.2.5. 1 7.3.0 | j 8.3.5 
9.4.0 J 10.4.5 EH 11.5.0 



Select other than 0-2, 



ahdpress | [START] ke ^ Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-9 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 

3. 1.0 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key] 

T 



I 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-9 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press | [START] key] 



lj 



Press 
press 



[START] key |or 



[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"y] 



SIMULATION 46-9 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Select 2, and 



press |jSTART] key.| 




Press 
press 



[START] key |or 



[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"y| 



SIMULATION 46-9 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (CHAR.2). SELECT 3-1 1 , AND PRESS START 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3.1.0 4.1.5 5.2.0 

6.2.5. 7.3.0 8.3.5 

9.4.0 10.4.5 11.5.0 



<List of set values 1> 





Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Copy start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



J TRAY1 

2 TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-37 



<List of set values 1> 



46-10 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the print density for each density 
level (display value) in the copy mode 
(binary-Text/Photo mode). 
A desired reading density can be set for each 
density level (display value). 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(Text/Photo mode) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1 ) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-10 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 0-1 1, AND PRESS START 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. 1.0 J 4. 1.5 BJ 5.2.0 
6.2.5 M 7.3.0 E j 8.3.5 
9.4.0 J 10.4.5 ^M 11.5.0 



T 



Select other than - 2, 



and press | [START] k i^ Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key] 
t I 



SIMULATION 46-10 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 

3. 1.0 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

T 



t 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-10 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] key] 



c 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-10 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



;CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-10 






EXP. LEVEL SETUP (MIX.2) 


SELECT 3-11 


AND PRESS START. 


(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 
3.1.0 4.1.5 


5.2.0 


HI 


6. 2.5. 7. 3.0 


8.3.5 




9.4.0 10.4.5 


11.5.0 








Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Copy start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



J TRAY1 

2 TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-38 



46-11 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the print density for each density 
level (display value) in the copy mode 
(binary-Photo mode). 

A desired reading density can be set for each 
density level (display value). 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(Photo mode) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-11 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOT02). SELECT 0-1 1 , AND PRESS START 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. 1.0 ^ 4. 1.S Ej 5. 2.0 
6.2.5. j 7.3.0 jj 8.3.5 
9.4.0 9 10.4.5 Ej 11.5.0 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] ke ^ Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
t I 



SIMULATION 46-1 1 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PH0T02),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 

1. 1.0 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

4 



i 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key[ 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-11 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PH0T02). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press | [START] key] 



lj 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"yj 



SIMULATION 46-1 1 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PHOT02). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press IJSTART] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"y] 



SIMULATION 46-11 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP (PH0T02). SELECT 3-1 1, AND PRESS START 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3.1.0 4.1.5 5.2.0 

6.2.5 7.3.0 8.3.5 

9.4.0 10.4.5 11.5.0 



<List of set values 1> 





Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Copy start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



J TRAY1 

2 TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



3 


Exposure level 1 .0 


4 


Exposure level 1 .5 


5 


Exposure level 2.0 


6 


Exposure level 2.5 


7 


Exposure level 3.0 


8 


Exposure level 3.5 


9 


Exposure level 4.0 


10 


Exposure level 4.5 


11 


Exposure level 5.0 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-39 



46-12 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the print density in the FAX mode 
(all modes). An adjustment with this simulation 
affects all the reading density adjustment values. 
(Only when FAX is installed) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(FAX auto adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1 ) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 



46-13 

Purpose 

Function (Content) 



Adjustment 

Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX 

mode (normal mode). 

(Only when FAX is installed.)" 



Section 

Item Picture quality 

Operation/Procedure The exposure mode to be set is selected. 

(FAX normal text mode individual adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 
5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-12 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX (AUTO SET). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT C| 1 . COPY START 

2. FAX EXP. LEVEL 



T 



Select other than - 1 , 



and pressl [START] key. ! Press| [CUSTOM SETTING] key. | 



SIMULATION 46-12 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX (AUTO SET),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 
START. «-■ 

2. I AX EXP. LEVEL K*i*J 



Select 1 , and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



It 



T 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-12 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX (AUTO SET). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] keyj 



tj 



Press |[START] key| or | 

press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-12 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX (AUTO SET). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 5.BPT 



SIMULATION 46-13 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START. 
0. TRAY SELECT || 1 . PRINT START 

2. EXP LEVEL || 

3. AUTO El 4. LIGHT EJ 5. DARK E] 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] ke -y] Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] keyj 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-13 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 
2. AUTO 



Selec t 1, and 

press |[START] keyj Press |[START] key] 



L 



i 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-13 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] keyj 



I 



Press j [START] keyj or E i 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-13 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



<List of set values 1> 



Select 2, and 



press | [START] keyj 



Paper feed tray selection 



1 



Copy start (Default) 



FAX mode exposure setup 




Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



<List of display values 1> 



SIMULATION 46-13 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(NORMAL). SELECT 3-5, AND PRESS START. 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



1 


TRAY1 


2 


TRAY2 


3 


TRAY3 


4 


TRAY4 


5 


Manual feed 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-40 



<List of set values 1> 



Paper feed tray selection 



1 



Print start (Default) 



2 Exposure level selection 

3 Auto 

4 Bright 



Dark 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



J TRAY1 

2 TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



Auto 



Bright 



Dark 



46-14 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX 
mode (small text mode). (Only when FAX is 
installed.) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(FAX small text mode individual adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-14 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1 . PRINT START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 
6. AUTO(H) S| 7. LIGHT(H) S| 8. DARK(H)S1 



T 



Select other than 0-2, 



ahdpress | [START] k iy] Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
t I 



SIMULATION 46-14 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 
2. AUTO 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

T 



I 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key[ 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-14 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] key] 



I 



Press | [START] key| or E E 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-14 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press 
press 



[START] keyj o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-14 








EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(FINE) 


SELECT 3-8, AND PRESS START. 


(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 






H 


3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 


5 


DARK 


6. AUTO(H) 7. LIGHT(H) 


8 


DARK(H) 





<List of set values 1> 






Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Print start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Auto 


4 


Bright 


5 


Dark 


6 


Auto (Half tone) 


7 


Bright (half tone) 


8 


Dark (Half tone) 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



1 



TRAY1 



TRAY2 



J TRAY3 

_\ TRAY4 

5 Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



Auto 



Bright 
Dark 



Auto (Half tone) 



Bright (half tone) 



8 Dark (Half tone) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-41 



<List of set values 1> 



46-15 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX 
mode (fine mode). (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(FAX fine mode individual adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1 ) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-15 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. PRINT START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 
6. AUTO(H) EI 7. LIGHT(H) ^ 8. DARK(H)^ 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press pTAJTTkeTl Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-15 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 
START. KT1 

2. AUTO H*l*l 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 
1 



L 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-15 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). NOW COPYING. 



Se lec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



h 



Press | [START] key| or E E 

press |[CUSTOME SETTING] ke'y] 



SIMULATION 46-15 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key.| 




Press | [START] keyj or 

press |[CUSTOME SETTING] ke'y] 



SIMULATION 46-1 5 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(SUPER FINE). SELECT 3-i 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 

6. AUTO(H) 7. LIGHT(H) 8. DARK(H) 



AND PRESS START. 






Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Print start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Auto 


4 


Bright 


5 


Dark 


6 


Auto (Half tone) 


7 


Bright (half tone) 


8 


Dark (Half tone) 


<List of display values 1> 


Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 


<List of set values 2> 


1 


TRAY1 


2 


TRAY2 


3 


TRAY3 


4 


TRAY4 


5 


Manual feed 


<List of set values 3> 


3 


Auto 


4 


Bright 


5 


Dark 


6 


Auto (Half tone) 


7 


Bright (half tone) 


8 


Dark (Half tone) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-42 



46-16 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the reading density in the FAX 
mode (super fine mode). (Only when FAX is 
installed.) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


The exposure mode to be set is selected. 
(FAX super fine mode individual adjustment) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right side of each item. In this screen, be sure 
to select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default: 50, set range: - 99) 

3) Press START, and copying is started and the 
set value is stored. (Display value 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Select an exposure level. (Set value 3) 



SIMULATION 46-16 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. PRINT START 

2. EXP LEVEL Q 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 
6.AUTO(H) gj 7. LIGHT(H) gj 8. DARK(H)EI 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] to y] Press| [CUSTOM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-16 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE),INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 
START. — . 

2. AUTO ■*i*J 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



It 



I 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 46-16 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). NOW COPYING. 



Se lec t 0, and 
press [[START] key] 



h 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] ke"y] 



SIMULATION 46-16 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |or 



[CUSTOME SETTING] ke"yj 



SIMULATION 46-16 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP FAX(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 3-f 

(EXP. LEVEL SELECT) 

3. AUTO 4. LIGHT 5. DARK 

6. AUTO(H) 7. LIGHT(H) 8. DARK(H) 



AND PRESS START. 



<List of set values 1> 





Paper feed tray selection 


1 


Print start (Default) 


2 


Exposure level selection 


3 


Auto 


4 


Bright 


5 


Dark 


6 


Auto (Half tone) 


7 


Bright (half tone) 


8 


Dark (Half tone) 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



1 



TRAY1 



TRAY2 



J TRAY3 

_A TRAY4 

5 Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



Auto 



Bright 
Dark 



Auto (Half tone) 



Bright (half tone) 



8 Dark (Half tone) 



46-17 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the CCD/CIS shading reference 
value. 


Section 


Scanner (reading) / DSPF (reading) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Change the shading reference value of 
CCD/CIS. The current set value is displayed 
don the right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press START to store the set value. 
(Default: 128, set range: - 255) 



SIMULATION 46-17 

CCD/CIS SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1 . CCD ODD E3 2. CCD EVEN B3 

3. CIS [g|] 



1 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press [[CTJSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-17 



CCD SHADING GAIN DATA SETUP.INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS 

START. 

1.CCDODD 



<Set values> 



1 


CCDCDD 


2 


CCD EVEN 


3 


CS 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-43 



<Set value 1s 



46-18 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in each 
copy mode. 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Change the gamma value. 

The current set value is displayed on the right 
of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the gamma with 1 digit key pad. 
Press START to store the set value. 
(Default 64, set range 0-127) 

3) The greater the value is, the greater the 
gradient is. 



1 



AE mode 



AE fixed mode 



<AE mode> 



1 Picture priority mode 

2 Toner consumption priority mode 



<AE fixed mode> 



AE fixed function : OFF 

1 AE fixed function : ON 



Default : 



46-20 



SIMULATION 46-18 

GAMMA SETUP. SELECT 1 -4, AND PRESS START. 

1.AE [jj] 2. CHARAg]3. MIX g] 4. PHOTO g 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-18 

GAMMA SETUP.INPUT VALUE 0-127, AND PRESS START. | 

1. AE 



<Set values> 



1 



AE mode 



Text mode 



Text/Photo mode 
Photo mode 



Purpose 



Adjustment 



Function (Content) Used to adjust the copy density correction in the 
SPF/DSPF copy mode for the document table 
copy mode. This adjustment is made so that the 
copy density becomes the same as that in the 
document table copy mode. 



Section 



Item 



Picture quality 



Operation/Procedure 1) The exposure correction of OC and SPF is 
performed. The current set value is displayed 
on the right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set with 10 digit key pad. 
(Default 128, set range -255) 

3) Add "Set value - 128" to the shading 
adjustment value (SIM 46-17). 



46-19 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust gamma (density gradient) in the 
auto copy mode and to set the density detection 
area, and to set the image process mode. 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Change the control method of exposure 
mode. 

The current set value is displayed on the right 
of each item. (Set value 1) 

2) Set with 10 digit key pad. (AE mode) 

3) Set with 10 digit key pad. (AE fixed mode) 



SIMULATION 46-20 

OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START 

ISPF(ODD) 

2. SPF (EVEN) 

3. DSPF I 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-20 



OC/SPF EXP. ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-255, AND PRESS 

START. 

LSPF(ODD) 



<Set value> 



1 



SPF (surface CCD odd pixel) 



2 SPF (surface CCD even pixel) 



DSPF (back surface) 



SIMULATION 46-19 



EXP. MODE SETUP . SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. AEMODE 

2. AE STOP MODE 



Select 1 , and 



press | [START]key. | Press|[CUSTOM SETT^GTk^ 
* I 



SIMULATION 46-19 

EXP. MODE SETUP . INPUT VALUE 1-2, AND PRESS START 

1. AE MODE 



Select 2, and 



press |[START] key] 



Press 
press 



[START] key| o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] ke"yj 



SIMULATION 46-19 
EXP. MODE SETUP. 
2. AE STOP MODE 



INPUT VALUE 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-44 



46-21 



46-23 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level. 
(1 mode auto adjustment) 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Select the exposure mode to be set. 
(Scanner auto adjustment) 

The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 



The set value is changed only, and printing is not performed. 



SIMULATION 46-21 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET). PRESS START. 

0. SCANNER EXP. LEVEL R5] 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press [[START] key| or 

| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-21 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(AUTO SET), INPUT VALUE 0-99, 

AND PRESS START. 

0. SCANNER EXP. LEVEL 



<Set value> 



| Scanner mode exposure setup 



46-22 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to 
make individual setup. (Normal mode) 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Select the exposure mode to be set. 
(Scanner normal text mode individual 
adjustment) 

The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 



The set value is changed only, and printing is not performed. 



SIMULATION 46-22 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS 

START. 

0. AUTO EH 1 . LIGHT B3 2.DARK WS 



Select -2 and 



P ress |[START]ke7l Press |[START]"ki^|or 



| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-22 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(NORMAL), INPUT VALUE 0-99, 

AND PRESS START. 

0. AUTO E9I 



<Set value> 



Auto 



1 



Bright 



Dark 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to 
make individual setup. (Small text mode) 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Select the exposure mode to be set. 

(Scanner small text mode individual adjustment) 
The current set value is highlighted on the right of 
each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 



The set value is changed only, and printing is not performed. 



SIMULATION 46-23 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(FINE). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START. 

0. AUTO 1. LIGHT gj 2.DARK 

3. AUTO(H) 4. LIGHT(H) B 5.DARK(H)E 



Select -5 and 



press |[START] key.| 



Press [[START] key| or 

| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-23 



EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(FINE), INPUT VALUE 0-99, 
AND PRESS START. 
0. AUTO 



<Set value> 






Auto 


3 


Auto (half tone) 


1 


Bright 


4 


Bright (Half tone) 


2 


Dark 


5 


Dark (Half tone) 



46-24 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to 
make individual setup. (Fine mode) 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Select the exposure mode to be set. 
(Scanner fine mode individual adjustment) 
The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 



The set value is changed only, and printing is not performed. 



SIMULATION 46-24 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(SUPER FINE). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS 

START. 

0. AUTO gj 1. LIGHT g] 2.DARK 

3. AUTO(H) | 4. LIGHT(H) S 5.DARK(H)[j 



Select -5 and 



press |[START] key.| 



[START] key|or 



[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-24 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(SUPER FINE), INPUT VALUE 0-99, 
AND PRESS START. HTSI 

0. AUTO HilSJ 



<Set value> 






Auto 


3 


Auto (half tone) 


1 


Bright 


4 


Bright (Half tone) 


2 


Dark 


5 


Dark (Half tone) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-45 



46-25 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner exposure level and to 
make individual setup. (Super fine mode) 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1 ) Select the exposure mode to be set. 
(Scanner super fine mode individual 
adjustment) 

The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. (Set value) 

2) Set the exposure level with 10 digit key pad. 
Press P to store the set value. 

(Default 50, set range - 99) 



The set value is changed only, and printing is not performed. 



SIMULATION 46-25 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(ULTRA FINE). SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS 

START. 

0. AUTO g3 1. LIGHT gjl 2.DARK 

3. AUTO(H) | 4. LIGHT(H) g 5.DARK(H)[j 



Selec t -5 and 
press |[START] key.| 



Press [[START] key| or 

| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 46-25 

EXP. LEVEL SETUP SCANNER(ULTRA FINE), INPUT VALUE 0-99, 
AND PRESS START. ■3S1 

0. AUTO HSIIJ 



<Set value> 






Auto 


1 


Bright 


2 


Dark 


3 


Auto (half tone) 


4 


Bright (Half tone) 


5 


Dark (Half tone) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-46 



cList of set values 1> 



Main code 48 



48-1 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the copy magnification ratio 
(main scan direction, sub scan direction). 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the magnification ratio correction. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 

3) The greater the set value is, the greater the 
correction is. 

1 step : 0.1% adjustment 

4) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1 ) 

5) Select the paper feed tray. (Set value : 2) 

6) Set the scan magnification ratio. 
(Set value: 3) 



Paper feed tray selection 



1 



Copy start (Default) 



2 Print magnification ratio 

_3 Main scan magnification ratio (CCD) 

4 Sub scan magnification ratio (CCD) 



SPF surface magnification ratio (sub scan) 



SPF back magnification ratio (CIS main scan) 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



TRAY1 



TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



Above + 10 becomes the duplex mode (DD), making duplex copy. 
<List of set values 3> 



| Set range 



25 - 400% 



SIMULATION 48-1 

MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION BJE 

3.CCD(MAIN) E3 4.CCD(SUB) ^ 5. SPF(SUB) Eil 

6. CIS(MAIN) i?l 



Select other than - 2, 



ahdpress | [START] ke -y] Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key] 
* I 



SIMULATION 48-1 



MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 
3. CCD(MAIN) 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key.| Press |[START] key.| 
1 



IE 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 48-1 

MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING. 



Select 0, and 



press |[START] key] 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 48-1 



MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 

(ABOVE +10 : DUPLEX MODE) 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |or 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 48-1 
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT. 
(MAGNIFICATION) 
INPUT 25-400(%) 



48-5 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the exposure motor speed. 


Section 


Scanner (reading) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


1) The current set value is displayed on the right 
of each item. 

2) Set the exposure level with 1 digit key pad. 

3) Press START to store the set value. 
(Default 50, set range - 99) 



SIMULATION 48-5 



MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START. 
0. MIR(220) |^1.MIR(169) 
2. MIR(110) 3 3. MIR(55) 

4. SPF(220) 51 5. SPF(110) 



Selec t -5 and 
press |[START] key.| 



Press ][SJARTT_key| or 

| [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 48-5 

SCAN MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 

START. 

0. MIR(220) 



<List of display values> 



Mirror motor (220mm/sec) 



1 Mirror motor (1 68.7mm) 

2 Mirror motor (1 1 0mm/sec) 



3 Mirror motor (55mm/sec) 



SPF motor (220mm/sec) 



SPF motor (110mm/sec) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-47 



=List of set values 1> 



Main code 50 



50-1 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the copy image position and the 
void area (image loss) on print paper in the copy 
mode. (A similar adjustment can be made with 
SIM 50-2 (simple method).) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the copy lead edge adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1) 

4) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-1 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION [El 

3. RRCA El 4 - RRCB El 5 - DENBm 
6. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) Qj] 7. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) El 

8. DENA El 9- FR VOID El 



Select other than - 2, 



andpress | [START]ke ^ Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key] 
* I 



SIMULATION 50-1 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 

3. RRCA 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



t 



I 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-1 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



h 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 50-1 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press | [START] key| or E 

p ress |[CUSTQME SETTING] ke'yj 



SIMULATION 50-1 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. 
(MAGNIFICATION) 
INPUT 25-400(%) 









Default 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 ~5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 


- 


2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup 


- 


25 ~ 400 


3 


RRCA 


Document scan start 
position adjustment 


50 


0-99 


4 


RRCB 


Resist roller clutch ON 
timing adjustment value 


50 


0-99 


5 


DENB 


Rear edge void quantity 
adjustment value 


35 


0-99 


6 


IMAGE 
LOSS(LEAD) 


Lead edge image loss 
quantity set value 


15 


0-99 


7 


IMAGE 
LOSS(SIDE) 


Side image loss quantity 
set value 


20 


0-99 


8 


DENA 


Lead edge void quantity set 
value 


35 


0-99 


9 


FR_VOIDFR 


Void quantity adjustment 
value 


35 


0-99 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



TRAY1 



TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 
Manual feed 



cList of set values 3> 



| Set range 



25 - 400% 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-48 



cList of set values 1> 



50-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the copy image position and the 

void area (image loss) on print paper in the copy 

mode. 

(This simulation is a simpler procedure compared 

to the similar adjustment using SIM 50-1 .) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the copy lead edge adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1 ) 

4) Set the scan magnification ratio. 
(Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-2 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 0-9, AND PRESS START 
0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION Ejjj] 

3. L1 ggj 4. L2 |[g 5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD) Q-] 

6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE) g3 

7. DENB EjJ 8. DENA^g 9. FR_VOID Qj] 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press pTAJtJI^I Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 50-2 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START 

3. L1 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

4 



IE 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-2 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). NOW COPYING. 



press |[START] key.| 



lj 



Press |[START] key| or E E 

p ress |[CUSTQME SETTING] ke'yj 



SIMULATION 50-2 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press |[START] key| or 

p ress |[CUSTQME SETTING] ke'yj 



SIMULATION 50-2 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(CALC). 

(MAGNIFICATION) 

INPUT 25-400(%) 









Default 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 ~5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 




2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup 


- 


25 ~ 400 


3 


L1 


Document scan start 
position adjustment 


- 


0-999 


4 


L2 


Resist roller clutch ON 
timing adjustment value 


- 


0-999 


5 


IMAGE LOSS 
(LEAD) 


Rear edge void quantity 
adjustment value 


15 


0-99 


6 


IMAGE LOSS 
(SIDE) 


Lead edge image loss 
quantity set value 


20 


0-99 


7 


DENB 


Side image loss quantity 
set value 


35 


0-99 


8 


DENA 


Lead edge void quantity 
set value 


35 


0-99 


9 


FR_VOIDFR 


Void quantity adjustment 
value 


35 


0-99 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



TRAY1 



TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 
Manual feed 



<List of set values 3> 



| Set range 



25 - 400% 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-49 



<List of set values 1> 



50-6 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Copy lead edge adjustment (DSPF) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-6 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS START. 
0. TRAY SELECT || 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION [Qj] 

3. SIDE1 gj 4. SIDE2 

5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE1 

6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE1 

7. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE2 

8. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE2 

9. REAR LOSS SIDE1 



10. REAR LOSS SIDE2 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press pTAJflkeTI Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
t I 



SIMULATION 50-6 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS START. 

3. SIDE1 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 

T 



t 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key[ 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-6 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). NOW COPYING. 



Se lec t 0, and 
press | [START] key] 



Press 
press 



[START] key| or j 



[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"yj 



SIMULATION 50-6 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 

(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] key] 




Press j [START] key| or z 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] ke"y] 



SIMULATION 50-6 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF). 

(MAGNIFICATION) 

INPUT 25-200(%) 









Defauult 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 -5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 


- 


2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup (25 - 400%) 


- 


25 ~ 200 


3 


SIDE 1 


Document front scan start 
position adjustment 


50 


0-99 


4 


SIDE 2 


Document back scan start 
position adjustment 


50 


0-99 


5 


IMAGE LOSS 
(LEAD) SIDE 1 


Front lead edge image loss 
set value 


15 


0-99 


6 


IMAGE LOSS 
(SIDE) SIDE 1 


Front side image loss set 
value 


20 


0-99 


7 


IMAGE LOSS 
(LEAD) SIDE 2 


Back lead edge image loss 
set value 


15 


0-99 


8 


IMAGE LOSS 
(SIDE) SIDE 2 


Back side image loss set 
value 


20 


0-99 


9 


REAR LOSS 
SIDE1 


Front rear edge image loss 
set value 





0-20 


10 


REAR LOSS 
SIDE2 


Back rear edge image loss 
set value 





0-20 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



cList of set values 2> 



1 


TRAY1 


11 


TRAY1 with Duplex 


2 


TRAY2 


12 


TRAY2 with Duplex 


3 


TRAY3 


13 


TRAY3 with Duplex 


4 


TRAY4 


14 


TRAY4 with Duplex 


5 


Manual feed 


15 


Manual feed with Duplex 



<List of set values 3> 



| Set range 



25 - 200% 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-50 



cList of set values 1> 



50-7 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Copy lead edge adjustment (Simple method) 
(DSPF) 


Section 




Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the SPF copy lead edge adjustment. 
(Simple method) 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1 ) 

4) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

5) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-7 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC). SELECT 0-10, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION 



3. L4 QJ 4.L5 

5. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE1 

6. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE1 

7. IMAGE LOSS(LEAD)SIDE2 

8. IMAGE LOSS(SIDE)SIDE2 £ 

9. REAR LOSS SIDE1 Q 10. REAR LOSS SIDE2 O 



Select other than - 2, 



andpress | [START]ke ^ Press| [CUSTQM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 50-7 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC). INPUT VALUE 0-999, AND PRESS 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



L 



i 



Press |[CUSTQM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-7 



LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC). NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press 
press 



[START] keyj or 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 50-7 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC). SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 

(ABOVE+10: DUPLEX MODE) 



Selec t 2, and 
press jjSTART] key] 




Press 
press 



[START] key |or 



[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 50-7 

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(SPF CALC) 

(MAGNIFICATION) 

INPUT 25-200(%) 









Defauult 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 -5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 


- 


2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup (25 - 400%) 


200 


25 ~ 200 


3 


L4 


Distance from the front lead 
edge of copy image to the 
scale of 10mm. 
(SPF: 200%) 


- 


0-999 


4 


L5 


Distance from the back lead 
edge of copy image to the 
scale of 10mm. 
(SPF: 200%) 


- 


0-999 


5 


IMAGE LOSS 
(LEAD) SIDE 1 


Front lead edge image loss 
set value 


15 


0-99 


6 


IMAGE LOSS 
(SIDE) SIDE 1 


Front side image loss set 
value 


20 


0-99 


7 


IMAGE LOSS 
(LEAD) SIDE 2 


Back lead edge image loss 
set value 


15 


0-99 


8 


IMAGE LOSS 
(SIDE) SIDE 2 


Back side image loss set 
value 


20 


0-99 


9 


REAR LOSS 
SIDE1 


Front rear edge image loss 
set value 





0-20 


10 


REAR LOSS 
SIDE2 


Back rear edge image loss 
set value 





0-20 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



1 


TRAY1 


11 


TRAY1 with Duplex 


2 


TRAY2 


12 


TRAY2 with Duplex 


3 


TRAY3 


13 


TRAY3 with Duplex 


4 


TRAY4 


14 


TRAY4 with Duplex 


5 


Manual feed 


15 


Manual feed with Duplex 



<List of set values 3> 



Set range 



25 - 200% 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-51 



<List of set values 1> 



50-10 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the copy image center position. 
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.) 


Section 


Image process (ICU) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the print off-center adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) When the value of UNIT:0.1mm/STEP is 
increased, the image is shifted toward the 
rear side. 

4) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1) 

5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

6) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-10 

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1. COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION [Ej] 

3. TRAY1 gj] 4. TRAY2 gj] 5.TRAY3/LCC1 gj] 
6. TRAY4/LCC2 Ejl 7. BPT El 8.ADU El 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] k iy] Press| [CUSTOM SETTING] key. | 
* I 



SIMULATION 50-10 

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 

START. 

3. TRAY1 



Select 1, and 



press |[START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



It 



I 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-10 



PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] keyj 



Press 
press 



[START] key |o 



[CUSTOME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 50-10 

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1.TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 

(ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE) 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] keyj 




Press |[START] keyj or 

p ress |[CUSTOME SETTING] ke'y] 



SIMULATION 50-10 

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. 

(MAGNIFICATION) 

INPUT 25-400(%) 









Default 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 ~5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 




2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup (25 - 400%) 


100 


25 ~ 400 


3 


TRAY1 


Tray 1 adjustment 


50 


0-99 


4 


TRAY2 


Tray 2 adjustment 


50 


0-99 


5 


TRAY3 


Tray 3 adjustment 


50 


0-99 


6 


TRAY4 


Tray 4 adjustment 


50 


0-99 


7 


BPT 


Manual feed tray adjustment 


50 


0-99 


8 


ADU 


Adjustment in refeed from 
ADU 


50 


0-99 


<List of display values 1> 


Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 


<List of set values 2> 


1 


TRAY1 


2 


TRAY2 


3 


TRAY3/LCC1 


4 


TRAY4/LCC2 


5 


Manual feed 



The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial 

screen. 

At the above value + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD), 

making duplex copies. 

<List of set values 3> 



| Set range 



25 - 400% 



(Adjustment procedure) 

1) Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment, 
set the magnification ratio, and enter the adjustment item. 

2) After entering the adjustment value, press START, and printing is 
started. 

3) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the copy. 
Repeat procedure 2) until a satisfactory result is obtained. 

Note: When adjusting the off-center of LCC1 , set only the left tray of LCC. 
When adjusting the off-center of LCC2, set only the right tray of 
LCC. This is because there is no distinction between right and left 
in selection of a tray. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-52 



cList of set values 1> 



50-12 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the reading image center 
position. (Adjusted for each document mode.) 


Section 


Image process (ICU) 


Item 


Picture quality 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the document print off-center 
adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1 ) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) When the value of UNIT:0.1mm/STEP is 
increased, the image is shifted toward the 
front side. 

4) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1 ) 

5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 

6) Set the scan magnification ratio. (Set value: 3) 



SIMULATION 50-12 

ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-5, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECT Q 1 . COPY START 

2. MAGNIFICATION |^ 

3. PLATEN EEI 4.SPFSIDE1 El 5. SPF SIDE2 El 



Select other than 0-2, 



and press | [START] to y] Press| [CUSTOM SETTING] key. | 
t I 



SIMULATION 50-12 

ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 

START. 

3. PLATEN 



press | [START] key] Press |[START] key.| 



It 



I 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 50-12 



ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. NOW COPYING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press | [START] key| or = = 

p ress |[CUSTOME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 50-12 

ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1-15, AND PRESS START 

(FEED TRAY) 

1 . TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 4. TRAY4 

5. BPT 

(ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE) 



Selec t 2, and 
press |[START] keyj 




Press | [START] key| or 

p ress |[CUSTOME SETTING] keyj 



SIMULATION 50-12 

ORIGINAL OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. 

(MAGNIFICATION) 

INPUT 25-400(%) 









Default 


Set range 





TRAY SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection 


- 


1 ~5 


1 


COPY START 


Copy start (Initial value) 


- 




2 


MAGNIFICATION 


Print magnification ratio 
setup (25 - 400%) 


100 


25 ~ 400 


3 


PLATEN 


OC mode adjustment 


50 


0-99 


4 


SPFSIDE1 SPF 


Front surface adjustment 


50 


0-99 


5 


SPFSIDE2SPF 


Back surface adjustment 


50 


0-99 



<List of display values 1> 



Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



<List of set values 2> 



J TRAY1 

2 TRAY2 



TRAY3 



TRAY4 



Manual feed 



The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial 

screen. 

At the above value + 10, the SPF enters the duplex mode (DD), 

making duplex copies. 

<List of set values 3> 



Set range 



25 - 400% 



(Adjustment procedure) 



1 ) Select a paper feed tray to be used in the adjustment, 
set the magnification ratio, and enter the adjustment item. 

2) After entering the adjustment value, press START, 
and printing is started. 

3) Check the off-center (distance from the paper edge) of the copy. 
Repeat procedure 2) until a satisfactory result is obtained. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-53 



<List of set values 1> 



Main code 51 



51-2 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper on 
the resist roller in each section (machine paper 
feed, duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed). 
(This adjustment is required when the print 
image position varies or when paper jam occurs 
frequently.) 


Section 


Paper transport 

(paper exit, switchback, transport) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the resist quantity adjustment. 

1) The current set value is highlighted on the 
right of each item. In this screen, be sure to 
select "1 : COPY START." (Set value: 1) 

2) Enter the correction value with 10 digit key 
pad. 

Press P to store the set value. 

3) When the value is increased by 1, the resist 
quantity is changed by 1 ms. 

4) Press START to start copying and store the 
set value. (Display value: 1) 

5) Select a paper feed tray. (Set value 2) 



SIMULATION 51-2 

RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 0-8, AND PRESS START. 

0. TRAY SELECt|| 1. PRINT START 

2. TRAYira 3. TRAY2 gj 4. DESK gj 

5. BPT ^JS. ADU EE1 

7. SPF(HIGH)lffl 8. SPF(LOW)^ 



Select or 1 , 



and press | [START] ke ^] Press|[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 
* I 



SIMULATION 51-2 

RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS 

START. 

1 . TRAY1 



Selec t 1 , and 
press |[START] key] 



Lj 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
Or copying is terminated. 



SIMULATION 51-2 

RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. NOW PRINTING. 



Selec t 0, and 
press |[START] key] 



l\ 



Press | [START] key| or = 

press |[CUSTQME SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 51-2 








RESIST TIMING ADJUSTMENT. 


SELECT 1- 


15 


AND PRESS START. 


(FEED TRAY) 








1 . TRAY1 2. TRAY2 3. TRAY3 


4. TRAY4 






5. BPT 








(ABOVE +10: DUPLEX MODE) 















45PPM 


35PPM 





TRAY 
SELECT 


Paper feed tray selection (1-5) 






1 


PRINT 
START 


Copy start (Initial value) 






2 


TRAY1 


Tray 1 resist adjustment value 


60 


65 


3 


TRAY2 


Tray 2 resist adjustment value 


50 


55 


4 


DESK 


Desk resist adjustment value 


50 


55 


5 


BPT 


Manual tray resist adjustment value 


55 


60 


6 


ADU 


ADU resist adjustment value 


50 


55 


7 


SPF(HIGH) 


SPF resist adjustment value 
(High speed) 


50 


50 


8 


SPF(LOW) 


SPF resist adjustment value 
(Low speed) 


50 


50 



<List of display values 


1> 




Normal display 


NOW COPYING 


ERROR display 


Door open 


DOOR OPEN. 


Jam 


JAM 


Paper empty 


PAPER EMPTY. 



cList of set values 2> 



1 


TRAY1 


11 


TRAY1 with Duplex 


2 


TRAY2 


12 


TRAY2 with Duplex 


3 


TRAY3 


13 


TRAY3 with Duplex 


4 


TRAY4 


14 


TRAY4 with Duplex 


5 


Manual feed 


15 


Manual feed with Duplex 



The selected tray is registered as an initial set value in the initial 
screen. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-54 



Main code 53 



53-6 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the DSPF width detection level. 


Section 


SPF/DSPF 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Adjust the machine SPF document tray size 
adjustment. 

1) Extend the guide to MAX. position, select 1, 
and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

2) Move the guide to A4R position, select 2, 
and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

3) Move the guide to A5R position, select 3, 
and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

press CUSTOM SETTING to return to the 

initial screen. 

4) Move the guide to MIN. position, select 4, 
and press START. 

When COMPLETE is displayed, 

the adjustment is completed. 
If ERROR is displayed in procedures 1) - 4), 
repeat the adjustment again. 



This adjustment is performed only when the width detection volume 

is replaced. 

Normally use SIM 53-7 for input. 



SIMULATION 53-6 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. SELECT 1 -4, AND PRESS START 

1. MAX. POSITION 

2. POSITION 1 

3. POSITION 2 

4. MIN. POSITION 



T 



Select 1, and 



press pTART] key] Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key[ = 



f 



SIMULATION 53-6 



SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MAX. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Select 2, and 



press|[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key| = 



SIMULATION 53-6 



SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 1 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Select 3, and 



press|[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key} 



SIMULATION 53-6 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

POSITION 2 ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



Select 4, and 



press|[START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOME SETTING] key} 



53-7 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to enter the adjustment value of SPF width 
detection. 


Section 


DSPF 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Enter the adjustment value (indicated on the 
back of SPF) of SPF document tray size. 



SIMULATION 53-7 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION: 

2. POSITION 1: 

3. POSITION 2: 

4. MIN. POSITION: 



1 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 53-7 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT (MANUAL). INPUT VALUE 0-1023, AND 

PRESS START. 

1. MAX. POSITION 



<List of set values> 







Initial value 


Range 


1 


Max. width 


66 


0-1023 


2 


Adjustment point 1 


456 


3 


Adjustment point 2 


713 


4 


Min. width 


791 



SIMULATION 53-6 

SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT. 

MIN. POSITION ... COMPLETE (or "ERROR") 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-55 



Main code 60 



60-1 



Main code 61 



61-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the ICU (DRAM) operation 

(read/write). 

(SIMM MEMORY/ON BOARD MEMORY) 


Section 


Image process (ICU) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform read/write check of the ICU image 
DRUM. After starting, NOW CHECKING is 
displayed during checking. When the read/write 
check is normally completed, OK is displayed. 
If an error occurs, NG is displayed. 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the laser scan 
unit. 


Section 


PCU 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Check the LSU. Turn on the LSU and check that 
the sync signal (HSYNC) is delivered or not. 
After starting, NOW CHECKING is displayed 
during checking. When the test is normally 
completed, OK is displayed. When an error 
occurs, NG is displayed. 



SIMULATION 60-1 

DRAM TEST. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

1. ICU DRAM 

2. ASIC DRAM 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 60-1 

DRAM TEST. - NOW CHECKING. 

1.ICU DRAM 



SIMULATION 60-1 



Check completed 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 



DRAM TEST. - OK (or NG) 
1.ICU DRAM 



cList of set values> 



1 



ICU DRAM Image memory for ERDH 



ASIC DRAM Image memory for ASIC 



SIMULATION 61-1 

LSU TEST. PRESS START. 

1.LSU 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 61-1 

LSU TEST. - NOW CHECKING. 

1. LSU 



Check completed 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 61-1 

LSU TEST. -OK(orNG) 

1. LSU 



61-2 



Purpose 



Adjustment 



Function (Content) Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) 
in the copy mode. 



Section PCU 

Item Operation 

Operation/Procedure Enter the laser power set value in copying, 
and press START to store it. 



SIMULATION 61-2 

LASER POWER SETTING (COPY). SELECT 1-4, AND PRESS START. 

1. AE H 2. CHARA T 

3. MIX H 4. PHOTO 



I 



Press | [START] key] 
J 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 61-2 

LASER POWER SETTING(COPY). INPUT VALUE 1-165, AND PRESS START 

1. AE 



<List of set values> 









Initial value 


Set range 


1 


Auto exposure mode 


45PPM 


104 


104- 150 
(45PPM) 
80- 150 
(35PPM) 


35PPM 


80 


2 


Text mode 


45PPM 


104 


35PPM 


80 


3 


Text/Photo mode 


45PPM 


104 


35PPM 


80 


4 


Photo mode 


45PPM 


104 


35PPM 


80 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-56 



61-3 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the scanner (exposure) laser 
power (absolute value) in the FAX reception 
mode. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


PCU 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Set the laser power in FAX reception. 

Enter the set value and press Start to store it. 



SIMULATION 61-3 

LASER POWER SETTING (FAX). PRESS START. 

1. FAX g 



i 



Press |[START] key] 
^ 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 61-3 

LASER POWER SETTING (FAX). INPUT VALUE 1-165, AND PRESS START. 

1. FAX 



<List of set values> 









Initial value 


Set range 


1 


FAX reception 


45PPM 


104 


104- 150 
(45PPM) 
80-150 
(35PPM) 


35PPM 


80 



61-4 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the laser power (absolute value) 
in the printer mode. 


Section 


PCU 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Set the laser power value in the printer mode. 
Enter the value and press START to store it. 



SIMULATION 61-4 

LASER POWER SETTING (PRINTER). PRESS START. 

1. PRINTER 



Press |[START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 61-4 

LASER POWER SETTING (PRINTER). INPUT VALUE 1-165, AND PRESS 

START. 

1. PRINTER 



<List of set values> 









Initial value 


Set range 


1 


PRINTER 


45PPM 


104 


1 04 - 1 50 
(45PPM) 
80-150 
(35PPM) 


35PPM 


80 



Main code 62 



62-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the hard disk operation 

(read/write). 

(Only for the model with the hard disk) 

(Partial check) 


Section 


Memory 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the partial check of read/write of the 
hard disk. EXECUTING is displayed during 
check. When check is normally completed, 
OK is displayed. 
When an error occurs, NG is displayed. 



SIMULATION 62-2 
HDD R/W TEST. 
ARE YOU SURE? 
LYES 
2. NO 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 



SIMULATION 62-2 

HDD R/W TEST. EXECUTING.. 



After completion 

A 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 62-2 

HDD R/W TEST.OK. (or NG) 



<List of set values> 



1 Execution 
~2 Cancel 



62-3 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the hard disk operation 

(read/write). 

(Only for the model with the hard disk) 

(All area check) 


Section 


Memory 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform the all area check of read/write of the 
hard disk. EXECUTING is displayed during 
check. When check is normally completed, 
OK is displayed. When an error occurs, 
NG is displayed. 



SIMULATION 62-3 
HDD R/W TEST ALL. 
ARE YOU SURE? 
LYES 
2. NO 



Press | [START] key.| 



SIMULATION 62-3 

HDD R/W TEST. EXECUTING.. 



After completion 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 62-3 

HDD R/W TEST.OK. (or NG) 



<List of set values> 



1 



Execution 



Cancel 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-57 



Main code 63 



63-2 



63-1 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the shading correction result. 
(The shading correction result is displayed.) 


Section 


Scanner (exposure) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The latest shading data are displayed. 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to execute shading. 


Section 


Scanner (exposure) 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Execute shading. During shading, 

EXECUTING is displayed. 

When shading is completed, COMPLETED is 

displayed. 



SIMULATION 63-1 
SHADING DATA DISPLAY. 
(CCD) 




ODD OFFSET: 
ODD AVE.: 
EVEN OFFSET: 
EVEN AVE.: 



OFFSET: 
AVE.: 



E 




OFFSET: 
DEV: 



SIMULATION 63-2 

SHADING EXECUTION.SELECT1-3, AND PRESS START. 

1.0C SHADING 

2. DSPF SHADING 

3. CCD TEST SHADING 



i 



<Set values> 



Press | [START] key.| 
^ 



SIMULATION 63-2 
SHADING EXECUTING.. 
1.0C SHADING 



CCD data 


Values 


Description 


ODD GAIN 


Pixel gain adjustment value 


EVEN GAIN 


Pixel gain adjustment value 


ODD MAX 


Pixel MAX 


ODDMIN 


Pixel MIN 


ODD AVE 


Od pixel average 


EVEN MAX 


Even pixel MAX 


EVEN MIN 


Even pixel MIN 


EVEN AVE 


Even pixel average 


ODD OFFSET 


Black offset 


EVEN OFFSET 


Even offset 


ODD DEV 


Odd standard deviation 


EVEN DEV 


Even standard deviation 


CIS data : Only when DSPF installed 


Values 


Description 


GAIN 


Gain adjustment value 


MAX 


Pixel MAX 


MIN 


Pixel MIN 


AVE 


Pixel average 


OFFSET 


Black offset 


DEV 


Standard deviation 



After completion 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| to stop. 



SIMULATION 63-2 
SHADING COMPLETED. 
1.0C SHADING 



<List of set values> 



J OC analog data correction and shading correction data making 

2 DSPF analog level correction and shading correction data 
making 



Execution of CCD data taking test 



63-7 



Purpose 



Adjustment 



Function (Content) Used to adjust the white plate scan start position 

in shading white correction. 
Section Scanner (exposure) 



Item 



Operation 



Operation/Procedure Adjust the white plate scan start position in 

shading white correction. Enter the adjustment 
value and press START to store it. 



SIMULATION 63-7 

SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT. PRESS START. 

1.CCD Q 



I 



Press |[START] key] 

i 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 63-7 

SHADING POSITION ADJUSTMENT INPUT VALUE 1-16, AND PRESS 
START. ^^w« 

1.CCD Hf] 



<Set value> 







Initial value 


Range 


1 


CCD scan 


6 


1-16 



(1 count : 0.5 mm) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-58 



cList of set values> 



Main code 64 



64-1 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of the printer 

section (self printing). 

(The print pattern, paper feed mode, print mode, 

print quantity, density can be changed 

optionally.) 


Section 


Printer 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Perform self printing. The current set data is 
displayed on the right side of the menu. 



SIMULATION 64-1 




SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 0-7, AND PRESS START. 




O.TRAY SELECT 


[1 1. PRINT START 




2. PRINT PATTERN 

4.MULTI 

6. LEVEL 


m 3.DENSITY :Q 
5.MODE :Q 
7.DUPLEX [] 


m\ 



Selec t 1, and 
press |[START] key] 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 






(3) 



(4) 



(5) 



SIMULATION 64-1 

SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

(PRINT PATTERN) 

INPUT 50-99. 



SIMULATION 64-1 

SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

(DENSITY) 

1-255 



SIMULATION 64-1 

SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

(MULTI COUNT) 

1-999 



SIMULATION 64-1 






SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1 -8 


AND PRESS START. 




(MODE) 






1 .STANDARD 2.SMOOTHING 


3.TONERSAVE 4.HALF TONE 


5.SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE 


6.SMOOTHING+ 


HALFTONE 


7.TONER SAVE+ HALF TONE 




^^^mt 


8. SMOOTHING+ TONER SAVE+ 


HALFTONE 


u 



(6) 



(0) 



(7) 



SIMULATION 64-1 

SELF PRINT MODE. INPUT VALUE, AND PRESS START. 

(LEVEL) 

1-5 



SIMULATION 64-1 

SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 

(FEED TRAY) 

1 .TRAY1 2.TRAY2 3.TRAY3 4.TRAY4 5. BPT 



SIMULATION 64-1 



SELF PRINT MODE. SELECT 1-2, AND PRESS START. 

(DUPLEX) 

1.NO 2.YES 



SIMULATION 64-1 










SELF PRINT MODE. 


. EXECUTING... 








O.TRAY SELECT 




fl_ 








2. PRINT PATTERN 
4. MULTI 
6. LEVEL 




r 


3.DENSITY 

5.MODE 

7.DUPLEX 


D 

1 


B 






Paper feed tray 


1 : TRAY1 
2: TRAY2 
3:TRAY3 
4: TRAY4: 
5: MANUAL 


1 


Print execution 


Print is started with the set data. 


2 


Print pattern 


Refer to the print pattern. 


3 


Picture density 


Enable only when No. 79, 80, or 84 is selected. 


4 


Print quantity 


- 


5 


Print mode 


1 : Standard 

2: Smoothing ON 

3: Toner save ON 

4: Half tone ON 

5: Smoothing + Toner save 

6: Smoothing + Half tone 

7: Toner save + half tone 

8: Smoothing + Toner save + Half tone 


6 


Print level 


1 ~5 


7 


Duplex 


1 : Single print 
2: Duplex print 



<Print pattern> 



50 


Total surface 1 BY1 (Vertical) 


70 


Scaled print adjustment pattern 
(Vertical) 


51 


Total surface 1 BY1 
(Horizontal) 


71 


Grid pattern 


52 


Total surface 1 BY2 (Vertical) 


72 


Slant line 45 degrees 


53 


Total surface 1 BY2 
(Horizontal) 


73 


Slant line 26.6 degrees 


54 


Total surface 1 BY3 (Vertical) 


74 


Slant line 63.4 degrees 


55 


Total surface 1 BY3 
(Horizontal) 


75 


ID-BG pattern 


56 


Total surface 1 BY4 (Vertical) 


76 


Dot pattern 12.5% 


57 


Total surface 1 BY4 
(Horizontal) 


77 


Dot pattern 28% 


58 


Total surface 1 BY5 (Vertical) 


78 


Dot pattern 50% 


59 


Total surface 1 BY5 
(Horizontal) 


79 


Whole surface error diffusion 
background 


60 


Total surface 2BY2 (Vertical) 


70 


Whole surface dither process 
background 


61 


Total surface 2BY2 
(Horizontal) 


81 


1 block 128 pixels/ 
every 32 gradations 


62 


Total surface 2BY3 (Vertical) 


82 


1 block 1 28 pixels/ 
every 16 gradations 


63 


Total surface 2BY3 
(Horizontal) 


83 


1 block 128 pixels/ 
every 8 gradations 


64 


Whole surface background 
copy 


84 


Memory check pattern 


65 


Special pattern (Vertical) 


85 


Cleaning check pattern 


66 


1 block 128 pixels/ 
every 32 gradations 


86 


Offset check pattern 


67 


1 block 128 pixels/ 
every 16 gradations 


87 


Test B image (for aging) 


68 


1 block 128 pixels/ 
every 8 gradations 


88 


Printer 6% 


69 


1 1 -do t pattern 


89 


Printer 5% 






98 


List of setup values 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-59 



Main code 65 



Main code 66 



65-1 



66-1 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the touch panel 

(LCD display section) detecting position. 


Section 


Operation (display, operation) 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Adjust the coordinates of the touch panel. 
Press the four cross marks on the LCD, and the 
pressed mark will turn gray. When all four marks 
are pressed, the adjustment is completed. 



SIMULATION 65-1 
+ 

+ 



+ 
+ 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the FAX soft switch function. 




(Used to utilize the FAX soft switch function.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Set the Fax soft switch. 




(For details of the soft SW, refer to the AR-FX5 




Service Manual.) 




Entry of 1 - 8 only is effective. 




1) Specify the bit to be changed (highlighted) 




with a number. 




2) Press START to rewrite the setting. 



SIM 1 cannot be changed with this simulation. 



SIMULATION 66-1 

FAX SOFT SW. SELECT 2 - 80, AND PRESS START. 



65-2 



I 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the result of the touch panel 
(LCD display section) detecting position 
adjustment. (The coordinates are displayed.) 


Section 


Operation (display, operation) 


Item 




Operation/Procedure 


Check the touch panel. When the touch panel is 
pressed, the coordinates (dot conversion values) 
in X/Y directions are displayed. 



Press |[START] key] 

i 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 
or |[START] key] 



SIMULATION 66-1 

FAX SOFT SW. SETTING. INPUT DATA No(1-8), AND PRESS START. 

SOFTSW-2: 12 3 4 5 6 7 



00001001 



SIMULATION 65-2 








100 200 
,00 + + 


400 

40 _|_ 

300 

+ + 


500 


600 

+ 

+ 


140 1 


X: ^ 




+ 


180 | 


Y: ^ 




+ 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-60 



66-2 



66-3 



Purpose 


Data clear 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the FAX soft switch setup to the 
default. (Except for the adjustment values) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The current set value of SW1 is displayed. 
Entry of 1 - 8 only is effective. 

1) Specify the bit to be changed (highlighted) 
with a number. 

2) Select the country code, and press START to 
rewrite the setting. 

3) Select a number (1 - 2) with 10 digit key pad 
and press START to execute. 

1 : FAX soft SW clear 2: Not clear 

4) The soft switch (excluding the FAX adjustment 
value) corresponding to the selected country 
code is cleared. 

5) The selected country is highlighted. 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of FAX PWB 
memory (read/write). 

(This adjustment is required when replacing the 
PWB with a new one.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


Check the FAX PWB memory. 

When this simulation is executed, the error 

occurring address or the data line is displayed. 



SIMULATION 66-3 
FAX PWB MEMORY CHECK. 
MFP SRAM: CHECKING 
MFP FLASH: NO CHECK 
MFP OP. FLASH: NO CHECK 
MODEM EEPROM: NG:A0010000 
MODEM SRAM(G/A):NO CHECK 
MODEM SRAM: NG A11 
MODEM SDRAM: OK 



SIMULATION 66-2 



FAX SOFT SW.CLEAR (WIHTOUT ADJUSTMENT VALUE) 
INPUT COUNTRY CODE, AND PRESS START. 



12 3 4 5 6 7 



00000000 



<List of display values> 



Press j [START] key.| 



NO CHECK 


Not checked 


CHECKING 


Checking 


OK 


Check complete OK 


NG 


Check error 



<ltems> 



SIMULATION 66-2 



FAX SOFT SW. CLEAR. 
ARE YOU SURE? 

1:YES 
2:NO 



MFP SRAM (MFP control PWB) 


SRAM 


MFP FLASH (FAX l/F PWB) 


FLASH Memory (AR-MM9) 


MFP OP.FLASH (FAX l/F PWB) 




MODEM EEPROM (FAX PWB) 




MODEM SRAM(G/A) (FAX PWB) 




MODEM SRAM (FAX PWB) 




MODEM SDRAM (FAX PWB) 





<Country codes> 




Japan 





U.S.A. 


10110101 


Australia 


1001 


U.K 


10110100 


France 


111101 


Germany 


100 


Canada 


100000 


Netherlands 


1111011 



The codes other than the above are recognized as Japan. 
Conforms to Advisory Document T.35. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-61 



<List of set values> 



66-4 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation of data signal output 

in the FAX data output mode. 

(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 

Send level Odb (Max.) 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Signal output check (level Max.) 

When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed during 

execution of this simulation, execution is 

stopped. 

Enter a number and press START to change the 

signal. 



1 


No signal 


17 


12.0V33 


2 


33.6 V34 


18 


14.4 V1 7 


3 


31.2 V34 


19 


12.0 V17 


4 


28.8 V34 


20 


9.6 V1 7 


5 


26.4 V34 


21 


7.2 V17 


6 


24.0 V34 


22 


9.6 V29 


7 


21.6 V34 


23 


7.2 V29 


8 


19.2 V34 


24 


4.8 V27t 


9 


16.8 V34 


25 


2.4 V27t 


10 


14.4 V34 


26 


0.3 FLG 


11 


12.0 V34 


27 


CED2100 


12 


9.6 V34 


28 


CNG1100 


13 


7.2 V34 


29 


0.3 V21 


14 


4.8 V34 


30 


ANSam 


15 


2.4 V34 


31 


RINGER 


16 


14.4 V33 


32 


NoRBT 



Same 
display 



SIMULATION 66-4 

SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 

1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 

5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 

9.16.8V34 10.14.4V34 11.12.0V34 12.9.6V34 

13.7.2V34 14.4.8V34 15.2.4V34 16.14.4V33 

17.12.0 V33 18.14.4V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 

21.7.2 V1 7 22.9.6 V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t 

25.2.4V27t 26.0.3FLG 27.CED2100 28.CNG1100 

29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31. RINGER 32.No RBT 



I 



Press | [START] key.| 

i 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 



SIMULATION 66-4 



SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 

EXECUTING... 

1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 

5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 

9.16.8V34 10.14.4V34 11.12.0V34 12.9.6V34 

13.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 

17.12.0 V33 18.14.4V17 19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 

21.7.2V17 22.9.6V29 23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t 

25.2.4V27t 26.0.3FLG 27.CED2100 28.CNG1100 

29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 31. RINGER 32.No RBT 



Select |2 and press [START] key.| 



»■► 



3.31 .2 V34 4.28.8 V34 
7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 
11.12.0V34 12.9.6V34 
15.2.4 V34 1 6.14.4 V33 
19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 
23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t 
27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 
31. RINGER 32.No RBT 



SIMULATION 66-4 

SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 

EXECUTING... 

1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 

5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 

9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 

1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 

17.12.0 V33 18.14.4V17 

21.7.2V17 22.9.6V29 

25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 

29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 



Press |[CDSTOM SETTING] key] 



I 



SIMULATION 66-4 



SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK. 
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 
5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 
9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 
1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 
17.12.0 V33 18.14.4V17 
21.7.2V17 22.9.6V29 
25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 
29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 



(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 

3.31.2 V34 4.28.8 V34 

7.21.6 V34 8.19.2 V34 

11.12.0V34 12.9.6V34 

15.2.4 V34 16.14.4 V33 

19.12.0 V17 20.9.6 V17 

23.7.2 V29 24.4.8 V27t 

27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 

31. RINGER 32.No RBT 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-62 



cList of set values> 



66-5 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operations of data signal 
output in the FAX data output mode. 
(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 
Signals are sent in the send level set with the 
soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Signal output check 

(Send level is set with the soft SW.) 

When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed during 

execution of this simulation, 

execution is stopped. 

Enter a number and press START to change the 

kind of signal. 



1 


No signal 


17 


12.0 V33 


2 


33.6 V34 


18 


14.4 V1 7 


3 


31 .2 V34 


19 


12.0 V1 7 


4 


28.8 V34 


20 


9.6 V1 7 


5 


26.4 V34 


21 


7.2 V1 7 


6 


24.0 V34 


22 


9.6 V29 


7 


21.6 V34 


23 


7.2 V29 


8 


19.2 V34 


24 


4.8 V27t 


9 


16.8 V34 


25 


2.4 V27t 


10 


14.4 V34 


26 


0.3 FLG 


11 


12.0 V34 


27 


CED2100 


12 


9.6 V34 


28 


CNG1100 


13 


7.2 V34 


29 


0.3 V21 


14 


4.8 V34 


30 


ANSam 


15 


2.4 V34 


31 


RINGER 


16 


14.4 V33 


32 


NoRBT 



Same 

display 



SIMULATION 66-5 








SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK 


.(SOFT SW.) 


SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 


1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 


3.31.2 V34 


4.28.8 V34 


HI 


5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 


7.21.6 V34 


8.19.2 V34 


9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 


11.12.0V34 


12.9.6 V34 


1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 


15.2.4 V34 


16.14.4 V33 




17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 


19.12.0 V17 


20.9.6 V17 




21.7.2 V1 7 22.9.6 V29 


23.7.2 V29 


24.4.8 V27t 




25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 


27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 




29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 


31. RINGER 


32.No RBT 





66-6 



Press | [START] key.| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



* 




1 




SIMULATION 66-5 








SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) 


SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 


EXECUTING... 
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 


3.31.2 V34 


4.28.8 V34 


H 


5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 


7.21.6 V34 


8.19.2 V34 




9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 


11.12.0V34 


12.9.6 V34 




1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 


15.2.4 V34 


16.14.4 V33 




17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 


19.12.0 V17 


20.9.6 V17 




21.7.2 V1 7 22.9.6 V29 


23.7.2 V29 


24.4.8 V27t 




25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 


27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 




29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 


31. RINGER 


32.No RBT 





Select |2and press [START] key.| 



I 








SIMULATION 66-5 








SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK 


.(SOFT SW.) 


SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 


EXECUTING... 
1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 


3.31.2 V34 


4.28.8 V34 


H 


5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 


7.21.6 V34 


8.19.2 V34 


9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 


11.12.0V34 


12.9.6 V34 




1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 


15.2.4 V34 


16.14.4 V33 




17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 


19.12.0 V17 


20.9.6 V17 




21.7.2 V1 7 22.9.6 V29 


23.7.2 V29 


24.4.8 V27t 




25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 


27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 




29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 


31. RINGER 


32.No RBT 





Press [fc0STOM SETTING] key] 



I 



"■► 



SIMULATION 66-5 








SIGNAL OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) 


SELECT 1-32, AND PRESS START. 


1.NOSIGNAL 2.33.6 V34 


3.31.2 V34 


4.28.8 V34 


H 


5.26.4 V34 6.24.0 V34 


7.21.6 V34 


8.19.2 V34 


9.16.8 V34 10.14.4 V34 


11.12.0V34 


12.9.6 V34 


1 3.7.2 V34 14.4.8 V34 


15.2.4 V34 


16.14.4 V33 




17.12.0 V33 18.14.4 V17 


19.12.0 V17 


20.9.6 V17 




21.7.2 V1 7 22.9.6 V29 


23.7.2 V29 


24.4.8 V27t 




25.2.4 V27t 26.0.3 FLG 


27.CED2100 28.CNG 1100 




29.0.3 V21 30.ANSam 


31. RINGER 


32.No RBT 





Purpose 


User data output, check (display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to print the confidential password. 
(Used when the confidential password is 
forgotten.) (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The confidential pass code is printed. 

1) The currently selected data is displayed on 
the side of menu. 

2) The paper size is automatically selected by 
the size stored in the image memory. 



SIMULATION 66-6 

PASS CODE PRINT OUT. PRESS START 

1. PRINT START 


H 


■ i 

Select 1 and 1 


i ■ 


k 


press |[START] key.| 




If there is no data to print, 
^^^^™ return without printing. ^^ 




SIMULATION 66-6 

PASS CODE PRINT OUT.EXECUTING... 

1. PRINT START 



After completion of printing 



=Set value> 



1 



Print start 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-63 



66-7 



Purpose 


User data output, check (display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to print the image memory data 
(memory send, receive). 
(Only when FAX is installed. 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The content of image memory is printed. 

The paper size is automatically selected with the 

paper size stored in the image memory. 



SIMULATION 66-7 



IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT.PRESS START. 
1. PRINT START 



Select 1 and 


> 


k 


press [START] key.| 




(When 1 is selected) ., 






SIMULATION 66-7 

IMAGE MEMORY PRINT OUT.EXECUTING... 

1. PRINT START 



After completion of printing 



<Set value> 



1 



Print start 



66-8 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the output operation of the FAX 

sound signals. 

(Sound output IC operation check) 

Send level OdB (Max.) 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


A voice message is outputted. (Level 0) 

Enter a number during execution to change the 

signal. 

Press START to start sending a voice message. 

Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate. 



SIMULATION 66-8 








MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) 


SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START. 

1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 




3.MESSAGE1 | ^B 
6.MESSAGE4 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 




7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 




9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 




12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 




15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 




18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Select pTand press [START] key.| 



Same 
display 



f 


Press|[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 


SIMULATION 66-8 








MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) 


SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START.EXECUTING... 






3.MESSAGE1 | 
6.MESSAGE4 


1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 




4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 




7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 




9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 




12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 




15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 




18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Select [2~and press [START] key.| 



f 








SIMULATION 66-8 








MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) 


SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START.EXECUTING... 






3.MESSAGE1 | ^Q 
6.MESSAGE4 


1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 




4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 




7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 




9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 




12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 




15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 




18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Press |[CDSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-8 








MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(LEVEL MAX) 


SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START. 






^^__ 


1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 




3.MESSAGE1 | ^B 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 




6.MESSAGE4 


7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 




9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 




12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 




15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 




18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





<List of set values> 



1 


NONE 


NONE 


2 


PAUSE 


PAUSE 


3 


MESSAGE1 


MESSAGE1 


4 


MESSAGE2 


MESSAGE2 


5 


MESSAGE3 


MESSAGE3 


6 


MESSAGE4 


MESSAGE4 


7 


MESSAGE5 


MESSAGE5 


8 


MESSAGE6 


MESSAGE6 


9 


MESSAGE7 


MESSAGE7 


10 


MESSAGE8 


MESSAGE8 


11 


MESSAGE9 


MESSAGE9 


12 


MESSAGE10 


MESSAGE10 


13 


MESSAGE11 


MESSAGE11 


14 


MESSAGE12 


MESSAGE12 


15 


MESSAGE13 


MESSAGE13 


16 


MESSAGE14 


MESSAGE14 


17 


MESSAGE15 


MESSAGE15 


18 


ALARM 


ALARM 


19 


RINGER 


RINGER 


20 


EXTTEL.RINGER 


EXTTEL.RINGER 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-64 



cList of set values> 



66-9 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the output operation of the FAX 




sound signals. 




(Sound output IC operation check) 




(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


A voice message is outputted. 




(Send level is set with SW.) 




Enter a number during execution to change the 




signal. 




Press START to start sending a voice message. 




Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate. 



SIMULATION 66-9 






MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START. 

1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 


3.MESSAGE1 | ^B 
6.MESSAGE4 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 


7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 


9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 


12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 


15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 


18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Select pTand press [START] key.| 



Same 

display 



f 


Press|[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 


SIMULATION 66-9 






MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START.EXECUTING... 




3.MESSAGE1 | 
6.MESSAGE4 


1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 


7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 


9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 


12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 


15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 


18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Select [2~and press [START] key.| 



f 


SIMULATION 66-9 






MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START.EXECUTING... 




3.MESSAGE1 | ^B 
6.MESSAGE4 


1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 


7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 


9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 


12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 


15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 


18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





Press |[CDSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-9 






MESSAGE OUTPUT CHECK.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-20, AND PRESS 


START. 

1.NONE 


2.PAUSE 


3.MESSAGE1 | ^B 
6.MESSAGE4 


4.MESSAGE2 


5.MESSAGE3 


7.MESSAGE5 


8.MESSAGE6 


9.MESSAGE7 


10.MESSAGE8 


11.MESSAGE9 


12.MESSAGE10 


13.MESSAGE11 


14.MESSAGE12 


15.MESSAGE13 


16.MESSAGE14 


17.MESSAGE15 


18.ALARM 


19.RINGER 


20.EXT.TEL.RINGER 





1 


NONE 


NONE 


2 


PAUSE 


PAUSE 


3 


MESSAGE1 


MESSAGE1 


4 


MESSAGE2 


MESSAGE2 


5 


MESSAGE3 


MESSAGE3 


6 


MESSAGE4 


MESSAGE4 


7 


MESSAGE5 


MESSAGE5 


8 


MESSAGE6 


MESSAGE6 


9 


MESSAGE7 


MESSAGE7 


10 


MESSAGE8 


MESSAGE8 


11 


MESSAGE9 


MESSAGE9 


12 


MESSAGE10 


MESSAGE10 


13 


MESSAGE11 


MESSAGE11 


14 


MESSAGE12 


MESSAGE12 


15 


MESSAGE13 


MESSAGE13 


16 


MESSAGE14 


MESSAGE14 


17 


MESSAGE15 


MESSAGE15 


18 


ALARM 


ALARM 


19 


RINGER 


RINGER 


20 


EXTTELRINGER 


EXTTELRINGER 



66-10 



Purpose 


User data output, check (display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear all data of image memory 
(memory send, receive). Confidential data is 
also cleared. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The FAX image memory is cleared. 

1) Select an item with 10 digit key pad and press 
START. The following is executed and the 
display returns to the initial state. 

1 : Image memory clear 2: Not clear 

2) After completion of memory clear, reset. 



SIMULATION 66-1 
IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR. 
ARE YOU SURE ? 
LYES 
2. NO 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-65 



66-11 



66-12 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 

mode 300BPS. 

(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 

Send level OdB (Max.) 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


A signal of 300bps is outputted. (Level Max.) 

Enter a number during execution to change the 

signal. 

Press START to start sending a voice message. 

Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate. 



SIMULATION 66-11 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

1. NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



Select |l and press [START] key.| X 

XT Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-11 








300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT 


(LEVEL MAX) 


SELECT 1 


-6, AND PRESS 


START. 

EXECUTING... 

1. NO SIGNAL 2.11111 


3.11110 4.00000 


m\ 


5.010101 6.00001 









Same 
display 



Select [3~a~nd press [START] key.| 



SIMULATION 66-11 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

EXECUTING... 

1. NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



-»► 



SIMULATION 66-11 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

1. NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



<List of set values> 



1 


NO SIGNAL 


No signal 


2 


11111 




3 


11110 




4 


00000 




5 


10101 




6 


00001 





Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the output operation of FAX G3 




mode 300BPS. 




(Used to check the MODEM operation.) 




Signals are sent in the send level set with the 




soft switch. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


A signal of 300bps is outputted. 




(Send level is set with SW.) 




Enter a number during execution to change the 




signal. 




Press START to start sending a voice message. 




Press CUSTOMSETTING to terminate. 



SIMULATION 66-12 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

1 .NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



Select |l and press [START] key.| X 

XT Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-12 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

EXECUTING... 

1 .NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



Same 
display 



Select |3 and press [START] key.| 
t 



SIMULATION 66-12 

300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

EXECUTING... 

1 .NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



"»► 



SIMULATION 66-12 



300bps SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW.) SELECT 1-6, AND PRESS 

START. 

1 .NO SIGNAL 2.11111 3.11110 4.00000 

5.010101 6.00001 



<List of set values> 



J NO SIGNAL 

2 11111 



No signal 



11110 



00000 



J 10101 

6 00001 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-66 



66-13 



66-15 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to select the FAX dial signal output test. 
(The dial number signal set with this simulation 
is outputted in the dial signal output test with 
SIM 66-14-16) 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


The dial test number is set. 

Enter a number with 1 digit key pad, * key, and 

#key. 

The upper limit is 20 digits. 

Press CLEAR to return to the initial state. 

Press START to register. 



SIMULATION 66-13 



DIAL TEST NUMBER SETTNG. 
INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. 



0-9:[0-9], *[*], #:[#] 



66-14 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to add time to the FAX pulse dial 

mode (10PPS) and to test the dial signal output. 

(The dial number signal set with SIM 66-1 3 is 

outputted.) 

Used to check dialing troubles and the operation. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The dial test is performed. (10PPS output) 
The additional time is set. 
When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed, the 
execution is terminated. 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the add time to the FAX pulse dial 

mode (20PPS) and to test the dial signal output. 

(The dial number signal set with SIM 66-13 is 

outputted.) 

Used to check dialing troubles and the operation. 

(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The dial test is performed. (20PPS output) 
The make time is set. 
When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed, the 
execution is terminated. 



n 



SIMULATION 66-15 

DIAL TEST(20PPS). SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. EXECUTE 

1. MAKE TIME Q '■ [+9 ms I 



Select and i ' 1 i "- 1 — 

I — I Select |l and press [START] key.| Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| = 

P [L J yj "M" nrlrQTADTl ^owl = 



ir |[START] ke"yT 



SIMULATION 66-15 



DIAL TEST(20PPS). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START. 
[1. MAKE TIME] 



^ 

Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-15 



DIAL TEST(20PPS). EXECUTING... 
1. MAKE TIME Q i [+9 ms] 



<List of set values> 



Execution 

1 Dial pulse make time setup (0 - 15) 



Dial is set with the setup value of +19ms. 



n 



SIMULATION 66-14 



DIAL TEST(1 0PPS). SELECT 0-1 , AND PRESS START. 

0. EXECUTE 

1. MAKE TIME Q i [+29 ms] 



Select and , ■ , , ■- , 

i — i Select p and press [START] key.| Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key| 

P \i J yj . ■ ^rlrCTADTl ^,,l 



ir |[START] key] " 



SIMULATION 66-14 

DIAL TEST(1 0PPS). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START. 

[1. MAKE TIME] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-14 
DIALTEST(10PPS). EXECUTING... 
1. MAKE TIME Q I [+29 ms] 



<List of set values> 






Execution 


1 


Dial pulse make time setup (0-15) 



Dial is send with the setup value of +29ms. 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-67 



66-16 



66-18 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) output in the 
FAX tone dial mode. (The dial number signal set 
with SIM 66-13 is outputted.) 
The send level can be set to an optional level. 
Used to check dialing troubles and the operation. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The dial test is performed. (DTMF signal output) 

1) The level (dB) setup is made. 

(Set range: - 15dB) 

2) The difference between high group and low 
group is set. (Set range: 0-15) 

3) When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed, 
the execution is terminated. 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) output in the 




Fax tone dial mode. 






The send level set with the soft switch is 






outputted. 






Used to check the dial IC operation. 






(Only when FAX is installed.) 




Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The DTMF signal output is checked. 
(Output level is set with soft SW.) 
When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed, 
the execution is terminated. 





For the set value, refer to the soft SW specifications. 



SIMULATION 66-16 

DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-2, AND PRESS START. 

0. EXECUTE 

1.HIGH Q (dB) 2. HIGH-LOWg 



SIMULATION 66-18 

DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW) INPUT - 9,* ,#, AND PRESS START. 



Select |1 or 2 and press [START] key] Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key| | 
(When 1 is selected) >|r or|[STARTj key] | 



SIMULATION 66-16 



DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START. 
1.HIGH (dB) 



Press |[START] key] 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key.| 



SIMULATION 66-18 



DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(SOFT SW) EXCUTING.. 



<DTMF signal> 



1 -9, 0, *,# 



(When 2 is selected) 



SIMULATION 66-16 

DIAL TEST(DTMF). SELECT 0-15, AND PRESS START. 

2. HIGH-LOW 



66-19 



press |[START] key.| 

(When is selected) 



U 



Press | [CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



SIMULATION 66-16 



DIAL TEST(DTMF). EXECUTING... 
1.HIGH Q (dB) 2. HIGH-LOWf 



<List of set values> 







Execution 



J HIGH 

2 HIGH-LOW 



High group level 

High group - low group 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to backup the FAX SRAM data 




(Set values of rapid key dialing) into the flash 




Memory (AR-MM9). 




(When FAX is installed and FAX expansion 




memory is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The content of SRAM is backed up into Flash 




Memory(AR-MM9). 



66-17 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to test the dial signal (DTMF) output in the 
Fax tone dial mode. Send level Odb (fixed). 
Used to check the dial IC operation. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The DTMF signal output is checked. 
(Output level 0) 

When CUSTOM SETTING is pressed, 
the execution is terminated. 



SIMULATION 66-19 

SRAM BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM) 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



I 



Press | [START] key] 



1 



SIMULATION 66-19 

SRAM BACK UP. (WRITE TO FLASH ROM) EXCUTING.. 



After completion of backup 
I 

<Set values> 



SIMULATION 66-17 

DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) INPUT 0- 9,* 



,#, AND PRESS START. 



I 



1 



Backup executed 



No backup 



Press | [START] key| 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key.| 



SIMULATION 66-17 



DTMF SIGNAL OUTPUT.(LEVEL MAX) EXCUTING... 



<DTMF signal> 



1 -9, 0, *,# 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-68 



66-20 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to restore the backup data (SIM 66-19) to 
SRAM. (When FAX is installed and FAX 
expansion memory is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Read/write from Flash Memory(AR-MM9) to 
SRAM is performed. 



SIMULATION 66-20 

SRAM BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM) 

ARE YOU SURE ? 

LYES 

2. NO 



I 



Press |[START] key] 



1 



SIMULATION 66-20 



SRAM BACK UP. (READ FROM FLASH ROM) EXCUTING.. 



After completion of reading 
I 

<Set value> 



1 



Read/Write executed 



Read/write not executed 



66-21 



Purpose 


Adjustment, setup, operation data output, check 
(display, print) 


Function (Content) 


Used to print the FAX information (registrations, 
communication management, file management, 
system errors). (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Data 


Operation/Procedure 


Information related to FAX is printed. 

1) Select information to be printed. 

2) The selected information is printed. 

3) The paper size is automatically selected by 
the size stored in the image memory. 



cList of set values> 



1 



REGISTERED 



Various registered information 



2 MANAGEMENT Communication management information 



3 FILE Fine management information 

MANAGEMENT 

_4 SYSTEM ERROR System error information 

~5 PROTOCOL ~~ Protocol information 



66-22 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to adjust the handset sound volume. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The hand set sound volume is set. 

1) Press START to set. 

2) During execution, selection of 1, 2, and 3 is 
possible. 



■■► 



SIMULATION 66-22 

HANDSET VOLUME SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START 

1.MIN 

2.MIDDLE 

3.MAX 



Press |[START] key] 



* 


Press|[CUSTOM SETTING] key| 


■ 


SIMULATION 66-22 




HANDSET VOLUME SETTING. 


SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START. 


EXECUTING... 

1.MIN 

2.MIDDLE 


H 


3.MAX 





Same 
display 



Select |3and press [START] key.| 

* 



SIMULATION 66-22 

HANDSET VOLUME SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START 

EXECUTING... 

1.MIN 

2.MIDDLE 

3.MAX 



-..► 



SIMULATION 66-21 



FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT. SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 
1. REGISTERED 2.MANAGEMENT 

3.FILE MANAGEMENT 4.SYSTEM ERROR 
5.PROTOCOL 



Select and 



press |[START] key.| 



If there is no data to be printed, 
the display returns to the initial state. 



J 



Press |[CDSTOM SETTING] key] 
f 



SIMULATION 66-22 

HANDSET VOLUME SETTING. SELECT 1-3, AND PRESS START 

1.MIN 

2.MIDDLE 

3.MAX 



<List of set values> 



Min, 



Middle 



Max. 



SIMULATION 66-21 



FAX INFORMATION PRINT OUT.EXECUTING.. 
1. REGISTERED 



After completion of printing 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-69 



66-23 



66-25 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to download the FAX program. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The contents of ROM in the option memory (AR- 
MM9) installing section are copied as FAX 
program. 



<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 66-23 

FAX PROGRAM DOWNLOAD. 

EJECT PROTECT PIN, AND PRESS START. 



Purpose Setup 

Function (Content) Used to register the FAX number for MODEM 
dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed.) 



Section 



FAX 



Item Operation 

Operation/Procedure 



<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 66-25 

M-D-IN FAX NUMBER SETTING. 0-9: [0-9],*: [*],#: [#] 

INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. 



BEBEEEg 



66-24 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used clear the FAST memory data. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Select with 10 digit key pad, press START to 
execute the following. 

1 : Fast memory data clear 
2: Not clear 

2) After completion of memory clear, 

reset is made. 



66-26 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to register the external telephone number 
for MODEM dial-in. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 





<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 66-26 

M-D-IN EXTEL NUMBER SETTING. 0-9: [0-9],*: [*],#: [#] 

INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. 



3EBEE1ES 



SIMULATION 66-24 

FAST MEMORY DATA CLEAR. 

ARE YOU SURE? 

LYES 

2. NO 



66-27 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to register the voice-warp transfer number. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 





<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 66-27 

V-WP TRANSMIT NUMBER SETTING. 0-9: [0-9],*: [*],#: [#] 

INPUT NUMBER AND PRESS START. 



3EBEEES 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-70 



66-28 



66-30 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to record a sound message. 
Recording is available in 1 ~ 5, max. 6sec for 
one. (Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Record a sound message from the handset. 

2) Press CUSTOM SETTING to interrupt 
recording 



<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market. > 



SIMULATION 66-28 



VOICE RECORD. 
1. MESSAGE1 
4. MESSAGE4 



SELECT 1-5, AND PRESS START. 



2. MESSAGE2 
5. MESSAGE5 



3. MESSAGE3 



66-29 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to clear the telephone directory. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


1) Select with 10 digit key pad and press START 
to execute the following. 

1 : Telephone directory clear 
2: Telephone directory not clear 



SIMULATION 66-29 
ADDRESS DATA CLEAR. 
ARE YOU SURE ? 
LYES 
2. NO 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to check TEL/LIU status change. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The TEL/LIU status can be checked. 

The display is highlighted when the status is 

changed. 



SIMULATION 66-30 
TEL/LIU SENSO R CHE CK. 
HS1 HS2 I5BB1 EXHS 



<List of set values> 



HS1 



Polarity reverse signal 



HS2 



Polarity reverse signal 



RHS 



Handset hook SW 



EXHS 



External telephone hook SW 



66-31 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to set the TEL/LIU status. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


Fax 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


Entry of only or 1 is effective. 

Shift the cursor to the bit to enter. 

Cursor shift keys : <- : * , -» : #. 

The bits are 1,2,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 from the left. 

The entered bit is highlighted. 

Press STRT to select the relay. 



SIMULATION 66-31 

TEL/LIU SETTING. 

INPUT 0~ 1, AND PRESS START. 

M OVEME NT LEFT: [*] RIGHT: [#] 

1. Ij WIfJ 2.CION 3. MR 

5.9 6. affll 7. DP 



12 3 4 5 6 7 



10001100 



66-32 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the received data. 
(Only when FAX is installed.) 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The fixed data received from the line are 
checked. 



<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market. > 



SIMULATION 66-32 
RECEIVED DATA CHECK. 
CHECKING. ..(OK or NG) 



<Display message> 



CHECKING 


Checking 


OK 


Checking complete 


NG 


Checking end 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-71 



66-33 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to check signal detection. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


When the signal is detected, the display is 
highlighted. 



<This mode is for development, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 66-33 



SIGNAL DETE CT CH ECK. 
BUSY TONE 5Bia CED 



FNET DTM 



SIMULATION 66-35 



MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. 
ARE YOU SURE ? 
LYES 
2. NO 



Press |[START] key] 



I 



SIMULATION 66-35 



MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. EXECUTING... 
LOADER.. .(OK or Check Sum value 1 byte (hexadecimal)) 
MODEM. ..(COMPLETE or NG code 1 byte (Hexadecimal)) 



After completion of writing 



66-34 



Purpose 


Setup 


Function (Content) 


Used to measure and display the communication 
time. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The time spent for communication is measured. 
Send/receives performed in the normal mode. 
The communication time is displayed with the 
simulation, (unit: ms) 



SIMULATION 66-35 
MODEM PROGRAM RELOAD. 
LOADER.. .OK 
MODEM. ..COMPLETE 



<Result of MODEM writing> 



COMPLETE 


Writing completed 


81 


Check sum error 


82 


Write error 


83 


Delete error 


84 


Verify error 


NG 


Due to loader error 



SIMULATION 66-34 
COMMUNICATION TIME DISPLAY. 
***** ms 



<Setup for send> 



Communication means 


memory transmission 


Image quality 


Normal 


Density 


Thin 


ECM 


ON 


Sender record 


OFF 



66-35 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Modem program rewriting. 


Section 


FAX 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The modem program in the FAX program is 
rewritten. 

1) Select with 10 digit key pad and press START 
to execute the following. 

1 : MODEM program rewrite 
2:Not clear 

2) Check the check sum value (loader). 

If it is OK, the test is normally completed. 

If NG, the check sum value 

(1 byte = hexadecimal) is displayed. 

3) If the check sum value is NG, the MODEM 
result is also NG. 

4) The Modem rewrite result is displayed. 



66-36 



Purpose 



Operation test, check 



Function (Content) 



Used to check interface between MFPC and 
MDMC. Check is made in the data line or the 
command line. 



Section 



FAX 



Item 



Operation 



Operation/Procedure 1 ) Select with 1 digit key pad and press START. 
2) When check is "repeat," the operation is 
executed until the result becomes NG or 
CUSTOM SETTING is pressed. 



SIMULATION 66-36 

MFPC-MDMC l/F CHECK . INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START. 

1. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA once) 

2. MFPC->MDMC(DATA once) 

3. MFPC<-MDMC(DATA repeat) 

4. MFPC->MDMC(DATA repeat) 

5. MFPC<-MDMC(CMD once) 

6. MFPC->MDMC(CMD once) 

7. MFPC<-MDMC(CMD repeat) 

8. MFPC->MDMC(CMD repeat) 



Press | [START] key] 



I 



SIMULATION 66-36 
MFPC-MDMC l/F CHECK. 
EXECUTING... 



I 



INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START. 



When check is "once" or "repeat" 
and the result is NG 



When check is "repeat" and 
|[CUSTOM SETTING] keyj is pressed. 





SIMULATION 66-36 

MFPC-MDMC l/F CHECK . INPUT 1-8, AND PRESS START. 

EXECUTING.. .(OK or NG) 




<Lis1 


of display values> 






1 


MFPC <- MDMC 


Data line once only 


2 


MFPC -> MDMC 


Data line once only 


3 


MFPC <- MDMC 


Data line repeat 


4 


MFPC -> MDMC 


Data line repeat 


5 


MFPC <- MDMC 


Command line once only 


6 


MFPC -> MDMC 


Command line once only 


7 


MFPC <- MDMC 


Command line repeat 


8 


MFPC -> MDMC 


Command line repeat 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-72 



Main code 67 



67-2 



Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the parallel l/F operation of the 

printer. 

(This simulation is made only in the production 

site and not in the market. 

It requires a special tool.) 


Section 


Printer 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The Centra port is checked. 

1) Insert the adjustment jig into the Centra port 
under the ready state, and press STRT. 

2) The Centra port check is started. 

3) If normal, OK is displayed. If abnormal, 

the stage number where an error occurred 
and NG are displayed. 



<This simulation is used only for production, and inhibited in the market.> 



SIMULATION 67-2 
CENTRO PORT CHECK. 
CENTRO PORT: 



67-16 










Purpose 


Operation test, check 


Function (Content) 


Used to check the operation of the network card. 


Section 


Printer 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The network card is checked. 










SIMULATION 67-16 

NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK. 

NIC: CHECKING 






Check complete c 


i 




ress|[CUSTOM SETTING] key.| 




SIMULATION 67-16 

NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CHECK. 

NIC: OK (orNG) 




<Display message> 




CHECKING 


Checking 


OK 


Check complete (Normal) 


NG 


Check end (Abnormal) 



Press |[START] key| 
under the ready state. 



Press |[CUSTOM SETTING] key] 



* 


1 


SIMULATION 67-2 
CENTRO PORT CHECK. 




CENTRO PORT: E3 (or MfcW»lMci ) 



<Display message> 



WAITING 


Waiting 


READY 


Check start OK 


OK 


Check complete (normal) 


STAGE*NG 


Check end (An error occurred in Stage *: 1-11) 



67-11 



Purpose 


Adjustment 


Function (Content) 


Used to set Enable/Disable of the parallel l/F 
select signal of the printer. 


Section 


Printer 


Item 


Operation 


Operation/Procedure 


The select signal of Centra port is set. 


Press START to set. 





SIMULATION 67-11 






CENTRO SELECT IN SIGNAL SETTING 


SELECT 0-1 


AND PRESS START. 


0. OFF 
1.0N 




■a 



<Set values> 



OFF 



ON (Initial value) 



AR-M350 SIMULATIONS 10-73 



[11] TROUBLE CODES 
1. Trouble codes list 



Trouble 
codes 


Contents 


Remark 


Trouble 
detection 


C1 


00 


MC trouble 




PCU 


E6 


10 


CIS shading trouble 
(Black correction) 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


11 


CIS shading trouble 
(White correction) 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


14 


CIS-ASIC communication 
trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


E7 


02 


Laser trouble 




PCU 


03 


HDD trouble 


With HDD 
installed 


Controller 


06 


Decode error trouble 




Controller 


10 


Shading trouble 
(Black correction) 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


11 


Shading trouble 
(White correction) 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


14 


CCD-ASIC communication 
trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


50 


LSU connection trouble 




PCU 


80 


SCANNER PWB 
communication trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


ICU 


90 


PCU communication trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


ICU 


F1 


00 


Finisher communication trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


08 


Finisher staple shift motor 
trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


10 


Finisher stapler motor trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


11 


Finisher bundle exit motor 
trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


15 


Finisher lift motor trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


19 


Finisher alignment motor 
trouble FRONT 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


20 


Finisher alignment motor 
trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


80 


Finisher 24V power supply 
trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 


PCU 


87 


Finisher staple rotation motor 
trouble 


With Finisher 
installed 




F1 


00 


Mail bin stacker communication 
trouble 


With Mail bin 
stacker installed 


PCU 


02 


mail bin stacker main drive 
motor trouble 


With Mail bin 
stacker installed 


PCU 


12 


Mail bin stacker gate trouble 


With Mail bin 
stacker installed 


PCU 


80 


Mail bin stacker 24V power 
supply trouble 


With Mail bin 
stacker installed 


PCU 



Trouble 
codes 


Contents 


Remark 


Trouble 
detection 


F1 


03 


Console finisher paddle motor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


06 


Console finisher slide motor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


10 


Console finisher stapler motor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


11 


Console finisher bundle exit 
motor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


15 


Console finisher lift motor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


19 


Console finisher alignment 
motor trouble FRONT 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


20 


Console finisher alignment 
motor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


30 


Console finisher 
communication trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


31 


Console finisher fold sensor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


32 


Console finisher punch unit 
communication trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


33 


Console finisher punch side 
register motor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


34 


Console finisher punch motor 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


35 


Console finisher punch side 
register sensor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


36 


Console finisher punch timing 
sensor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


37 


Console finisher backup RAM 
trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


38 


Console finisher punch backup 
RAM trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


81 


Console finisher transport 
motor trouble 


With Console 

Finisher 

installed 


PCU 


F2 


00 


Toner concentration sensor 
open 




PCU 


02 


Toner supply abnormality 




PCU 


04 


Improper cartridge 
(Destination error, life cycle 
error) 




PCU 


05 


CRUM error 




PCU 


39 


Process thermistor breakdown 




PCU 


F3 


12 


Tray 1 lift-p trouble 




PCU 


22 


Tray 2 lift-up trouble 
(Multi-purpose tray) 


Multi-purpose 
tray 


PCU 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 11-1 



Trouble 
codes 


Contents 


Remark 


Trouble 
detection 


F6 


00 


FAX board communication 
trouble 


When the Fax 
board is 
installed 


ICU 


01 


FAX expansion Flash Rom 
abnormality 


When the Fax 
board is 
installed 


ICU 


04 


FAX MODEM operation 
abnormality 


When the Fax 
board is 
installed 


FAX 


F7 


01 


FAX board EEPROM 
read/write error 


When the Fax 
board is 
installed 


FAX 


H2 


00 


Thermistor open (HL1) 




PCU 


01 


Thermistor open (HL2) 




PCU 


H3 


00 


Heat roller high temperature 
detection (HL1) 




PCU 


01 


Heat roller high temperature 
detection (HL2) 




PCU 


H4 


00 


Heat roller low temperature 
detection (HL1) 




PCU 


01 


Heat roller low temperature 
detection (HL2) 




PCU 


H5 


01 


5-time continuous POD1 
not-reaching JAM detection 




PCU 


L1 


00 


Scanner feed trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


L3 


00 


Scanner return trouble 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


L4 


01 


main motor lock detection 




PCU 


02 


Drum motor lock detection 




PCU 


L6 


10 


Polygon motor lock detection 




PCU 


L8 


01 


No full-wave signal 




PCU 


02 


Full-wave signal width 
abnormality 




PCU 


U6 


00 


Desk/LCC communication 
trouble 


With Paper feed 
desk installed 


PCU 


01 


Desk/LCC1CS lift-up trouble 
(Multi-purpose tray) 


With Paper feed 
desk installed 


PCU 


02 


Desk2 CS lift-up trouble/LCC1 
lift-up trouble 


With Paper feed 
desk installed 


PCU 


03 


Desk3 CS lift-up trouble/LCC2 
lift-up trouble 


With Paper feed 
desk installed 


PCU 


10 


Desk/LCC transport motor 
trouble 


With Paper feed 
desk installed 


PCU 


EE 


EL 


Auto developer adjustment 
trouble (Over-toner) 


Only during 
DIAG 


PCU 


EU 


Auto developer adjustment 
trouble (Under-toner) 


Only during 
DIAG 


PCU 


F9 


02 


Centra port check error 




Controller 


03 


NIC port check error 




Controller 


U1 


01 


FAX Battery abnormality 


With FAX board 
installed 


Controller 


02 


RTC read abnormality 
(common with FAX, 
on ICU PWB) 


When the Fax 
board is 
installed 


ICU 



Trouble 
codes 


Contents 


Remark 


Trouble 
detection 


U2 


00 


EEPROM read/write error 
(Controller) 




Controller 


11 


Counter check sum error 
(Controller EEPROM) 




Controller 


12 


Adjustment value check sum 
error (Controller EEPROM) 




Controller 


80 


Scanner section EEPROM 
read/write error 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


81 


Scanner section memory sum 
check error 


When the 
scanner is 
installed 


SCANNER 


90 


PCU section EEPROM read/ 
write error 




PCU 


91 


PCU section memory sum 
check error 




PCU 


U7 


00 


PC/MODEM communication 
error 




Controller 


PF 


" 


RIC copy inhibit command 
reception 




Controller 


CH 


- 


Door open (CH ON) 




PCU 


00 


No developer cartridge 




PCU 


01 


No toner cartridge 




PCU 


- 


- 


Auditor not ready 




Controller 


PC 


- 


Personal counter not installed 




Controller 



2. Details of trouble codes 



MAIN 


SUB 




C1 


00 


Content 


MC trouble 


Detail 


Main charger output abnormality 
(Output open) 

Trouble signal is outputted from the high 
voltage transformer. 


Cause 


The main charger is not installed properly. 

The main charger is not assembled properly. 

Disconnection of connector of high voltage 

transformer. 

High voltage harness disconnection or 

breakage. 


Check and 
remedy 


Use the diag mode or DIAG to check the 
main charger output. 

Check for disconnection of the main charger. 
Replace the high voltage unit. 


E6 


10 


Content 


CIS shading trouble (Black correction) 


Details 


The CIS black scan level is abnormal when 
the lamp is off. 


Cause 


Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit 
CIS unit abnormality 
Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check CIS unit harness. 
Check CIS unit. 
Check scanner PWB. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -2 



MAIN 


SUB 




E6 


11 


Content 


CSI shading trouble (White correction) 


Details 


The CIS white reference plate scan level is 








abnormal when the lamp is on. 


Cause 


Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit 








Dirt on the white reference plate. 








CIS lighting error 








CIS unit installation trouble 








CIS unit abnormality 








Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 


Clean the white reference plate. 






Remedy 


Check CIS light quantity (SIM 5-3) and 

lighting. 

Check CIS unit harness. 

Check scanner PWB. 


14 


Content 


CIS communication trouble 


Details 


Communication trouble (clock sync) between 








scanner PWB and CIS-ASIC 


Cause 


Abnormal harness installation to CIS unit 








CIS unit abnormality 








Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 


Check CIS unit harness. 






Remedy 


Check CIS unit. 
Check scanner PWB. 


E7 


02 


Content 


Laser trouble 


Detail 


BD signal from LSU is kept OFF, or ON. 


Cause 


The connector of LSU or the harness in LSU 








is disconnected or broken. 








The polygon motor does not rotate normally. 








The laser home position sensor in LSU is 








shifted. 








The proper voltage is not supplied to the 








power line for laser. 








Laser emitting diode trouble 








PCU PWB trouble 








Controller PWB trouble 


Check and 


Check for disconnection of the LSU 






remedy 


connector. 

Use DIAG (SIM 61 -1 ) to check LSU 

operation. 

Check that the polygon motor rotates 

normally or not. 

Check light emission of laser emitting diode. 

Replace the LSU unit. 

Replace the PCU PWB. 

Replace the Controller PWB. 


03 


Content 


HDD trouble 


Detail 


HDD does not operate properly in the 








machine with HDD installed. 


Cause 


HDD is not installed properly to the Controller 








PWB. 








HDD does not operate properly in the 








Controller PWB. 








Controller PWB trouble 


Check and 


Check installation of HDD to the Controller 






remedy 


PWB. 

Check connection of the harness of HDD to 

the Controller PWB. 

Use DIAG (SIM 62-2, -3) to check read/write 

of HDD. 

Replace HDD. 

Replace Controller PWB. 



MAIN 


SUB 




E7 


06 


Content 


Decode error trouble 


Detail 


A decode error occurs during making of an 








image. 


Cause 


Data error during input from PCI to PM. 
PM trouble 








Data error during image compression/ 

transfer. 

Controller PWB abnormality 


Check and 
remedy 


Check insertion of the PWB. (PCI bus) 

If the error occurred in a FAX job, check 

installation of the FAX PWB. 

For the other cases, check the Controller 

PWB. 








Replace the Controller PWB. 


10 


Content 


Shading trouble (Black correction) 


Details 


CCD black scan level abnormality when the 
copy lamp is off. 


Cause 


Abnormal installation of flat cable to CCD 








unit. 

CCD unit abnormality 

Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check installation of CCD unit flat cable. 
Check CCD unit. 
Check scanner PWB. 


11 


Content 


Shading trouble (White correction) 


Details 


CCD white reference plate scan level 
abnormality when the copy lamp is ON. 


Cause 


Abnormal installation of flat cable to CCD 








unit. 








Dirt on mirror, lens, white reference plate 
Copy lamp lighting abnormality 
Abnormal installation of CCD unit 
CCD unit abnormality 
Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Clean mirror, lens, and white reference plate. 

Check copy lamp light quantity (SIM 5-3) and 

lighting. 

Check CCD unit. 








Check scanner PWB. 


14 


Content 


CCD communication trouble 


Details 


Communication trouble (clock sync) between 
scanner PWB and CCD-ASIC 


Cause 


Abnormal installation of harness to CCD unit 
CCD unit abnormality 
Scanner PWB abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check CCD unit harness. 
Check CCD unit. 
Check scanner PWB. 


50 


Content 


LSU connection trouble 


Detail 


An LSU which does not conform to the 








machine is installed. 


Cause 


PCU PWB trouble 
LSU trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Check LSU PWB. Check PCU PWB. 
Check connection of the connector and the 
harness between PCU and LSU. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -3 



MAIN 



F1 



SUB 
80 



90 



00 



08 



10 



11 



15 



Content Communication trouble (ICU detection) 
between ICU and scanner 



Details Communication establishment error/Fleming/ 
Parity/Protocol error 



Cause Defective connection of slave unit PWB 
connector 

Defective harness between slave unit PWB 
and ICU PWB 

Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin 
breakage 



Check & 
Remedy 

Content 

Details 

Cause 

Check & 

Remedy 

Content 

Detail 



Check connector and harness of slave unit 

PWB and ICU PWB. 

Check grounding of machine. 

PCU communication trouble 



Finisher (AR-FN6) communication trouble 
Communication cable test error after turning 
on the power or exiting from DIAG. 
Communication error with the finisher 



Cause Improper connection or disconnection of 

connectors and harness between the 
machine and the finisher. 
Finisher control PWB trouble 
Control PWB (PCU) trouble 
Malfunction by noises 



Check and Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power, 
remedy Check connectors and harness in the 

communication line. 

Replace the finisher control PWB or PCU 

PWB. 
Content Finisher (AR-FN6) staple shift motor trouble 
Detail Staple motor drive trouble 

Cause Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Finisher control PWB trouble 



Check and Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check operations of 
remedy the staple motor. 



Content Finisher (AR-FN6) stapler motor trouble 



Detail 



Stapler motor operation abnormality 



Cause 



Check and 
remedy 



Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 

Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 

operation. 



Content Finisher (AR-FN6) bundle exit motor trouble 
Detail Bundle exit motor operation abnormality 



Cause Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 



Check and Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 

remedy operation. 

Content Finisher (AR-FN6) lift motor trouble 

Detail Lift motor operation abnormality 

Cause Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 



MAIN 


SUB 




F1 


19 


Content 


Finisher (AR-FN6) front alignment motor 
trouble 


Detail 


Front alignment motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


20 


Content 


Finisher (AR-FN6) rear alignment motor 
trouble 


Detail 


Rear alignment motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


80 


Content 


Finisher (AR-FN6) power abnormality 


Detail 


The 24V power is not supplied to the finisher 
PWB. 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 
connector and harness 
Finisher control PWB trouble 
Power unit trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-2) to check the sensor. 


87 


Content 


Finisher (AR-FN6) staple rotation motor 
trouble 


Detail 


Front staple rotation motor trouble 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 
Overcurrent to the motor 
Finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


F1 


00 


Content 


Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) 
communication trouble 


Detail 


Communication cable test error after turning 
on the power or exiting from DIAG. 
Communication error with the Mail-bin 
stacker. 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 

connector and harness between the machine 

and the Mail-bin stacker. 

Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble 

Control PWB (PCU) trouble 

Malfunction by noises 


Check and 
remedy 


Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power. 

Check harness and connector in the 

communication line. 

Replace the Mail-bin stacker PWB or PCU 

PWB. 


02 


Content 


Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) 
transport motor abnormality 


Detail 


Transport motor trouble 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-21 ) to check the transport 
motor operation. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -4 



MAIN 


SUB 




F1 


12 


Content 


Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) gate trouble 


Detail 


Gate operation abnormality 


Cause 


Gate lock 

Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


UseDlAG (SIM3-21) to check the transport 
gate operation. 


80 


Content 


Mail-bin stacker (AR-MS1) 
power abnormality 


Detail 


The 24V power is not supplied to the Mail-bin 
stacker PWB. 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 
connector and harness 
Mail-bin stacker control PWB trouble 
Power unit (AR-DC1) trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-20) to check the sensor 
operation. 


F1 


03 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
paddle motor trouble 


Detail 


Paddle motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


06 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
slide motor trouble 


Detail 


Slide motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


10 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
stapler motor trouble 


Detail 


Stapler motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


11 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
bundle exit motor trouble 


Detail 


Bundle exit motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


15 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) lift motor trouble 


Detail 


Lift motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 



MAIN 


SUB 




F1 


19 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
front alignment motor trouble 


Detail 


Front alignment motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


20 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
rear alignment motor trouble 


Detail 


Rear alignment motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


30 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
communication trouble 


Detail 


Communication cable test error after turning 
on the power or exiting from DIAG. 
Communication error with the console 
finisher 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 

connector and harness between the machine 

and the console finisher. 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 

Control PWB (PCU) trouble 

Malfunction by noises 


Check and 
remedy 


Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power. 
Check connectors and harness in the 
communication line. 

Replace the console finisher control PWB or 
PCU PWB. 


31 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
fold sensor trouble 


Detail 


Sensor input value abnormality 


Cause 


Sensor breakage 

harness breakage 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-2) to check the sensor 
operation. 


32 


Content 


Communication trouble between the console 

finisher (AR-FN7) 

and the punch unit (AR-PN1). 


Detail 


Communication err between the console 
finisher and the punch unit. 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 
connector and harness between the console 
finisher and the punch unit. 
Console finisher control PWB trouble 
Control PWB (PCU) trouble 
Malfunction by noise 


Check and 
remedy 


Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power. 
Check connectors and harness in the 
communication line. 
Replace the console finisher control PWB. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -5 



MAIN 


SUB 




F1 


33 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 

punch (AR-PN1) side registration motor 

trouble 


Detail 


Punch side registration motor operation 
abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


34 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
punch (AR-PN1) motor trouble 


Detail 


Punch motor operation abnormality 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 


35 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 

punch (AR-PN1) side registration sensor 

trouble 


Detail 


Sensor input value abnormality 


Cause 


Sensor breakage 

Harness disconnection 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-2) to check the sensor 
operation. 


36 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 

punch (AR-PN1) timing sensor trouble 


Detail 


Sensor input value abnormality 


Cause 


Sensor breakage 

Harness disconnection 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-2) to check the sensor 
operation. 


37 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 
backup RAM trouble 


Detail 


Backup RAM contents are disturbed. 


Cause 


Console finisher control PWB trouble 
Malfunction by noise 


Check and 
remedy 


Replace the console finisher control PWB. 


38 


Content 


Console finisher (AR-FN7) 

punch (AR-PN1) backup RAM trouble 


Detail 


Punch unit backup RAM contents are 
disturbed. 


Cause 


Punch control PWB trouble 
Malfunction by noise 


Check and 
remedy 


Replace the punch control PWB. 


81 


Content 


Console finisher transport motor abnormality 


Detail 


Transport motor trouble 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 

Overcurrent to the motor 

Console finisher control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM3-3) to check the motor 
operation. 



MAIN 


SUB 




F2 


00 


Content 


Toner control sensor abnormality 


Detail 


Toner control sensor output open 


Cause 


Connector harness trouble 
Connector disconnection 


Check and 
remedy 


Check connection of the toner control sensor. 
Check connection of connector and harness 
to the main PWB. 
Check for disconnection of harness. 


02 


Content 


Toner supply abnormality 


Detail 


Toner control sensor output value becomes 
under-toner too earlier. 


Cause 


Connector harness trouble 

Toner control sensor trouble 

The toner cartridge seal is not removed 


Check and 


Check connection of the connector in the 






remedy 


toner motor section. 

Check connection of connector and harness 

to the main PWB. 

Check for disconnection of harness. 

Toner control sensor output check DIAG 

(SIM25-1) 

Remove the toner cartridge seal. 


04 


Content 


Improper cartridge (life cycle error, etc.) 


Detail 


An improper process cartridge is inserted. 


Cause 


IC chip trouble 
Improper cartridge 


Check and 
remedy 


Insert a proper cartridge. 


05 


Content 


CRUM error 


Detail 


Communication with IC chip cannot be 
made. 


Cause 


IC chip trouble 
Improper cartridge 


Check and 
remedy 


Insert a proper cartridge. 


39 


Content 


Process thermistor trouble 


Detail 


Process thermistor open 


Cause 


Process thermistor trouble 

Process thermistor harness disconnection 

PCU PWB trouble 


Check and 


Check connection of harness and connector 






remedy 


of the process thermistor. 
Check PCU PWB. 


F3 


12 


Content 


Machine no. 1 tray lift-up trouble 


Detail 


PED does not turn ON in the specified time. 
LUD does not turn ON in the specified time. 


Cause 


PED/LUD trouble 

No. 1 tray lift-up trouble 

Check connection of harness between the 








PCVU PWB, lift-up unit, and paper feed unit. 


Check and 


Check PED, LUD, and their harness and 






remedy 


connectors. 

Check the lift-up unit. 


22 


Content 


Multi purpose tray lift-up trouble 


Detail 


MCPED does not turn ON in the specified 

time. 

MCLUD does not turn ON in the specified 

time. 


Cause 


MCPED/MCLUD trouble 
Multi purpose tray lift-up motor trouble 
Harness disconnection f the PCU PWB, the 
lift-up unit, and the paper feed unit. 


Check and 
remedy 


Check MCPED, PCLUD, and their harness 
and connectors. 
Check the lift-up unit. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -6 



MAIN 


SUB 




F6 


00 


Content 


Communication trouble (ICU detection) 
between ICU and FAX 


Details 


Communication establishment error/Fleming/ 
Parity/Protocol error 


Cause 


Slave unit PWB connector disconnection 

Harness abnormality between slave unit 

PWB and ICU PWB. 

Slave unit PWB mother board connector pin 

breakage 

Slave unit ROM abnormality/No ROM/ 

Reverse insertion of ROM/ROM pin 

breakable 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check connector harness between slave unit 

PWB and ICU PWB. 

Check grounding of machine. 

Check slave unit PWB ROM. 


01 


Content 


FAX expansion flash memory abnormality 
(ICU detection) 


Details 


Expansion flash memory with SRAM backup 
data is installed. 


Cause 


SRAM backup data is detected in expansion 

flash memory. 

Expansion flash memory in which SRAM 

data are backed up with SIM 66-19 is 

installed. 


Check & 
Remedy 


Restore backup data to SRAM with SIM 66- 
20, and clear expansion flash memory with 
SIM 66-10. If data are unnecessary, 
clear expansion flash memory with SIM 66- 
10. 


04 


Content 


FAX modem operation abnormality 


Details 


FAX PWB modem chip operation 
abnormality 


Cause 


The boot test pin in the FAX PWB is shorted 

and normal operation is tried. 

Modem chip operation abnormality in FAX 

PWB 


Check & 
Remedy 


Turn on the power again without shorting the 
boot test pin in the FAX PWB. 
Replace FAX PWB. 


F7 


01 


Content 


FAX board EEPROM read/write error 


Details 


EEPROM access error (read/write) 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble 


Check & 
Remedy 


Replace FAX PWB. 


H2 


00- 

HL1 
(RT 
H1) 

01- 
HL2 
(RT 
H2) 


Content 


thermistor open 
Fusing unit not installed 


Detail 


Thermistor is open. 

(An input voltage of 2.92V or above is 

detected.) 

Fusing unit not installed 


Cause 


Thermistor trouble 

Control PWB trouble 

Fusing section connector disconnection 

AC power trouble 

Fusing unit not installed 


Check and 
remedy 


Check harnesses and connectors from the 

thermistor to the control PWB. 

Use DIAG (SIM14) to clear the self diag 

display. 



MAIN 


SUB 




H3 


00- 
HL1 


Content 


Fusing section high temperature trouble 


Detail 


The fusing temperature exceeds 242 °C. 




(HI 




(An input voltage of 0.27V or above is 




H1) 




detected.) 


Cause 


thermistor trouble 




01 — 




Control PWB trouble 




HL2 




Fusing section connector disconnection 




(RT 
H2) 




AC power trouble 


Check and 


Use DIAG (SIM5-2) to check the heater lamp 






remedy 


Blinking operation. 

If the heater lamp blinks normally: 
Check the thermistor and its harness. 
Check the thermistor input circuit in the 
control PWB. 
If the heater lamp keep lighting: 
Check the AC PWB and the lamp control 
circuit in the control PWB. 
Use DIAG (SIM14) to cancel the trouble 


H4 


00- 

HL1 


Content 


Fusing section low temperature trouble 


Detail 


•The set temperature is not reached within 




(HI 




the specified time (normally 3 min) when 




H1) 




warming up or resetting from pre-heating. 




01 — 




•Under the ready state. 




HL2 




(An input voltage of 1.21V or below is 




(RT 
H2) 




detected 5 times continuously.) 


Cause 


thermistor trouble 








Heater lamp trouble 








Control PWB trouble 








Thermostat trouble 








AC power trouble 








Interlock switch trouble 


Check and 


Use DIAG (SIM5-2) to check the heater lamp 






remedy 


Blinking operation. 

If the heater lamp blinks normally: 
Check the thermistor and its harness. 
Check the thermistor input circuit in the 
control PWB. 
If the heater lamp does not light: 
Check for heater lamp disconnection and 
thermostat disconnection. 
Check the interlock switch. 
Check the AC PWB and the lamp control 
circuit in the control PWB. 
Use DIAG (SIM14) to cancel the trouble. 


H5 


01 


Content 


5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching jam 
detection 


Detail 


5-time continuous POD1 not-reaching jam 








detection 


Cause 


A fusing section jam is not properly removed. 








(Jam paper remains.) 








POD1 sensor trouble, or harness 








disconnection 








Improper installation of fusing unit 


Check and 


Check jam paper in the fusing section. 






remedy 


(winding, etc.) 

Check POD1 sensor harness, and check the 

fusing unit installation. 

Use DIAG (SIM14) to cancel the trouble. 


L1 


00 


Content 


Scanner feed trouble 


Details 


Scanner feed is not completed within the 








specified time. 


Cause 


Scanner unit abnormality 








Scanner wire disconnection 


Check & 


Check scanning with SIM 1 -1 . 






Remedy 





AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -7 



MAIN 


SUB 




L3 


00 


Content 


Scanner return trouble 


Details 


Scanner return is not completed within the 
specified time. 


Cause 


Scanner unit abnormality 
Scanner wire disconnection 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check scanning with SIM 1 -1 . 


L4 


01 


Content 


Main motor lock detection 


Detail 


The motor lock signal is detected for 1 .5sec 
during rotation of the main motor. 


Cause 


main motor trouble 

Check connection of harness between the 
PCU PWB and the main motor. 
Control circuit trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM25-1) to check the main 
motor operation. 

Check harness and connector between the 
PCU PWB and the main motor. 


02 


Content 


Drum motor lock detection 


Detail 


The motor lock signal is detected for 1 .5sec 
during rotation of the drum motor. 


Cause 


Drum motor trouble 

Improper connection of harness between the 

PCU PWB and the drum motor. 

Control circuit trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM25-1) to check the drum 
motor operation. 

Check harness and connector between the 
PCU PWB and the drum motor. 


L6 


10 


Content 


Polygon motor lock detection 


Detail 


It is judged that the polygon motor lock signal 
is not outputted. 

Lock signal is checked in the interval of 
10sec after starting the polygon motor, and it 
is judged that the polygon motor does not 
rotate normally. 


Cause 


The LSU connector or harness in the LSU is 
disconnected or broken. 
Polygon motor trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM61-1) to check the polygon 
motor operation. 

Check connector and harness connection. 
Replace LSU. 


L8 


01 


Content 


No fullwave signal 


Detail 


Full wave signal is not detected. 


Cause 


The PCU PWB connector or the power unit 
harness is disconnected or broken. 
PCU PWB trouble 
Power unit trouble 


Check and 


Check connection of the harness and 






remedy 


connector. 
Replace PCU PWB. 
Replace the power unit. 


02 


Content 


Full wave signal width abnormality 


Detail 


It is judged as full wave signal frequency 

abnormality. 

(When the detection cycle is judged as 69Hz 

or above or 42.5Hz or below) 


Cause 


The connector or harness of the PCU PWB 








and the power PWB is disconnected. 
PCU PWB trouble 
Power unit trouble 


Check and 


Check connection of the harness and 






remedy 


connector. 

Replace the PCU PWB. 

Replace the power unit. 



MAIN 


SUB 




U6 


00 


Content 


Desk/LCC communication trouble 


Detail 


Desk/LCC communication error 
Communication cable test error after turning 
on the power or exiting DIAG. 


Cause 


Improper connection or disconnection of 
connector and harness 
Desk control PWB trouble 
Control PWB (PCU) trouble 
Noise or interference 


Check and 
remedy 


Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power. 
Check connection of the harness and 
connector in the communication line. 


01 


Content 


Desk/LCC No. 1 tray lift-up trouble 


Detail 


Desk/LCC No. 1 tray lift-up trouble 


Cause 


Sensor trouble 
Desk control PWB trouble 
Gear breakage 
Lift-up motor trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM4-2) to check the lift-up 

sensor detection. 

Use DIAG (SIM4-3) to check the lift-up motor 

operation. 


02 


Content 


Desk No. 2 tray/LCC1 lift-up trouble 


Detail 


Desk No. 2 tray/LCC lift-up trouble 


Cause 


Sensor trouble 
Desk control PWB trouble 
Gear breakage 
Lift-up motor trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM4-2) to check the lift-up 

sensor detection. 

Use DIAG (SIM4-3) to check the lift-up motor 

operation. 


03 


Content 


Desk No. 3 tray/LCC2 lift-up trouble 


Detail 


Desk no. 3 tray lift-up trouble 


Cause 


Sensor trouble 
Desk control PWB trouble 
Gear breakage 
Lift-up motor trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM4-2) to check the lift-up 

sensor detection. 

Use DIAG (SIM4-3) to check the lift-up motor 

operation. 


10 


Content 


Desk/LCC transport motor trouble 


Detail 


Desk/LCC transport motor operation trouble 


Cause 


Motor lock 

Motor rpm abnormality 
Overcurrent to the motor 
Desk control PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM4-3) to check the transport 
motor operation. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -8 



MAIN 


SUB 




EE 


EL 


Content 


Auto developer adjustment trouble 
(Over-toner) 


Detail 


The sample data is at 68 or below when auto 
developer adjustment is performed. 


Cause 


Toner concentration sensor trouble 

Charging voltage, developing voltage 

abnormality 

Insufficient toner concentration 

Developing unit trouble 

PCU PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM25-2) to perform auto 
developer adjustment. 


EU 


Content 


Auto developer adjustment trouble 
(Under-toner) 


Detail 


The sample data is of 168 or above when 
auto developer adjustment is performed. 


Cause 


Insufficient toner concentration 

Charging voltage, developing voltage 

abnormality 

Insufficient toner concentration 

Developing unit trouble 

PCU PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Use DIAG (SIM25-2) to perform auto 
developer adjustment. 


F9 


02 


Content 


PRT Centra port check error 


Detail 


Controller Centra port trouble 


Cause 


Centra port trouble 
Controller PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Replace the Controller PWB. 


03 


Content 


NIC port check error 


Detail 


NIC port check error 


Cause 


NIC port trouble 
NIC PWB trouble 
Controller PWB trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Replace the NIC PWB. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


U1 


01 


Content 


FAX Battery abnormality 


Detail 


Backup SRAM battery voltage fall 


Cause 


Battery life 

Battery circuit abnormality 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V 

or above. 

Check the battery circuit. 


02 


Content 


RTC read abnormality 
(common with FAX, on ICU PWB) 


Details 


The value read from RTC on ICU PWB is 
[EE]h (abnormal). 


Cause 


RTC circuit abnormality 
Battery voltage fall 
Battery circuit abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Set the time again with key operation, and 

check that time advances properly. 

Check RTC circuit. 

Check that battery voltage is about 2.5V or 

above. 

Check battery circuit. 



MAIN 


SUB 




U2 


00 


Content 


EEPROM read/write error (Controller) 


Detail 


EEPROM write error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

EEPROM is not initialized. 

Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit 

trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that EEPROM is properly inserted. 
Save the counter/adjustment values with the 
DIAG simulation. 

Use DIAG (SIM 16) to cancel U2 trouble. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


11 


Content 


Counter check sum error (Controller) 


Detail 


Counter data area check sum error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

Control circuit trouble by noise 

Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit 

trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that EEPROM is properly inserted. 
Save the counter/adjustment values with the 
DIAG simulation. 

Use DIAG (SIM16) to cancel U2 trouble. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


12 


Content 


Adjustment value check sum error 
(Controller) 


Detail 


Adjustment data area check sum error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 








Control circuit trouble by noise 
Controller PWB EEPROM access circuit 
trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that EEPROM is properly inserted. 
Save the counter/adjustment values with the 
DIAG simulation. 

Use DIAG (SIM16) to cancel U2 trouble. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


80 


Content 


EEPROM read/write error (Scanner) 


Details 


Scanner EEPROM write error 


Cause 


EEPROM abnormality 

EEPROM which is not initialized is installed. 








Hang of control circuit due to noises 
Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit 
abnormality 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check that EEPROM is set properly. 

Record counter/adjustment values with the 

simulation to protect the data from being 

deleted. 

Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16. 








Replace scanner PWB. 


81 


Content 


Memory check sum error (Scanner) 


Details 


Scanner memory check sum error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

Control circuit freeze by noises 

Scanner PWB EEPROM access circuit 

trouble 


Check & 
Remedy 


Check that EEPROM is set properly. 

Record counter/adjustment values with the 

simulation to protect the data from being 

deleted. 

Cancel U2 trouble with SIM 16. 








Replace scanner PWB. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 1 1 -9 



MAIN 


SUB 




U2 


90 


Content 


EEPROM read/write error (PCU) 


Detail 


PCU EEPROM write error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

EEPROM is not initialized. 

Hang of control circuit due to noises 

PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that EEPROM is properly inserted. 
Save the counter/adjustment values with the 
DIAG simulation. 

Use DIAG (SIM16) to cancel U2 trouble. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


91 


Content 


Memory check sum error (PCU) 


Detail 


PCU memory check sum error 


Cause 


EEPROM trouble 

EEPROM is not initialized. 

PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble 

Uninitialized EEPROM installed. 


Check and 
remedy 


Check that EEPROM is properly inserted. 
Save the counter/adjustment values with the 
DIAG simulation. 

Use DIAG (SIM16) to cancel U2 trouble. 
Replace the Controller PWB. 


U7 


00 


Content 


RIC communication trouble 


Detail 


RIC communication trouble 
Communication cable test error after turning 
on the power or exiting DIAG. 


Cause 


Disconnection of connector and harness 
RTC control PWB trouble 
Control PWB (Controller) trouble 
Noise or interference 


Check and 
remedy 


Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power. 
Check connector and harness in the 
communication line. 


PF 


00 


Content 


RIC copy inhibit signal is received. 


Detail 


Copy inhibit command from RIM (host) is 
received. 


Cause 


Judged by the host. 


Check and 
remedy 


Inform to the host. 



3. Network communication error 



•Error code table 



Error code 



Content of error 



CE-01 The print server card (AR-NC5J) is broken down or is not 

installed. 
CE-02 The specified mail server or FTP server is not found. 
CE-03 Communication with the specified server is interrupted 

during image transmission. 



CE-04 



The account name or the password for the FTP server is 
invalid. 



CE-05 The directory of the FTP server is invalid. 
CE-00 A communication error other than the above is generated, 
such as NIC cable disconnection 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 11-10 



4. Fatal / Non-Fatal Error Tables 

A. Troubles where the machine can be operated depending on the conditions (Include Multi Function) 



Trouble 


Judgment 
block 


Trouble 
code 


Operation-possible mode 


Copy read 
(interruption, etc.) 


FAX send 


Email send 


FAX print 


Print 


List print 


Scanner section troubles 
(Mirror motor, lens, copy lamp) 


SCANNER 


L1,L3,U2 
(80,81) 


X 


X 


X 


O 


O 


O 


FAX board trouble 


Controller/ 
FAX 


F6.F7 


O 


X 


O 


X 


O 


O 


FAX power OFF 


Controller 







X 


O 


X 


O 


O 


Network error 


Controller 


CE 





O 


X 


O 


O 


O 


Staple trouble 


PCU 


F1(10) 


A1 


O 





A1 


A1 


A1 


Paper feed tray trouble 


PCU 


F3, U6 
(Desk) 


A2 


O 





A2 


A2 


A2 


PCU section troubles 
(Motor, fusing, etc.) 


PCU 




X 


O 





X 


X 


X 


After-work trouble 


PCU 




A3 


O 





A3 


A3 


A3 


Laser trouble 


PCU 


E7 

(02 only), 

L6 


X 


O 





X 


X 


X 


HDD trouble 


Controller 


E7 (03) 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


CCD troubles (Shading, etc.) 


SCANNER 


E7 

(10, 11, 13) 


X 


X 


X 











Scanner communication trouble 


Controller 


E7 (80) 


X 


X 


X 











PCU communication trouble 


Controller 


E7 (90) 


X 








X 


X 


X 


Backup battery voltage fall 


Controller 


U1 (01,02) 





X 


X 












O : Operation possible 



Operation impossible 



A : Operation possible depending on conditions 



A1 
A2 
A3 



Operation possible except for the staple mode 

Operation possible except for the trouble tray 

Operation possible except for the trouble paper exit section 



B. Operation inhibited 



Trouble 


Judgment 
block 


Trouble 
code 


Operation-possible mode 


Copy read 
(interruption, etc.) 


FAX send 


Email send 


FAX print 


Print 


List print 


Memory trouble 

(Expansion RAM not installed, etc.) 


Controller 


U2 

(00, 11, 12) 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


External communication invalid (RIC) 


Controller 


U7, PF 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Image memory trouble, decode error 


Controller 


E7(01,06) 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 



X : Operation impossible 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 11-11 



C. Operation mode in FAX send/receive operations 










Trouble 


Trouble code 


Operation enable mode 


Send reservation 


Print 


Send call 


Receive call 


Note 


PCU general troubles 







X 





Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


Paper feed tray trouble 


F3,U6 





A 1 


O 







Paper exit section trouble 


F1 





A 3 










Scanner general troubles 




X 













FAX trouble 


F6,F7 


X 


X 


X 


X 




ICU trouble 


E7(01 ,06,80,90) 


X 


X 


X 


X 




ICU memory error 


112(00,11,12) 


X 


X 


X 


X 




RIC external communication trouble, PF 


U7 


X 


X 


X 


X 




Backup battery voltage fall 


U1 


X 


A 2 


X Note 


X 


Transfer enable 


Door open 







X 





Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


Toner empty 







X 





Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


No process cartridge, etc. 







X 





Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


Paper empty 







X 





O Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


Paper jam 







X 





Note 


Possibly causing memory full. 


Document jam 




X 













Simulation 




X 


X 


X 


X 




Key operation (Communication disable) 




X 


X 


X 


X 





O : Operation enable 



X : Operation disable 



A 1 
A2 

A3 



Enable in other than trouble tray 

Go to FAX status check menu, and printing of list is allowed. 

Received document is outputted. 

Paper exit enable to other tray than trouble one. 



D. Trouble mode process 



Machine operation possible 
depending on conditions 



Operations except for the trouble mode are possible (READY). 

For the mode where operations are impossible, only setup can be allowed, and the message is provided to show 

that operations are impossible. (NOT READY in this case.) 

(Display) 

A dialog is shown in case of a trouble. For the mode where operations are possible, the OK button is added to the 

message. For the mode where operations are impossible, the OK button is not shown, and the process to cancel is 

indicated. 

Machine operation is impossible The trouble display is always shown, and all setup operations are invalid. 



E. Writing to the trouble memory 

In this series, the simulation (diag) allows to select whether the same trouble is written to the trouble memory when it occurs. If the DIAG simulation is 
set as above, when any trouble occurs, its hysteresis is written to the trouble memory. DIAG(SIM 26-35) 

0: The same trouble as the previous one is not recorded. (Default) 

1 : When a trouble occurs, it is written to the trouble memory without exception. 



AR-M350 TROUBLE CODES 11-12 



[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION 
1. Block Diagram 





f^\ 




o 




\pj 


en 


X 1a 




m 


r\l 


-^— 


> 


n 


n 


n 


_l 


O 


o 


o 


LU 
Q 


0- 


Q- 


0- 



Q 
Q. 

< 

CO 

u_ 

0. 

2 


Q 

o 

Q. 

< 

i 


Q 
Q. 
Q- 

< 

CO 
Q_ 

2 


CNJ 

Q 
Q. 
D. 

< 

LU 

Q. 

2 


Q 

3: 

CO 
Q 

CO 
CO 




i — 

UJ 
CO 

^> 

< 

CO 

1 

Q. 

2 




i — 

LU 
CO 
Li_ 
Q_ 

CM 
CO 

1 

Q. 

2 



1 - 



^n 


_l 




u 


< ) 




LL 


U_ 




! ) 


< ) 




2 


2 


2 


2 




1 ' 


—i 


C/l 




i 


r/l 


> 


< ) 


( > 


( > 


2 


2 


2 


fril 


r^ 


-or 

=5 


-i 


Q. 


i 


t/l 


ii 


o 


o 


o 


2 


2 


2 






n 




CO 


n 


h- 


n 




rr 


HI 


_J 


n 




n 


n 


) 


() 




o 


o 


2 


2 




2 


2 




AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-1 



2. Circuit Diagram 



CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (MFP) 1/3 



CCD1 



CN101 
SFW30S-2STE1 



GND2(DGND) 
1_CLK+ 
1 CLK- 



1_DATA0+ 
1 DATAO- 



GND2(DGND) 
1 DATA1+ 



/1 DBL- 



GND2(DGND) 



FRM CCD1 



PAGE1 
CLK CCD1 



ADD_CCD1 
TXD CCD1 



GND2(DGND) 
+3.3V 



-I-3.3V 

GND2(DGND) 



5V(+5VD) 
5V(+5VD) 
GND2(AGND) 



CN102 
BM03B-SRSS-TB 



>5V(+5VA) 
>5V(+5VA) 



GND2(AGND) 
+12V 



SH 

GND2(AGND) 



12 FRM CCD1 



-13 PAGE1 
-14 CLK CCD1 



GND2 
1_CLK+ 
1 CLK- 



1_DATAO+ 
1 DATAO- 



GND2 

1 DATA1+ 



-15 ADD_CCD1 
-16 TXD_CCD1 



17 RXD CCD1 



-28 GND2 
-28 +12V 



SCN 
JNT 
PWB 



cwr 

TX25-80P-LT-H1 
+24V 1 1 

GND2 2 



+ 12V 
GND2 



+5V 
+ 5V 



GND2 
+3.3V 



GND2 
GND2 



FRMJXD1 
/1 DBL+ 



PD 
SEGO 



SEG2 

ffl 

/F3 



_TH 

/CCFT 



IcdS- 
IcdM- 



IcdCPI- 
lcdCP2- 



LcdDO- 
IcdDI- 
LcdD2- 



LcdD3- 
GND2 



/XL 
XH 



/STMPS 
+24V 



GND2 
+ 12V 



GND2 

+5V 

+5V 



GND2 
+3.3V 



GND2 
GND2 



1_DATA1- 
1 DATAO- 



1_CLK- 
PDSELO 



PDSEL2 
/KEYIN 



SEG1 
/FO 



/F2 
FRDY 



/BZR 
lcdS+ 



LcdCPH- 
LcdCP2+ 



JcdDO+ 
lcdD1 + 



JcdD2+ 
lcdD3+ 



GND2 
YH 



TXD_CCD1 12 
CLK CCD1 



1_DATAH- 16 
1 DATAO+ 



(NC) 31 

LCD-VEE 32 



/CL1 51 

RXD CCD1 52 



ADD CCD1 53 



IcdDIS 71 

LCD-VCC 72 



CN7 

9604S-05C 

GND2 H 



GND2 
/CL1 



+24V 
+24V 



CN6 

B4B-PH-K-S 

+24V1 fl 



/STAMPS 2 

/STSET 3 



FFC-5Pin 
5IGND2 



4 GND2 
3 /CL1 



+24V 
+24V 



179228-4+175694-4 
►24V1 



2 /STAMPS 

3 /STSET 



BOARD TO BOARD 



+24V 
GND2 



+12V 
GND2 



+5V 
+5V 



GND2 
+3.3V 



-12 TXD_CCD- 
-13 CLK_CCD" 



-16 1_DATAH- 
-17 1 DATA0+ 



-22 SEG2 

-23ff1 

-24ff3 

-25 TH 

-26 /CCFT 
-27 IcdS- 
-28 IcdM- 
-29 IcdCPI- 
-30 lcdCP2- 
-31 (NC) 
-32 LCD-VEI 
-33 LcdDO- 
-34 IcdDI- 
-35 LcdD2- 
-36 LcdD3- 
-37 GND2 
-38 /XL 
-39 XH 



JGND2 
+12V 



1GND2 
+3.3V 



-49 GND2 
-50 GND2 



-52 RXD CCD 
-53 ADD CCD 



-56 1_DATA1- 
-57 1 DATAO- 



-73JcdD0+_ 
-74 IcdDH- 
-75JcdD2+_ 
-76JcdD3+_ 
-77 GND2 
-78 YH 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-2 





























CN1 


BOARD TO BOARD 


CN16 PM1Q 
TX24-80R-LT-H1 „_ „„ 












>-80P-LT-H1 


1 CLK+ 


48 




1 CLK+ 


MFP 
PWB 


*v 


1 


1 


+24V 


SCN 
PWB 


1 CLK- 


47 


: 


5 1_CLK- 




JD2 


2 


2 


GND2 


1 DAIAU+ 


4fi 




1 DAIAU+ 




2V 


3 


3 


+12V 


1 DAIAU- 


4 = 


: 


6 1 DAIAO- 




JD2 


4 


4 


GND2 


1 DAIA1+ 


¥ 




j 1_DAIA1+ 




5 
6 




5 
6 


+5V 
+5V 


1 DAIA1- 
/1 UBL+ 


4^ 
42 


: 


7 1JJAIA1- 
1 /1_DBL+ 


JD2 
,3V 


/ 
8 




7 
8 


GND2 
+3.3V 


/1_DBL- 
GND2 


41 
4( 


3 


8 /1_DBL- 
, GND2 


JD2 


9 


9 


GND2 


GND2 




3 


9 GND2 




JD2 


10 


10 


GND2 


2 CLKI+ 






, 2 CLK+ 




■S CCD 


11 




11 


RES CCD 


2 CLK- 




1 


; 2 CLK- 


D CCD1 


12 


12 


TXD CCD1 


2_DAIA0+ 


\f 




' 2 DATA0+ 




K CCD1 


13 




13 


CLK CCD1 


2 DAIAU- 


■/iy 


' 


1 2 DATA0- 


M CCD1 


U 


14 


FRM CCD1 


2 DAIA1+ 






i 2 DATA1+ 




DBL+ 




15 


/1 DBL+ 


2 DATA1- 


X 




2 2 DATA1- 








DATA1+ 




16 


1 DATA1+ 


12 DBL+ 


35 




) 12 DBL+ 






DATAO+ 


17 


17 


1 DATA0+ 


a DBL- 


31 


4 


3 12 DBL- 




CLK+ 




18 


1 CLK+ 


GND2 


3fi 


• 


GND2 






ISEL1 




19 


PDSEL1 


GND2 


• 
















20 


20 


PD 


LcdD0+ 




• 


1 LcdDU+ 






GO 


■>■ 


21 


SEGO 




?1 


/ 


5 LcdDO- 


G2 


22 




22 


SEG2 


LcdD1+ 


?f 


1 


2 LcdD1+ 






• 






/F1 


LcdD1- 


2 = 


' 


5 LcdD1- 






24 


/F3 


LcdD2+ 






3 LcdD2+ 














25 


TH 


LcdD2- 


• 




7 LcdD2- 










:ft 




26 


/CCFT 


LcdD3+ 






4 LcdD3+ 










s- 


?7 


27 


IcdS- 


LcdD3- 


■/■ 


' 


E LcdD3- 


M- 






28 


IcdM- 


LcdM+ 






5 LcdM+ 








CP1- 




29 


IcdCPI- 


LcdM- 






9 LcdM- 










CP2- 


3C 


30 


lcdCP2- 


LcdS+ 






6 LcdS+ 










31 


31 


(NC) 


LcdS- 


1/ 




LcdS- 








D-VEE 


32 


32 


LCD-VEE 


LcdCP1 + 






7 LcdCP1 + 








1DO- 


33 


33 


LcdDO- 


LcdCPI- 






1 LcdCPI- 








D1- 






IcdDI- 


LcdCP2+ 






8 LcdCP2+ 






1D2- 


35 


35 


LcdD2- 


LcdCP2- 






2 LcdCP2- 








1D3- 




36 


LcdD3- 


LcdDIS 






9 LcdDIS 










JD2 


37 


37 


GND2 


LC D-VCC 


r 




J LCD-VCC 












/XL 


LCD-VEE 


10 




LCD-VEE 












39 


XH 


RES MFP 


9 




4 RES MFP 










"MPS 


4C 


40 


/STMPS 


VCCW SCN 


8 




1 VCCW SCN 






*V 


4' 


41 


+24V 


FRDY 


/ 




5 FRDY 






JD2 


42 


42 


GND2 


TXD SCN 


6 




2 TXD SCN 






2V 


43 




+12V 


RXD SCN 


5 


I 


6 RXD SCN 






JD2 


44 


44 


GND2 


DSR SCN 


4 




3 DSR SCN 






V 


45 


45 


+5V 


DTR SCN 


3 




7 DTR SCN 






~J 




46 


+5V 


RES SCN 


2 




4 RES SCN 








JD2 


47 


47 


GND2 


POF SCN 


1 




8 POF SCN 






,3V 


4? 


48 


+3.3V 


CN18 
BM20B-SRDS-G-TF 










JD2 






GND2 


/SCNSET 






5 /SCNSET 








JD2 


5C 


50 


GND2 


GND2 






9 GND2 








51 


51 


/CL1 


+ 12V 


11 




6 +12V 










ID CCD1 


52 


52 


RXD CCD1 


+ 12V 


1/ 




+12V 






ID CCD1 


53 


53 


ADD CCD1 


GND2 






7 GND2 








GE1 


54 


54 


PAGE1 


GND2 






1 GND2 








DBL- 


55 


55 


/1 DBL- 


+5V 






8 +5V 






DATA1- 




56 


1 DATA1- 


+5V 






2 +5V 










DATAO- 


57 


57 


1 DATAO- 


+5V 






9 +5V 








CLK- 




58 


1 CLK- 


+5V 


1' 




3 +5V 








ISELO 


5c 


59 


PDSELO 


+3.3V 


11 


Q 


+3.3V 


ISEL2 


fir 




60 


PDSEL2 


+3.3V 


9 


6 


4 +3.3V 


EYIN 


61 




61 


/KEYIN 


GND2 


8 




1 GND2 






IG1 


62 


62 


SEG1 


GND2 


7 




5 GND2 








63 


63 


/FO 


+24V 


6 




2 +24V 












64 


/F2 


+24V 


5 




6 +24V 








DY 


65 


65 


FRDY 


+24V 


4 




3 +24V 






:r 




66 


/BZR 


GND2 


3 




7 GND2 








s+ 


67 


67 


lcdS+ 


GND2 


2 




4 GND2 






1M+ 




68 


LcdM+ 


GND2 


1 




8 GND2 








1CP1 + 






LcdCP1 + 






□ i 


H3P-SHF-AA+ 












H 






1CP2+ 


7C 


70 


LcdCP2+ 






BL 
GY 

LB 




1 


+5V 


OCSW 








+5V 


1 


J GY 


DIS 


71 


71 


IcdDIS 


2 


GND2 




GND2 


2 


' LB 


D-VCC 


72 


72 


LC D-VCC 


3 


OCSW 




OCSW 


3 






DO+ 


7? 


73 


lcdDO+ 


RD 










+24V 


4 


RD 






D1 + 


74 


74 


lcdD1 + 


BR 

LB 




ORS 
LED 






/LEDO 


b 


1 BR 


D2+ 


75 


75 


lcdD2+ 




/LED1 


6 


-| LB 


D3+ 




76 


lcdD3+ 














JD2 


77 


77 


GND2 














MHPS 


1 










78 


YH 


SY GY 

IS 


1 


MHPS 


MHPS 










GND2 


? 








/YL 


2 


GND2 








+5V 


3 


"SET 


8fi 


8( 


/STSET 






3 


+5V 










S5B- 


>H 












MIMA 


1 




MIM 










MIMB 


2 






9604S-05C 


/MIMA 


3 










JD2 


1 




5 


GND2 


CL1 




/MIMB 


4 






JD2 


2 


4 


GND2 


+24V 


5 








3 


3 


/CL1 


















D H 






4 


2 


+24V 
















/PNC 


1 


1 






5 


1 


+24V 






/COPY 


2 


2 










CN6 




/CA 


3 


3 




RD 






/READY 


4 


4 




1 


1 


+24V1 


STMP 






RR 


/AUD 


5 


5 


"AMPS 


2 


2 


/STAMPS 


IB 


+5V 


6 


6 


"SET 


3 


3 


/STSET 


GY 


GND2 


7 


7 




4 


4 


GND2 






+24V 


8 


8 














<NC) 


9 


9 




/TC 


1C 


10 




+24V 


11 


11 




PNC-a 


12 


12 




GND2 


13 


13 

































AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-3 



CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (MFP) 2/3 



SPF 
MOTOR 



PHNR-6-H+BU6P-TR-P-H 
BR 

RD 



T PL 
V BR 



5- RD 
t PL 



SRA-21T-4(5) 



5V(POD) 



SPOD GND2 



SPOD 



SOCD 



GND2 [3 

PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR 



SPFC 



- 2 +24V 

- 1 /SPFC 



P-H 
RD 
BR 



PHNR-3-H+BU3P-TR-P-H 
iTT mRD 



SRRC 



(NC) 
/SRRC 



SMR-03V-NC+SMP-03V-N 



SPFVR 



1 I VAREF 



"SPWS 



5~GND2 



- BR 

- GY 



SPLS1 



SPLS1 
GND2 



BR 
GY 



SPLS2 



+5V 
SPLS2 



i BL 
- PL 



SPFS 



PHNR-2-H+BU2P-TR-P-H 
iRD 





2 


+24V 


1 




1 


/SPFS 


2 





^(0)fg 
phnr-6-h+bu6p-tr-p-h 



»5V(POD) 



GND2 



SPOD 



CND 

B6B-PH-K-S 
BR -J 
RD 4" 



BR 3 



RD 7T 
PL R 



CNB 
B22B-PHDSS-B 




GY 
RD 



(NC) 



CNC 

B26B-PHDSS-B 



/SPFMOO 

+5V 



GND2 
GND2 



SPF 



PWB 



+24V 
+24V 



GND2 
GND2 



/SPFB 
SDSS 



SPFB 
SRRC 



/SPFSET 
SPFS 



VAREF 
SPFC 



SPPD 
SPLS2 



CNA 

B12B-PHDSS-B 
VAREF 



GY 

BL 



BL 
PL 



GND2 
+5V 



+5V 
SPLS2 



1C| GND2 
24V 



NOASSEM 



CN13 

S26B-PHDSS 
1 I SPFA 



/SPFB 
12| SDSS 



/SPFA 

/SPFMOO 

+5V 



GND2 
GND2 



>24V 
►24V 



GND2 
GND2 



13 SPFB 

14 SRRC 



15 /SPFSET 

16 SPFS 



17 VAREF 

18 SPFC 



25 SPOD 

26 SPWS 



SCN 
PWB 



SRA-21T-4 (O)^ 
SRA-21T-4 (Q)-' 



*©' 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-4 



CNC 

l-PHDSS-B 



, GY 



NO ASSEMBLY 



CN13 

S26B-PHDSS 
- 1 I SPFA 



-"Ml /SPFB 
-IS - 12 SDSS 



/SPFA 

/SPFMOO 

+5V 



GND2 
GND2 



►24V 
►24V 



^)F 



SCN 
PWB 



/cv_staple 
;cv_duplex 
;cv_sizeo 
;cv_sizei 

;CV_SIZE2 
/CV SIZE3 



CN17 
B12B-PH-K-S 



+24V 
GND2 



+5V 
1NCL 



//MIMDA 
/MIMDA 



//MIMDB 
/MIMDB 



/MIRMOO 
/MIRM01 



/MIRM02 
MIRMOV 



CN15 
B8B-PH 



RES-SCN 
DSR SCN 



RXD_SCN 
TXD SCN 



DTR_SCN 
+5V 



(NC) 



CN12 
S28B- PHDSS 
12 DBL- 



CLK_CCD2 
PAGE2 



ADD_CCD2 
TXD CCD2 



RES_CIS 
RXD CCD2 



+3.3V 
+3.3V 



+24V 
GND2 



+12V 
GND2 



+5V 
GND2 



+5V 

/CISSET 



1NCL 
1NCL 



SRA-21T-4 



CN2 

B26B-PHDSS 
12 DBL- 



1C FRM CCD2 



CLK_CCD2 
12| PAGE2 



CN1 

9604S-35F 
VLED [35- 



DGND 
VAS 



2 CLK+ 



GND2(DGND) 



13 ADD_CCD2 

14 TXD CCD2 



15 RES_CIS 

16 RXD CCD2 



CIS 



CNT 



CLK 
DGND 



DATA 
DGND 



J.D 

DGND 



►3.3V 
►3.3V 



SCLK 
DGND 



24V 

2tj GND2(AGND) 



/LST 
DGND 



22 GND2(AGND) 



SDO 
DGND 



_34- 

_33- 

32- 

31- 

30- 

29- 

28- 

_27- 

26- 

25- 

_24- 

23- 

22- 

21- 

_20- 

_19- 

"18- 

"17- 

"16- 

15- 



23 +5V 

24 GND2(AGND) 



SD1 
DGND 



T3- 
"12- 



25 +5V 
26'CISSET 



SD2 
DGND 



10- 

'9 - 



FF3-35-R15 
- 35JVLED ~ 
-34 DGND 
-33 VAS 



-25 CLK 
-24 DGND 
-23 DATA 
-22 DGND 



-19 SCLK 
-18 DGND 
-17 /LST 
-16 DGND 
-15 SDO 
-14 DGND 
-13 SD1 
-12 DGND 

i SD2 
-16 DGND 



CISun 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-5 



CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (MFP) 3/3 



LCD 



TOUCH 



CCFT 



GND2 
(NC) 



(NC) 
(NC) 



(NC) 
GND2(Vss) 



LCDD3 
LCDD2 



LCDD1 
LCD DO 



GND2(Vss) 
LCD-VEE 



LCD-VCC 
led DIS 



GND2(Vss) 
CP2 



GND2(Vss) 
CP1 



LCDM 
LCDS 



FFC-4PIN 
4- 



(NC) 
/CCFT 



CN4 

20FLS-SM1-TB 



GND2Q/SS) 
(NC) 



(NC) 
(NC) 



(NC) 
GND2(Vss) 



LCDD3 
LCDD2 



GND2(Vss) 
121 LCD-VEE 



13 LCD-VCC 

14 led DIS 



15 GND2Q/SS) 

16 CP2 



17 GND2(Vss) 

18 CP1 



19 LCD M 

20 LCD S 



CN5 

04FM-1.0ST 
/YL 



2 (NC) 

3 /CCFT 



ORSPD 



LVDS 
PWB 





PHR-6 


BR 


CN2 
B6B-PH-SM3-TB 




PDSELO 


1 


1 


PDSELO 




LB 




PDSEL1 


2 


2 


PDSEL1 




PL 




PDSEL2 


3 


3 


PDSEL2 




BL 




+5V 


4 


4 


+5V 




BF 




PD 


5 


5 


PD 




G> 




GND2 


6 


6 


GND2 
















MFP 
OPE 

PWB 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-6 



GND2 

(NC) 

(NC) 

(NC) 

(NC) 

GND2(Vss) 

LCDD3 

LCDD2 

LCDD1 

LCD DO 

GND2(Vss) 

LCD-VEE 

LCD-VCC 

led PIS 

GND2(Vss) 

CP2 

GND2(Vss) 

CP1 

LCDM 
LCDS 



20- 



14- 
13- 
12- 
11- 
10- 
9 - 



FFC-4PIN 

~/YL [4- 



XH 

YH 



(NC) 2- 

/CCFT 3 - 



CN4 

20FLS-SM1-TB 
GND2(Vss) 
(NC) 



(NC) 
(NC) 



(NC) 

GND2(Vss) 



LCDD3 
LCDD2 



GND2(Vss) 
121 LCD-VEE 



13 LCD-VCC 

14 led DIS 



15 GND2(Vss) 

16 CP2 



17 GND2(Vss) 

18 CP1 



19 LCDM 

20 LCD S 



LVDS 
PWB 



CN5 

04FM-1.0ST 

11/YL 



2 XH 

3 YH 



2 (NC) 

3 /CCFT 



CN2 
9604S-05C 
+3T3V [s 



+3.3V .4 

LCD-VEE 3 



GND2 
GND2 



CN1 

30FMZ-BT 



XH 

/YL 



/XL 
YH 



/CCFT 
+24V 



GND2 24 

TH 23 



2 PDSEL1 

3 PDSEL2 



MFP 
OPE 

PWB 



GND2 22 

LcdD3- 21 

LcdD3+ 20 



LcdD2- 
LcdD2+ 



LcdD1- 
LcdD1+ 



LcdDO- 
LcdD0+ 



LVD-VEE 
LCD-VCC 12 



LcdDIS 

GND2 10 



LcdCP2- 
LcdCP2+ 



GND2 
LcdCPI- 



LcdCPH- 
LcdM- 



LcdM+ 
LcdS- 



(NC) 
(NC) 



/BZR 
(NC) 



FRDY 
GND2 



GND2 
GND2 



/F3 
/F2 



/F1 
/FO 



SEG2 
SEG1 



SEGO 
/KEYIN 



+5V 
+5V 



GND2 
PD 



+5V 
PDSEL2 



PDSEL1 
PDSELO 



CN4 

9604S-05C 
1 I +3.3V 



2 +3.3V 

3 LCD-VEE 



4 GND2 

5 GND2 



CN2 

30FMN-BTK 



GND2 
10| LcdD3- 
LcdD3+ 



12 LcdD2- 

13 LcdD2+ 



XH 
/YL 



/XL 

YH 



/CCFT 
+24V 



GND2 

TH 



14 LcdD1- 

15 LcdD1+ 



16 LcdDO- 

17 LcdD0+ 



18 LVD-VEE 

19 LCD-VCC 



22 LcdCP2- 

23 LcdCP2+ 



24 GND2 

25 LcdCPI- 



26 LcdCPH- 

27 LcdM- 



28 LcdM+ 

29 LcdS- 



CN3 
24FMN-BTK 



(NC) 
(NC) 



/BZR 
(NC) 



FRDY 
GND2 



GND2 
GND2 



/F1 
12J/F0 



13 SEG2 

14 SEG1 



15 SEGO 
16 /KEYIN 



19 GND2 
26 PD 



23 PDSEL1 

24 PDSELO 



SCN 
JNT 
PWB 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-7 



CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [ENGINE 3] 3/4 



FUSING UNIT 






♦ 200V 




CN3 

B03P-VH 

(200V) 


T 


r' 


AC.DC 
PWB 


o 


M -i 






I 


ELP-03V+ELF 


- 1 


L2 


1 


2 


(NC) 


2 




N2 


3 















# 200V 

09R-RWZV-K2GGP4+CZHR-04V- 











B-4 


Rth1 








Rth1 


B-3 


GND2 
















B-2 


Rth2 








B-1 


GND2 
















1 


HL1 




HL1 


2 


HL2 


HL2 


3 


L 


L 


4 


F-GND 


F-GND 













FAX 
DCPS 



AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-8 



CN2 
i-PH-K- S(100V/200V) 



+24PR 


1 


GND2 


2 


HLPR\ 


3 


HLCNT1 


4 


HLCNT2 


5 


MSW MON 


6 



, CN4 

'"(id6v/2bovy 



+24V1 


1 


+24V2 


2 


+24V3 


3 


+5V1 


4 


+5V1 


5 


+3.3V 


6 


+3.3V 


7 


GND2 


8 


GND2 


9 


GND2 




GND2 


11 


FW 


12 




Z 




6 
D 









OUTLET 
D ins are soldered. 



OPTION DCPS 



♦ 200V 



# 200V 

09R-RWZV-K2GGP4+CZHR-04V-H 



B-3 GND2 



Rlh1 
GND2 



B-2 Rlh2 
B-1 GND2 



Rlh2 
GND2 



1 IHL1 



2 HL2 

3 L 



HL2 

L 



NO ASSEMBLY 



CN14 

B14B-PH-K-S 

1 | FW 

2 +24VPR 



3 GND2 

4 HLPR\ 



5 HLCNT1 

6 HLCNT2 



7 Rlh1 

8 GND2 



9 Rlh2 

10 GND2 



11 +24V1 

12 MSWPR\ 



13 MSW MON 
jj (NC) 



1 +24V1 

2 +24V2 

3 +24V3 



4 GND2 

5 GND2 



CN18 
B6 P-VH 
■5V1 



4 +3.3V 

5 GND2 



CN3 

B03P-VH 

(200V) 








2: 


c; 


AC.DC 
PWB 


C! 


M -l 




X 


ELP-03V+ELR-03V 


- 1 


L2 


1 




2 


(NC) 


2 




N2 


3 

















PCU 



PWB 



CTOTl 
B8B-PH-K-R 
GND2 



PCU_RES 
PCU-DSR 



PCU-RXD 
PCU-TXD 



PCU-DTR 
+5V1 




•X 200V 



WH f 

WH- 



VLP-03 
HL1 



AC, DC 
PWB 

CN1 

B03P-VL(100V /200V) 
HL1 



#250(200V)(BK) 




AC.DC 



MSW" 





























> 


1— 






> 


< 


CO 


± 








X 


- 








VLP-04V+VLR-04V 
WHr 



MFP 
only 



,„«LP-02+VLR-02 







BK 










I L 


L 


FAX 




pnwFR 








H 


SW ' N 






DCPS 






BK 




" N 
















I L 






DCPR 


WH 




I N 





















AR-M350 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12-9 



CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT 



(Danish) ADVARSEL ! 

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig handtering. 

Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri 

af samme fabrikat og type. 

Lever det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. 

(English) Caution ! 

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. 

Replace only with the same or equivalent type 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer's instructions. 

(Finnish) VAROITUS 

Paristo voi rajahtaa, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. 

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan 

tyyppiin. Havita kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden 

mukaisesti. 

(French) ATTENTION 

II y a danger d'explosion s' il y a remplacement incorrect 

de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du 

meme type ou d'un type equivalent recommande par 

le constructeur. 

Mettre au rebut les batteries usagees conformement aux 

instructions du fabricant, 

(Swedish) VARNING 

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. 

Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent 

typ som rekommenderas avapparattillverkaren. 

Kassera anvant batteri enligt fabrikantens 

instruktion. 

(German) Achtung 

Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. 

Als Ersatzbatterien durfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder 

vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. 

Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom 

Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen. 



CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL 

(For USA.CANADA) 

Contains lithium-ion battery. Must be disposed of properly. 

Remove the battery from the product and contact 

federal or state environmental 

agencies for information on recycling and disposal options. 




COPYRIGHT © 2001 BY SHARP CORPORATION 

All rights reserved. 

Printed in Japan. 

No part of this publication may be reproduced, 

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, 

in any form or by any means, 

electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, 

without prior written permission of the publisher. 



Trademark acknowledgments 

Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. 

and other countries. 

IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. 

PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. 

Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. 

All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. 



SHARP CORPORATION 
Digital Document System Group 
Quality & Reliability Control Center 
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan 

2001 May Printed in Japan (j